diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'lib/lufa/Projects')
261 files changed, 76764 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a734d960ba --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the AVRISP project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "AVRISP-MKII.h" + +#if (BOARD != BOARD_NONE) + /* Some board hardware definitions (e.g. the Arduino Micro) have their LEDs defined on the same pins + as the ISP, PDI or TPI interfaces (see the accompanying project documentation). If a board other + than NONE is selected (to enable the LED driver with the programmer) you should double-check that + no conflicts will occur. If there is a conflict, turn off the LEDs (set BOARD to NONE in the makefile) + or define a custom board driver (see the LUFA manual) with alternative LED mappings. + */ + #warning Board specific drivers have been selected; make sure the board LED driver does not conflict with the programmer ISP/PDI/TPI interfaces. +#endif + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + V2Protocol_Init(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + #if (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII) + /* On the USBTINY-MKII target, there is a secondary LED which indicates the current selected power + mode - either VBUS, or sourced from the VTARGET pin of the programming connectors */ + LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER, (PIND & (1 << 0)) ? 0 : LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER); + #endif + + AVRISP_Task(); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + #if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) + UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(); + #endif + + /* USB Stack Initialization */ + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + /* Setup AVRISP Data OUT endpoint */ + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1); + + /* Setup AVRISP Data IN endpoint if it is using a physically different endpoint */ + if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK)) + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1); + + /* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Processes incoming V2 Protocol commands from the host, returning a response when required. */ +void AVRISP_Task(void) +{ + /* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */ + if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) + return; + + V2Params_UpdateParamValues(); + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR); + + /* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */ + if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY); + + /* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */ + V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + } +} + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + * + * \param[in] wValue Descriptor type and index to retrieve + * \param[in] wIndex Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language) + * \param[out] DescriptorAddress Address of the retrieved descriptor + * + * \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ae2d041484 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AVRISP.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AVRISP_H_ +#define _AVRISP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + #if defined(ADC) + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h> + #endif + + #include "AVRISPDescriptors.h" + #include "Lib/V2Protocol.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY LEDS_LED2 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the target is being powered by VBUS. */ + #define LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER LEDS_LED3 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void AVRISP_Task(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..76d612ec05 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt @@ -0,0 +1,346 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage AVRISP MKII Programmer Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>8KB versions with reduced features only</i> + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Vendor Specific Class</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description + * + * Firmware for an Atmel Studio compatible AVRISP-MKII clone programmer. This project will enable the USB + * AVR series of microcontrollers to act as a clone of the official Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer, usable within + * Atmel Studio or with any software capable of driving a real Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer. In its most + * basic form, it allows for the programming of AVR TINY, MEGA and XMEGA devices at the programmer's VCC voltage from + * within Atmel Studio with no special hardware other than the USB AVR and the parts needed for the USB + * interface. If the user desires, more advanced circuits incorporating level conversion can be made to allow for the + * programming of target AVRs running at a different voltage to the programmer. + * + * This device spoofs Atmel's official AVRISP-MKII device PID so that it remains compatible with Atmel's AVRISP-MKII + * drivers. It is currently tested working under the following configurations: + * + * - <b>Windows:</b> Atmel Studio 7, with alternative driver + * - <b>Windows:</b> AVRDUDE 6.2, with alternative driver + * - <b>Linux:</b> AVRDUDE 6.1 + * + * <b>Note that this clone requires a libUSB based driver under Windows,</b> due to an incompatible change in the official + * Jungo based driver. The alternative driver given here will function with both real and clone AVRISP devices in Atmel + * Studio 7 onwards under Windows - and as a bonus, also provides AVRDude access to the programmer. + * + * As of Atmel Studio version 7.0.1417 the legacy Jungo driver has been deprecated in favor of an official libUSB based + * driver, making the driver packaged here superfluous. Use the driver packaged here only if you are still using an earlier + * Atmel Studio 7 build, otherwise the official Atmel libUSB driver should be used. + * + * Note that this design currently has the following limitations: + * - No reversed/shorted target connector detection and notification + * - A separate header is required for each of the ISP, PDI and TPI programming protocols that the user wishes to use + * + * On AVR models with an ADC converter, the USB AVR's AVCC pin should be tied to 5V (e.g. VBUS) and the + * \c VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL token should be set to an appropriate ADC channel number in the project makefile for VTARGET + * detection to operate correctly. On models without an ADC converter, VTARGET will report a fixed 3.3V level at all times + * which should allow the programmer to remain compatible at the protocol level with all AVR devices. + * + * While this application can be compiled for USB AVRs with as little as 8KB of FLASH, for full functionality 16KB or more + * of FLASH is required. On 8KB devices, ISP or PDI/TPI protocol programming support can be disabled to reduce program size. + * + * \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues: + * + * \par XMEGA EEPROM programming fails in some cases. + * Several users have reported that XMEGA EEPROM programming fails unless the chip is erased first. If a non-blank EEPROM + * is present, writing further EEPROM data causes corruption. + * <a href="https://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa/issues/25">LUFA issue tracker entry</a>. + * + * \section Sec_Installation Installation + * The programmer supports multiple platforms, both Windows and Linux. + * + * \subsection SSec_LinuxInstallation Linux Installation + * On Linux systems, the programmer should be usable out of the box with no special setup other than (on some systems) + * editing of the system permissions to allow the programmer to be used from a non-elevated (root) context. The programmer + * is compatible with the free open source AVRDude programming software project. + * + * \subsection SSec_WindowsInstallation Windows Installation + * On Windows systems, due to an unfortunate limitation of the USB AVR devices and the Atmel Studio platform, the programmer + * requires an alternative libUSB based driver. Uninstall the existing Jungo driver for the device (if installed) and replace + * it with the driver that ships with this project, to enable access to the programmer in Atmel Studio and AVRDUDE. + * + * \section Sec_ISP ISP Connections + * Connections to the device for SPI programming (when enabled): + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>ISP 6 Pin Layout:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MISO</td> + * <td>PDO</td> + * <td>1</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td> + * <td>VTARGET</td> + * <td>2</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>SCLK</td> + * <td>SCLK</td> + * <td>3</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MOSI</td> + * <td>PDI</td> + * <td>4</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>2</sup></b></td> + * <td>/RESET</td> + * <td>5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>6</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * In addition, the AVR's OCR1A pin will generate a 4MHz clock, to act as an external rescue device clock if the + * fuses have been mis-set. To use the recovery clock, connect the OCR1A pin of the USB AVR to the target AVR's + * XTAL1 pin, and set the ISP programming speed to 125KHz (note: other ISP speeds will not work correctly). + * + * <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n + * <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i> + * + * \section Sec_PDI PDI Connections + * Connections to the device for PDI programming (when enabled): + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>PDI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td> + * <td>DATA</td> + * <td>1</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td> + * <td>VTARGET</td> + * <td>2</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>3</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>4</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>XCK</td> + * <td>CLOCK</td> + * <td>5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>6</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n + * <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n + * + * \section Sec_TPI TPI Connections + * Connections to the device for TPI programming (when enabled): + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th> + * <th><b>TPI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td> + * <td>DATA</td> + * <td>1</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td> + * <td>VTARGET</td> + * <td>2</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>XCK <b><sup>2</sup></b></td> + * <td>CLOCK</td> + * <td>3</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * <td>4</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>3</sup></b></td> + * <td>/RESET</td> + * <td>5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>6</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n + * <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n + * <b><sup>3</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i> + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AUX_LINE_PORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>PORT register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols, + * but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AUX_LINE_PIN</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>PIN register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols, + * but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AUX_LINE_DDR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>DDR register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols, + * but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AUX_LINE_MASK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols, + * but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <b>Must not be the AVR's /SS pin</b>. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>ADC channel number (on supported AVRs) to use for VTARGET level detection, if NO_VTARGET_DETECT is not defined. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to enable SPI programming protocol support. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to enable PDI and TPI programming protocol support. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>NO_VTARGET_DETECT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to disable VTARGET sampling and reporting on AVR models with an ADC converter. This will cause the programmer + * to report a fixed 3.3V target voltage to the host regardless of the real target voltage. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>VTARGET_REF_VOLTS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Indicates the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage when measuring the target's supply voltage. Note that the supply + * voltage should never exceed the reference voltage on the programmer AVR without some form of protection to prevent damage + * to the ADC. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Selects the internal 2.56V ADC reference voltage, instead of using the AVR's VREF pin. When enabled, this option will + * override the VTARGET_REF_VOLTS configuration option. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Indicates the target's supply voltage scale factor when applied to the ADC. A simple resistive divider can be used on the + * ADC pin for measuring the target's supply voltage, so that voltages above the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage can be + * measured. This should be the reciprocal of the division performed - e.g. if the VTARGET voltage is halved, this should be set + * to 2. + * \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to move the ISP rescue clock to the AVR's XCK pin instead of the OCR1A output pin. This is useful for existing programming + * hardware that does not expose the OCR1A pin of the AVR, but <i>may</i> cause some issues with PDI programming mode.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>INVERTED_ISP_MISO</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to invert the received data on the ISP MISO line. This is sometimes needed depending on the level translation hardware used, + * if the translator hardware inverts the received logic level.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible + * with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f4210fbbbf --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2104, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .AVRISP_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .AVRISP_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x0A + }, + + .AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x0A + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"ATMEL"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"AVRISP mkII"); + +/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a + * series of uppercase hexadecimal digits. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"000200012345\0" + // Note: Real AVRISP-MKII has the embedded NUL byte, bug in firmware? +); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &AVRISP_LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &AVRISP_ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &AVRISP_ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial: + Address = &AVRISP_SerialString; + Size = AVRISP_SerialString.Header.Size; + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..56dcf25a9b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */ + #define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */ + #define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */ + #define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Atmel AVRISP-MKII Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t AVRISP_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t AVRISP_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint; + } AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP = 0, /**< AVRISP interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum AVRISP_StringDescriptors_t + { + AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2d15abdc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define AUX_LINE_PORT PORTB + #define AUX_LINE_PIN PINB + #define AUX_LINE_DDR DDRB + #if (BOARD == BOARD_U2S) + #define AUX_LINE_MASK (1 << 0) + #else + #define AUX_LINE_MASK (1 << 4) + #endif + + #define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + + #define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL 2 + #define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS 5 + #define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR 1 +// #define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF + #define NO_VTARGET_DETECT +// #define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE +// #define INVERTED_ISP_MISO + +// #define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR 0x11 + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed160230ca --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS + #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 16 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6553504d5e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c @@ -0,0 +1,531 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * ISP Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped ISP commands used in Atmel programmer devices. + */ + +#include "ISPProtocol.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Handler for the CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP command, which attempts to enter programming mode on + * the attached device, returning success or failure back to the host. + */ +void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t TimeoutMS; + uint8_t PinStabDelayMS; + uint8_t ExecutionDelayMS; + uint8_t SynchLoops; + uint8_t ByteDelay; + uint8_t PollValue; + uint8_t PollIndex; + uint8_t EnterProgBytes[4]; + } Enter_ISP_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Enter_ISP_Params, sizeof(Enter_ISP_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_FAILED; + + CurrentAddress = 0; + + /* Perform execution delay, initialize SPI bus */ + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ExecutionDelayMS); + ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(); + + ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true); + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS); + + /* Continuously attempt to synchronize with the target until either the number of attempts specified + * by the host has exceeded, or the the device sends back the expected response values */ + while (Enter_ISP_Params.SynchLoops-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining) + { + uint8_t ResponseBytes[4]; + + for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++) + { + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ByteDelay); + ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Enter_ISP_Params.EnterProgBytes[RByte]); + } + + /* Check if polling disabled, or if the polled value matches the expected value */ + if (!(Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex) || (ResponseBytes[Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex - 1] == Enter_ISP_Params.PollValue)) + { + ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK; + break; + } + else + { + ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false); + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS); + ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true); + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS); + } + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP); + Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_LEAVE_ISP command, which releases the target from programming mode. */ +void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t PreDelayMS; + uint8_t PostDelayMS; + } Leave_ISP_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Leave_ISP_Params, sizeof(Leave_ISP_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + /* Perform pre-exit delay, release the target /RESET, disable the SPI bus and perform the post-exit delay */ + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PreDelayMS); + ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false); + ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(); + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PostDelayMS); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP and CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP commands, writing out bytes, + * words or pages of data to the attached device. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(uint8_t V2Command) +{ + struct + { + uint16_t BytesToWrite; + uint8_t ProgrammingMode; + uint8_t DelayMS; + uint8_t ProgrammingCommands[3]; + uint8_t PollValue1; + uint8_t PollValue2; + uint8_t ProgData[256]; // Note, the Jungo driver has a very short ACK timeout period, need to buffer the + } Write_Memory_Params; // whole page and ACK the packet as fast as possible to prevent it from aborting + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params, (sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) - + sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)), NULL); + Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite = SwapEndian_16(Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite); + + if (Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite > sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + return; + } + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params.ProgData, Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite, NULL); + + // The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need + // to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues + if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) - sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)) + + Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK; + uint8_t PollValue = (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) ? Write_Memory_Params.PollValue1 : + Write_Memory_Params.PollValue2; + uint16_t PollAddress = 0; + uint8_t* NextWriteByte = Write_Memory_Params.ProgData; + uint16_t PageStartAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF); + + for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++) + { + uint8_t ByteToWrite = *(NextWriteByte++); + uint8_t ProgrammingMode = Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode; + + /* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */ + if (MustLoadExtendedAddress) + { + ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(); + MustLoadExtendedAddress = false; + } + + ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]); + ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8); + ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF); + ISPTarget_SendByte(ByteToWrite); + + /* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high + * or low byte at the current word address */ + if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK; + + /* Check to see if we have a valid polling address */ + if (!(PollAddress) && (ByteToWrite != PollValue)) + { + if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)) + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK; + else + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] &= ~READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK; + + PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF); + } + + /* If in word programming mode, commit the byte to the target's memory */ + if (!(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK)) + { + /* If the current polling address is invalid, switch to timed delay write completion mode */ + if (!(PollAddress) && !(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK)) + ProgrammingMode = (ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK) | PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK; + + ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue, + Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]); + + /* Abort the programming loop early if the byte/word programming failed */ + if (ProgrammingStatus != STATUS_CMD_OK) + break; + + /* Must reset the polling address afterwards, so it is not erroneously used for the next byte */ + PollAddress = 0; + } + + /* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and + * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended + * address boundary has been crossed during FLASH memory programming */ + if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP)) + { + CurrentAddress++; + + if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF)) + MustLoadExtendedAddress = true; + } + } + + /* If the current page must be committed, send the PROGRAM PAGE command to the target */ + if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK) + { + ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[1]); + ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress >> 8); + ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress & 0xFF); + ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Check if polling is enabled and possible, if not switch to timed delay mode */ + if ((Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) && !(PollAddress)) + { + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode = (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) | + PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK; + } + + ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue, + Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS, + Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]); + + /* Check to see if the FLASH address has crossed the extended address boundary */ + if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF)) + MustLoadExtendedAddress = true; + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(ProgrammingStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP and CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP commands, reading in bytes, + * words or pages of data from the attached device. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(uint8_t V2Command) +{ + struct + { + uint16_t BytesToRead; + uint8_t ReadMemoryCommand; + } Read_Memory_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_Memory_Params, sizeof(Read_Memory_Params), NULL); + Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead = SwapEndian_16(Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + + /* Read each byte from the device and write them to the packet for the host */ + for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead; CurrentByte++) + { + /* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */ + if (MustLoadExtendedAddress) + { + ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(); + MustLoadExtendedAddress = false; + } + + /* Read the next byte from the desired memory space in the device */ + ISPTarget_SendByte(Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand); + ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8); + ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF); + Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Check if the endpoint bank is currently full, if so send the packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + /* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the read command based on if we are reading a high + * or low byte at the current word address */ + if (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP) + Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK; + + /* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and + * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended + * address boundary has been crossed */ + if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP)) + { + CurrentAddress++; + + if ((V2Command != CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF)) + MustLoadExtendedAddress = true; + } + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + + bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */ + if (IsEndpointFull) + { + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_CHI_ERASE_ISP command, clearing the target's FLASH memory. */ +void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t EraseDelayMS; + uint8_t PollMethod; + uint8_t EraseCommandBytes[4]; + } Erase_Chip_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_Chip_Params, sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK; + + /* Send the chip erase commands as given by the host to the device */ + for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes); SByte++) + ISPTarget_SendByte(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes[SByte]); + + /* Use appropriate command completion check as given by the host (delay or busy polling) */ + if (!(Erase_Chip_Params.PollMethod)) + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseDelayMS); + else + ResponseStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP); + Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP, CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP, CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP and CMD_READ_OSCCAL commands, + * reading the requested configuration byte from the device. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(uint8_t V2Command) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t RetByte; + uint8_t ReadCommandBytes[4]; + } Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params, sizeof(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t ResponseBytes[4]; + + /* Send the Fuse or Lock byte read commands as given by the host to the device, store response */ + for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++) + ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.ReadCommandBytes[RByte]); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseBytes[Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.RetByte - 1]); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_WRITE_FUSE_ISP and CMD_WRITE_LOCK_ISP commands, writing the requested configuration + * byte to the device. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(uint8_t V2Command) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t WriteCommandBytes[4]; + } Write_FuseLockSig_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_FuseLockSig_Params, sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + /* Send the Fuse or Lock byte program commands as given by the host to the device */ + for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes); SByte++) + ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes[SByte]); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_SPI_MULTI command, writing and reading arbitrary SPI data to and from the attached device. */ +void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t TxBytes; + uint8_t RxBytes; + uint8_t RxStartAddr; + uint8_t TxData[255]; + } SPI_Multi_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params, (sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params) - sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData)), NULL); + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params.TxData, SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes, NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SPI_MULTI); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + + uint8_t CurrTxPos = 0; + uint8_t CurrRxPos = 0; + + /* Write out bytes to transmit until the start of the bytes to receive is met */ + while (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxStartAddr) + { + if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes) + ISPTarget_SendByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos]); + else + ISPTarget_SendByte(0); + + CurrTxPos++; + } + + /* Transmit remaining bytes with padding as needed, read in response bytes */ + while (CurrRxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxBytes) + { + if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes) + Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_TransferByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos++])); + else + Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Check to see if we have filled the endpoint bank and need to send the packet */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + CurrRxPos++; + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + + bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */ + if (IsEndpointFull) + { + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } +} + +/** Blocking delay for a given number of milliseconds. This provides a simple wrapper around + * the avr-libc provided delay function, so that the delay function can be called with a + * constant value (to prevent run-time floating point operations being required). + * + * \param[in] DelayMS Number of milliseconds to delay for + */ +void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS) +{ + while (DelayMS-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining) + Delay_MS(1); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..44b339762d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ISPProtocol.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ISP_PROTOCOL_ +#define _ISP_PROTOCOL_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../V2Protocol.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask for the reading or writing of the high byte in a FLASH word when issuing a low-level programming command. */ + #define READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK (1 << 3) + + #define PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK (1 << 0) + #define PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK (1 << 1) + #define PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK (1 << 2) + #define PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK (1 << 3) + #define PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK (1 << 4) + #define PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK (1 << 5) + #define PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK (1 << 6) + #define PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK (1 << 7) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void); + void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void); + void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(const uint8_t V2Command); + void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(const uint8_t V2Command); + void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void); + void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(const uint8_t V2Command); + void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(const uint8_t V2Command); + void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void); + void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS); +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..197b62275d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c @@ -0,0 +1,370 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Target-related functions for the ISP Protocol decoder. + */ + +#include "ISPTarget.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** List of hardware SPI prescaler masks for possible AVRStudio ISP programming speeds. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +static const uint8_t SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM = +{ +#if (F_CPU == 8000000) + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2, // AVRStudio = 8MHz SPI, Actual = 4MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2, // AVRStudio = 4MHz SPI, Actual = 4MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4, // AVRStudio = 2MHz SPI, Actual = 2MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8, // AVRStudio = 1MHz SPI, Actual = 1MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16, // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32, // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64, // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI +#elif (F_CPU == 16000000) + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2, // AVRStudio = 8MHz SPI, Actual = 8MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4, // AVRStudio = 4MHz SPI, Actual = 4MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8, // AVRStudio = 2MHz SPI, Actual = 2MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16, // AVRStudio = 1MHz SPI, Actual = 1MHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32, // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64, // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI + SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128 // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI +#else + #error No SPI prescaler masks for chosen F_CPU speed. +#endif +}; + +/** Lookup table to convert the slower ISP speeds into a compare value for the software SPI driver. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +static const uint16_t TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM = +{ + TIMER_COMP(96386), TIMER_COMP(89888), TIMER_COMP(84211), TIMER_COMP(79208), TIMER_COMP(74767), + TIMER_COMP(70797), TIMER_COMP(67227), TIMER_COMP(64000), TIMER_COMP(61069), TIMER_COMP(58395), + TIMER_COMP(55945), TIMER_COMP(51613), TIMER_COMP(49690), TIMER_COMP(47905), TIMER_COMP(46243), + TIMER_COMP(43244), TIMER_COMP(41885), TIMER_COMP(39409), TIMER_COMP(38278), TIMER_COMP(36200), + TIMER_COMP(34335), TIMER_COMP(32654), TIMER_COMP(31129), TIMER_COMP(29740), TIMER_COMP(28470), + TIMER_COMP(27304), TIMER_COMP(25724), TIMER_COMP(24768), TIMER_COMP(23461), TIMER_COMP(22285), + TIMER_COMP(21221), TIMER_COMP(20254), TIMER_COMP(19371), TIMER_COMP(18562), TIMER_COMP(17583), + TIMER_COMP(16914), TIMER_COMP(16097), TIMER_COMP(15356), TIMER_COMP(14520), TIMER_COMP(13914), + TIMER_COMP(13224), TIMER_COMP(12599), TIMER_COMP(12031), TIMER_COMP(11511), TIMER_COMP(10944), + TIMER_COMP(10431), TIMER_COMP(9963), TIMER_COMP(9468), TIMER_COMP(9081), TIMER_COMP(8612), + TIMER_COMP(8239), TIMER_COMP(7851), TIMER_COMP(7498), TIMER_COMP(7137), TIMER_COMP(6809), + TIMER_COMP(6478), TIMER_COMP(6178), TIMER_COMP(5879), TIMER_COMP(5607), TIMER_COMP(5359), + TIMER_COMP(5093), TIMER_COMP(4870), TIMER_COMP(4633), TIMER_COMP(4418), TIMER_COMP(4209), + TIMER_COMP(4019), TIMER_COMP(3823), TIMER_COMP(3645), TIMER_COMP(3474), TIMER_COMP(3310), + TIMER_COMP(3161), TIMER_COMP(3011), TIMER_COMP(2869), TIMER_COMP(2734), TIMER_COMP(2611), + TIMER_COMP(2484), TIMER_COMP(2369), TIMER_COMP(2257), TIMER_COMP(2152), TIMER_COMP(2052), + TIMER_COMP(1956), TIMER_COMP(1866), TIMER_COMP(1779), TIMER_COMP(1695), TIMER_COMP(1615), + TIMER_COMP(1539), TIMER_COMP(1468), TIMER_COMP(1398), TIMER_COMP(1333), TIMER_COMP(1271), + TIMER_COMP(1212), TIMER_COMP(1155), TIMER_COMP(1101), TIMER_COMP(1049), TIMER_COMP(1000), + TIMER_COMP(953), TIMER_COMP(909), TIMER_COMP(866), TIMER_COMP(826), TIMER_COMP(787), + TIMER_COMP(750), TIMER_COMP(715), TIMER_COMP(682), TIMER_COMP(650), TIMER_COMP(619), + TIMER_COMP(590), TIMER_COMP(563), TIMER_COMP(536), TIMER_COMP(511), TIMER_COMP(487), + TIMER_COMP(465), TIMER_COMP(443), TIMER_COMP(422), TIMER_COMP(402), TIMER_COMP(384), + TIMER_COMP(366), TIMER_COMP(349), TIMER_COMP(332), TIMER_COMP(317), TIMER_COMP(302), + TIMER_COMP(288), TIMER_COMP(274), TIMER_COMP(261), TIMER_COMP(249), TIMER_COMP(238), + TIMER_COMP(226), TIMER_COMP(216), TIMER_COMP(206), TIMER_COMP(196), TIMER_COMP(187), + TIMER_COMP(178), TIMER_COMP(170), TIMER_COMP(162), TIMER_COMP(154), TIMER_COMP(147), + TIMER_COMP(140), TIMER_COMP(134), TIMER_COMP(128), TIMER_COMP(122), TIMER_COMP(116), + TIMER_COMP(111), TIMER_COMP(105), TIMER_COMP(100), TIMER_COMP(95.4), TIMER_COMP(90.9), + TIMER_COMP(86.6), TIMER_COMP(82.6), TIMER_COMP(78.7), TIMER_COMP(75.0), TIMER_COMP(71.5), + TIMER_COMP(68.2), TIMER_COMP(65.0), TIMER_COMP(61.9), TIMER_COMP(59.0), TIMER_COMP(56.3), + TIMER_COMP(53.6), TIMER_COMP(51.1) +}; + +/** Currently selected SPI driver, either hardware (for fast ISP speeds) or software (for slower ISP speeds). */ +bool HardwareSPIMode = true; + +/** Software SPI data register for sending and receiving */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_Data; + +/** Number of bits left to transfer in the software SPI driver */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_BitsRemaining; + + +/** ISR to handle software SPI transmission and reception */ +ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if rising edge (output next bit) or falling edge (read in next bit) */ + if (!(PINB & (1 << 1))) + { + if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7)) + PORTB |= (1 << 2); + else + PORTB &= ~(1 << 2); + } + else + { + SoftSPI_Data <<= 1; + + if (!(--SoftSPI_BitsRemaining)) + { + TCCR1B = 0; + TIFR1 = (1 << OCF1A); + } + + if (PINB & (1 << 3)) + SoftSPI_Data |= (1 << 0); + } + + /* Fast toggle of PORTB.1 via the PIN register (see datasheet) */ + PINB |= (1 << 1); +} + +/** Initializes the appropriate SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) ready for + * communication with the attached target. + */ +void ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void) +{ + uint8_t SCKDuration = V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_SCK_DURATION); + + if (SCKDuration < sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration)) + { + HardwareSPIMode = true; + + SPI_Init(pgm_read_byte(&SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration]) | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST | + SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_MODE_MASTER); + } + else + { + HardwareSPIMode = false; + + DDRB |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2)); + PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3)); + + ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(SCKDuration); + } +} + +/** Shuts down the current selected SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) so that no + * further communications can occur until the driver is re-initialized. + */ +void ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void) +{ + if (HardwareSPIMode) + { + SPI_Disable(); + } + else + { + DDRB &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2)); + PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3)); + + /* Must re-enable rescue clock once software ISP has exited, as the timer for the rescue clock is + * re-purposed for software SPI */ + ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(); + } +} + +/** Configures the AVR to produce a 4MHz rescue clock out of the OCR1A pin of the AVR, so + * that it can be fed into the XTAL1 pin of an AVR whose fuses have been mis-configured for + * an external clock rather than a crystal. When used, the ISP speed must be 125KHz for this + * functionality to work correctly. + */ +void ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void) +{ + #if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE) + /* Configure XCK as an output for the specified AVR model */ + DDRD |= (1 << 5); + + /* Start USART to generate a 4MHz clock on the XCK pin */ + UBRR1 = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1); + UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1); + UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1); + #else + /* Configure OCR1A as an output for the specified AVR model */ + #if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR) + DDRC |= (1 << 6); + #else + DDRB |= (1 << 5); + #endif + + /* Start Timer 1 to generate a 4MHz clock on the OCR1A pin */ + TIMSK1 = 0; + TCNT1 = 0; + OCR1A = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1); + TCCR1A = (1 << COM1A0); + TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS10)); + #endif +} + +/** Configures the AVR's timer ready to produce software SPI for the slower ISP speeds that + * cannot be obtained when using the AVR's hardware SPI module. + * + * \param[in] SCKDuration Duration of the desired software ISP SCK clock + */ +void ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration) +{ + /* Configure Timer 1 for software SPI using the specified SCK duration */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A); + TCNT1 = 0; + OCR1A = pgm_read_word(&TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration - sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration)]); + TCCR1A = 0; + TCCR1B = 0; +} + +/** Sends and receives a single byte of data to and from the attached target via software SPI. + * + * \param[in] Byte Byte of data to send to the attached target + * + * \return Received byte of data from the attached target + */ +uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte) +{ + SoftSPI_Data = Byte; + SoftSPI_BitsRemaining = 8; + + /* Set initial MOSI pin state according to the byte to be transferred */ + if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7)) + PORTB |= (1 << 2); + else + PORTB &= ~(1 << 2); + + TCNT1 = 0; + TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS11)); + while (SoftSPI_BitsRemaining && TimeoutTicksRemaining); + TCCR1B = 0; + + return SoftSPI_Data; +} + +/** Asserts or deasserts the target's reset line, using the correct polarity as set by the host using a SET PARAM command. + * When not asserted, the line is tristated so as not to interfere with normal device operation. + * + * \param[in] ResetTarget Boolean true when the target should be held in reset, \c false otherwise + */ +void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget) +{ + if (ResetTarget) + { + AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK; + + if (!(V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY))) + AUX_LINE_PORT |= AUX_LINE_MASK; + else + AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; + } + else + { + AUX_LINE_DDR &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; + AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; + } +} + +/** Waits until the target has completed the last operation, by continuously polling the device's + * BUSY flag until it is cleared, or until the command timeout period has expired. + * + * \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT otherwise + */ +uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void) +{ + do + { + ISPTarget_SendByte(0xF0); + ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00); + ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00); + } + while ((ISPTarget_ReceiveByte() & 0x01) && TimeoutTicksRemaining); + + return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT; +} + +/** Sends a low-level LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target, for addressing of memory beyond the + * 64KB boundary. This sends the command with the correct address as indicated by the current address + * pointer variable set by the host when a SET ADDRESS command is issued. + */ +void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void) +{ + ISPTarget_SendByte(LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD); + ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00); + ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 16); + ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00); +} + +/** Waits until the last issued target memory programming command has completed, via the check mode given and using + * the given parameters. + * + * \param[in] ProgrammingMode Programming mode used and completion check to use, a mask of \c PROG_MODE_* constants + * \param[in] PollAddress Memory address to poll for completion if polling check mode used + * \param[in] PollValue Poll value to check against if polling check mode used + * \param[in] DelayMS Milliseconds to delay before returning if delay check mode used + * \param[in] ReadMemCommand Device low-level READ MEMORY command to send if value check mode used + * + * \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT or + * \ref STATUS_CMD_TOUT otherwise + */ +uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, + const uint16_t PollAddress, + const uint8_t PollValue, + const uint8_t DelayMS, + const uint8_t ReadMemCommand) +{ + uint8_t ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK; + + /* Determine method of Programming Complete check */ + switch (ProgrammingMode & ~(PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK | PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK)) + { + case PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK: + case PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK: + ISPProtocol_DelayMS(DelayMS); + break; + case PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK: + case PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK: + do + { + ISPTarget_SendByte(ReadMemCommand); + ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress >> 8); + ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress & 0xFF); + } + while ((ISPTarget_TransferByte(0x00) == PollValue) && TimeoutTicksRemaining); + + if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining)) + ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_TOUT; + + break; + case PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK: + case PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK: + ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(); + break; + } + + /* Program complete - reset timeout */ + TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS; + + return ProgrammingStatus; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5f32f51940 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ISPTarget.c. + */ + +#ifndef _ISP_TARGET_ +#define _ISP_TARGET_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h> + + #include "../V2Protocol.h" + #include "ISPProtocol.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Low level device command to issue an extended FLASH address, for devices with over 128KB of FLASH. */ + #define LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD 0x4D + + /** Macro to convert an ISP frequency to a number of timer clock cycles for the software SPI driver. */ + #define TIMER_COMP(freq) (((F_CPU / 8) / 2 / freq) - 1) + + /** ISP rescue clock speed in Hz, for clocking targets with incorrectly set fuses. */ + #define ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED 4000000 + + /* External Variables: */ + extern bool HardwareSPIMode; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void); + void ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void); + void ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void); + void ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration); + uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte); + void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget); + uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void); + void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void); + uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode, + const uint16_t PollAddress, + const uint8_t PollValue, + const uint8_t DelayMS, + const uint8_t ReadMemCommand); + + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Sends a byte of ISP data to the attached target, using the appropriate SPI hardware or + * software routines depending on the selected ISP speed. + * + * \param[in] Byte Byte of data to send to the attached target + */ + static inline void ISPTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + if (HardwareSPIMode) + SPI_SendByte(Byte); + else + ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte); + } + + /** Receives a byte of ISP data from the attached target, using the appropriate + * SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed. + * + * \return Received byte of data from the attached target + */ + static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_ReceiveByte(void) + { + uint8_t ReceivedByte; + + if (HardwareSPIMode) + ReceivedByte = SPI_ReceiveByte(); + else + ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(0x00); + + #if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO) + return ~ReceivedByte; + #else + return ReceivedByte; + #endif + } + + /** Sends and receives a byte of ISP data to and from the attached target, using the + * appropriate SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed. + * + * \param[in] Byte Byte of data to send to the attached target + * + * \return Received byte of data from the attached target + */ + static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte) + { + uint8_t ReceivedByte; + + if (HardwareSPIMode) + ReceivedByte = SPI_TransferByte(Byte); + else + ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte); + + #if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO) + return ~ReceivedByte; + #else + return ReceivedByte; + #endif + } + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fd64c5a1e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * V2Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol commands used in Atmel programmer devices. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C +#include "V2Protocol.h" + +/** Current memory address for FLASH/EEPROM memory read/write commands */ +uint32_t CurrentAddress; + +/** Flag to indicate that the next read/write operation must update the device's current extended FLASH address */ +bool MustLoadExtendedAddress; + + +/** ISR to manage timeouts whilst processing a V2Protocol command */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_NOBLOCK) +{ + if (TimeoutTicksRemaining) + TimeoutTicksRemaining--; + else + TCCR0B = 0; +} + +/** Initializes the hardware and software associated with the V2 protocol command handling. */ +void V2Protocol_Init(void) +{ + #if defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT) + /* Initialize the ADC converter for VTARGET level detection on supported AVR models */ + ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128); + ADC_SetupChannel(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL); + ADC_StartReading(VTARGET_REF_MASK | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK); + #endif + + /* Timeout timer initialization (~10ms period) */ + OCR0A = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + + V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(); + + #if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) + ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(); + #endif +} + +/** Master V2 Protocol packet handler, for received V2 Protocol packets from a connected host. + * This routine decodes the issued command and passes off the handling of the command to the + * appropriate function. + */ +void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void) +{ + uint8_t V2Command = Endpoint_Read_8(); + + /* Reset timeout counter duration and start the timer */ + TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS; + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00)); + + switch (V2Command) + { + case CMD_SIGN_ON: + V2Protocol_SignOn(); + break; + case CMD_SET_PARAMETER: + case CMD_GET_PARAMETER: + V2Protocol_GetSetParam(V2Command); + break; + case CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS: + V2Protocol_LoadAddress(); + break; + case CMD_RESET_PROTECTION: + V2Protocol_ResetProtection(); + break; +#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) + case CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP: + ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(); + break; + case CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP: + ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(); + break; + case CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP: + case CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP: + ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(V2Command); + break; + case CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP: + case CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP: + ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(V2Command); + break; + case CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP: + ISPProtocol_ChipErase(); + break; + case CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP: + case CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP: + case CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP: + case CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP: + ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(V2Command); + break; + case CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP: + case CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP: + ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(V2Command); + break; + case CMD_SPI_MULTI: + ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(); + break; +#endif +#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + case CMD_XPROG_SETMODE: + XPROGProtocol_SetMode(); + break; + case CMD_XPROG: + XPROGProtocol_Command(); + break; +#endif + default: + V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(V2Command); + break; + } + + /* Disable the timeout management timer */ + TCCR0B = 0; + + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT); +} + +/** Handler for unknown V2 protocol commands. This discards all sent data and returns a + * STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN status back to the host. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command) +{ + /* Discard all incoming data */ + while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_SIGN_ON command, returning the programmer ID string to the host. */ +static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void) +{ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SIGN_ON); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_Write_8(sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PROGRAMMER_ID, (sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_RESET_PROTECTION command, implemented as a dummy ACK function as + * no target short-circuit protection is currently implemented. + */ +static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void) +{ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_RESET_PROTECTION); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + + +/** Handler for the CMD_SET_PARAMETER and CMD_GET_PARAMETER commands from the host, setting or + * getting a device parameter's value from the parameter table. + * + * \param[in] V2Command Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host + */ +static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command) +{ + uint8_t ParamID = Endpoint_Read_8(); + uint8_t ParamValue; + + if (V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) + ParamValue = Endpoint_Read_8(); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command); + + uint8_t ParamPrivs = V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(ParamID); + + if ((V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_WRITE)) + { + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + V2Params_SetParameterValue(ParamID, ParamValue); + } + else if ((V2Command == CMD_GET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_READ)) + { + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_Write_8(V2Params_GetParameterValue(ParamID)); + } + else + { + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED); + } + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS command, loading the given device address into a + * global storage variable for later use, and issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands + * to the attached device as required. + */ +static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void) +{ + Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(&CurrentAddress, sizeof(CurrentAddress), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31)) + MustLoadExtendedAddress = true; + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS); + Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f447ba4b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for V2Protocol.c. + */ + +#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_ +#define _V2_PROTOCOL_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../AVRISPDescriptors.h" + #include "V2ProtocolConstants.h" + #include "V2ProtocolParams.h" + #include "ISP/ISPProtocol.h" + #include "XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + #if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) && ((VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 2) || (VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 3)) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT) + #error The U4 AVR chips do not contain ADC channels 2 or 3. Please change VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL or define NO_VTARGET_DETECT in the makefile. + #endif + + #if defined(VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF) + #undef VTARGET_REF_VOLTS + #define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS 2.56 + + #define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV + #else + #define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + /** Programmer ID string, returned to the host during the CMD_SIGN_ON command processing. */ + #define PROGRAMMER_ID "AVRISP_MK2" + + /** Timeout period for each issued command from the host before it is aborted (in 10ms ticks). */ + #define COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS 100 + + /** Command timeout ticks remaining counter, GPIOR for speed. */ + #define TimeoutTicksRemaining GPIOR1 + + /** MUX mask for the VTARGET ADC channel number. */ + #define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL) + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint32_t CurrentAddress; + extern bool MustLoadExtendedAddress; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void V2Protocol_Init(void); + void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C) + static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command); + static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void); + static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command); + static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void); + static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..121eae7f3f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Macros for the V2 Protocol Packet Commands and Responses. + */ + +#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_ +#define _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_ + + /* Macros: */ + #define CMD_SIGN_ON 0x01 + #define CMD_SET_PARAMETER 0x02 + #define CMD_GET_PARAMETER 0x03 + #define CMD_OSCCAL 0x05 + #define CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS 0x06 + #define CMD_FIRMWARE_UPGRADE 0x07 + #define CMD_RESET_PROTECTION 0x0A + #define CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP 0x10 + #define CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP 0x11 + #define CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP 0x12 + #define CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP 0x13 + #define CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP 0x14 + #define CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP 0x15 + #define CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP 0x16 + #define CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP 0x17 + #define CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP 0x18 + #define CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP 0x19 + #define CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP 0x1A + #define CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP 0x1B + #define CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP 0x1C + #define CMD_SPI_MULTI 0x1D + #define CMD_XPROG 0x50 + #define CMD_XPROG_SETMODE 0x51 + + #define STATUS_CMD_OK 0x00 + #define STATUS_CMD_TOUT 0x80 + #define STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT 0x81 + #define STATUS_SET_PARAM_MISSING 0x82 + #define STATUS_CMD_FAILED 0xC0 + #define STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN 0xC9 + #define STATUS_CMD_ILLEGAL_PARAM 0xCA + #define STATUS_ISP_READY 0x00 + #define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_MOSI 0x01 + #define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_RST 0x02 + #define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_SCK 0x04 + #define STATUS_TGT_NOT_DETECTED 0x10 + #define STATUS_TGT_REVERSE_INSERTED 0x20 + + #define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW 0x80 + #define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH 0x81 + #define PARAM_HW_VER 0x90 + #define PARAM_SW_MAJOR 0x91 + #define PARAM_SW_MINOR 0x92 + #define PARAM_VTARGET 0x94 + #define PARAM_SCK_DURATION 0x98 + #define PARAM_RESET_POLARITY 0x9E + #define PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN 0xA1 + #define PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY 0xA4 + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0b33c212f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * V2Protocol parameter handler, to process V2 Protocol device parameters. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C +#include "V2ProtocolParams.h" + +/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */ +static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_Reset_Polarity = 0x01; + +/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */ +static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_SCK_Duration = 0x06; + +/* Volatile Parameter Values for RAM storage */ +static ParameterItem_t ParameterTable[] = + { + { .ParamID = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = 0 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = 0 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_HW_VER, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = 0x00 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_SW_MAJOR, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = 0x01 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_SW_MINOR, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_VTARGET, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = (uint8_t)(3.3 * 10) }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_SCK_DURATION, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE, + .ParamValue = 6 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_RESET_POLARITY, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE, + .ParamValue = 0x01 }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ, + .ParamValue = STATUS_ISP_READY }, + + { .ParamID = PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY, + .ParamPrivileges = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE, + .ParamValue = 0x00 }, + }; + + +/** Loads saved non-volatile parameter values from the EEPROM into the parameter table, as needed. */ +void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void) +{ + /* Read parameter values that are stored in non-volatile EEPROM */ + uint8_t ResetPolarity = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity); + uint8_t SCKDuration = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration); + + /* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */ + if (ResetPolarity != 0xFF) + V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)->ParamValue = ResetPolarity; + + /* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */ + if (SCKDuration != 0xFF) + V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_SCK_DURATION)->ParamValue = SCKDuration; +} + +/** Updates any parameter values that are sourced from hardware rather than explicitly set by the host, such as + * VTARGET levels from the ADC on supported AVR models. + */ +void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void) +{ + #if (defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT)) + /* Update VTARGET parameter with the latest ADC conversion of VTARGET on supported AVR models */ + V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_VTARGET)->ParamValue = (((uint16_t)(VTARGET_REF_VOLTS * 10 * VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR) * ADC_GetResult()) / 1024); + #endif +} + +/** Retrieves the host PC read/write privileges for a given parameter in the parameter table. This should + * be called before calls to \ref V2Params_GetParameterValue() or \ref V2Params_SetParameterValue() when + * getting or setting parameter values in response to requests from the host. + * + * \param[in] ParamID Parameter ID whose privileges are to be retrieved from the table + * + * \return Privileges for the requested parameter, as a mask of \c PARAM_PRIV_* masks + */ +uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID) +{ + ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID); + + if (ParamInfo == NULL) + return 0; + + return ParamInfo->ParamPrivileges; +} + +/** Retrieves the current value for a given parameter in the parameter table. + * + * \note This function does not first check for read privileges - if the value is being sent to the host via a + * GET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the + * parameter is host-readable. + * + * \param[in] ParamID Parameter ID whose value is to be retrieved from the table + * + * \return Current value of the parameter in the table, or 0 if not found + */ +uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID) +{ + ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID); + + if (ParamInfo == NULL) + return 0; + + return ParamInfo->ParamValue; +} + +/** Sets the value for a given parameter in the parameter table. + * + * \note This function does not first check for write privileges - if the value is being sourced from the host + * via a SET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the + * parameter is host-writable. + * + * \param[in] ParamID Parameter ID whose value is to be set in the table + * \param[in] Value New value to set the parameter to + * + * \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise + */ +void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, + const uint8_t Value) +{ + ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID); + + if (ParamInfo == NULL) + return; + + ParamInfo->ParamValue = Value; + + /* The target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */ + if (ParamID == PARAM_RESET_POLARITY) + eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity, Value); + + /* The target SCK line period is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */ + if (ParamID == PARAM_SCK_DURATION) + eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration, Value); +} + +/** Retrieves a parameter entry (including ID, value and privileges) from the parameter table that matches the given + * parameter ID. + * + * \param[in] ParamID Parameter ID to find in the table + * + * \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise + */ +static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID) +{ + ParameterItem_t* CurrTableItem = ParameterTable; + + /* Find the parameter in the parameter table if present */ + for (uint8_t TableIndex = 0; TableIndex < TABLE_PARAM_COUNT; TableIndex++) + { + if (ParamID == CurrTableItem->ParamID) + return CurrTableItem; + + CurrTableItem++; + } + + return NULL; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b195f67c55 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for V2ProtocolParams.c. + */ + +#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_ +#define _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/eeprom.h> + + #if defined(ADC) + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h> + #endif + + #include "V2Protocol.h" + #include "V2ProtocolConstants.h" + #include "ISP/ISPTarget.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to read the parameter's value. */ + #define PARAM_PRIV_READ (1 << 0) + + /** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to change the parameter's value. */ + #define PARAM_PRIV_WRITE (1 << 1) + + /** Total number of parameters in the parameter table */ + #define TABLE_PARAM_COUNT (sizeof(ParameterTable) / sizeof(ParameterTable[0])) + + #if (!defined(FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)) + /** Minor firmware version, reported to the host on request; must match the version + * the host is expecting, or it (may) reject further communications with the programmer. */ + #define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR 0x18 + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a parameter table entry indicating a PC readable or writable device parameter. */ + typedef struct + { + const uint8_t ParamID; /**< Parameter ID number to uniquely identify the parameter within the device */ + const uint8_t ParamPrivileges; /**< Parameter privileges to allow the host to read or write the parameter's value */ + uint8_t ParamValue; /**< Current parameter's value within the device */ + } ParameterItem_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void); + void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void); + + uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID); + uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID); + void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID, + const uint8_t Value); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C) + static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..22eb7d74cb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Target-related functions for the TINY target's NVM module. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C +#include "TINYNVM.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Sends the given pointer address to the target's TPI pointer register */ +static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress) +{ + /* Send the given 16-bit address to the target, LSB first */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 0); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress & 0xFF); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 1); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8); +} + +/** Sends a SIN command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be written. + * + * \param[in] Address 6-bit I/O address to write to in the target's I/O memory space + */ +static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address) +{ + /* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper + * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SIN(Address)); +} + +/** Sends a SOUT command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be read. + * + * \param[in] Address 6-bit I/O address to read from in the target's I/O memory space + */ +static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address) +{ + /* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper + * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address)); +} + +/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise + */ +bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void) +{ + /* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */ + for (;;) + { + /* Send the SLDCS command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS)); + + uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + + /* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */ + if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining)) + return false; + + /* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */ + if (StatusRegister & TPI_STATUS_NVM) + return true; + } +} + +/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the + * timeout period expires. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise + */ +bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void) +{ + /* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */ + for (;;) + { + /* Send the SIN command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is busy */ + TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr); + + uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + + /* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */ + if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining)) + return false; + + /* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */ + if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7))) + return true; + } +} + +/** Enables the physical TPI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the TPI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise + */ +bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void) +{ + /* Enable TPI programming mode with the attached target */ + XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(); + + /* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_CTRL)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02); + + /* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SKEY); + for (uint8_t i = sizeof(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--) + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]); + + /* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */ + return TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(); +} + +/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical TPI interface. */ +void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void) +{ + TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(); + + do + { + /* Clear the NVMEN bit in the TPI STATUS register to disable TPI mode */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_STATUS)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Read back the STATUS register, check to see if it took effect */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS)); + } while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00); + + XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(); +} + +/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces. + * + * \param[in] ReadAddress Start address to read from within the target's address space + * \param[out] ReadBuffer Buffer to store read data into + * \param[in] ReadSize Length of the data to read from the device + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, + uint8_t* ReadBuffer, + uint16_t ReadSize) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Set the NVM control register to the NO OP command for memory reading */ + TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP); + + /* Send the address of the location to read from */ + TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(ReadAddress); + + while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining) + { + /* Read the byte of data from the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLD(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI)); + *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + } + + return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0); +} + +/** Writes word addressed memory to the target's memory spaces. + * + * \param[in] WriteAddress Start address to write to within the target's address space + * \param[in] WriteBuffer Buffer to source data from + * \param[in] WriteLength Total number of bytes to write to the device (must be an integer multiple of 2) + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, + uint8_t* WriteBuffer, + uint16_t WriteLength) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Must have an integer number of words to write - if extra byte, word-align via a dummy high byte */ + if (WriteLength & 0x01) + WriteBuffer[WriteLength++] = 0xFF; + + /* Set the NVM control register to the WORD WRITE command for memory writing */ + TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE); + + /* Send the address of the location to write to */ + TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(WriteAddress); + + while (WriteLength) + { + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Write the low byte of data to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++)); + + /* Write the high byte of data to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++)); + + /* Need to decrement the write length twice, since we wrote a whole two-byte word */ + WriteLength -= 2; + } + + return true; +} + +/** Erases the target's memory space. + * + * \param[in] EraseCommand NVM erase command to send to the device + * \param[in] Address Address inside the memory space to erase + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, + const uint16_t Address) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Set the NVM control register to the target memory erase command */ + TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand); + + /* Write to a high byte location within the target address space to start the erase process */ + TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(Address | 0x0001); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + return true; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61389bb455 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TINYNVM.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TINY_NVM_ +#define _TINY_NVM_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + #include "XPROGProtocol.h" + #include "XPROGTarget.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + #define TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP 0x00 + #define TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE 0x10 + #define TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE 0x14 + #define TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE 0x1D + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void); + bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void); + bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void); + void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void); + bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress, + uint8_t* ReadBuffer, + uint16_t ReadLength); + bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress, + uint8_t* WriteBuffer, + uint16_t WriteLength); + bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, + const uint16_t Address); + + #if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)) + static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address); + static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address); + static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0208a634b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c @@ -0,0 +1,468 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Target-related functions for the XMEGA target's NVM module. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGA_NVM_C +#include "XMEGANVM.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Sends the given 32-bit absolute address to the target. + * + * \param[in] AbsoluteAddress Absolute address to send to the target + */ +static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress) +{ + /* Send the given 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress & 0xFF); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 16); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 24); +} + +/** Sends the given NVM register address to the target. + * + * \param[in] Register NVM register whose absolute address is to be sent + */ +static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register) +{ + /* Determine the absolute register address from the NVM base memory address and the NVM register address */ + uint32_t Address = XPROG_Param_NVMBase | Register; + + /* Send the calculated 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */ + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address); +} + +/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read or CRC + * calculation. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise + */ +bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void) +{ + /* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */ + for (;;) + { + /* Send the LDCS command to read the PDI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_STATUS)); + + uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + + /* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */ + if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining)) + return false; + + /* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */ + if (StatusRegister & PDI_STATUS_NVM) + return true; + } +} + +/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the + * timeout period expires. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise + */ +bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void) +{ + /* Preload the pointer register with the NVM STATUS register address to check the BUSY flag */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS); + + /* Poll the NVM STATUS register while the NVM controller is busy */ + for (;;) + { + /* Fetch the current status value via the pointer register (without auto-increment afterwards) */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + + uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + + /* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */ + if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining)) + return false; + + /* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */ + if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7))) + return true; + } +} + +/** Enables the physical PDI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the PDI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise + */ +bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void) +{ + /* Enable PDI programming mode with the attached target */ + XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(); + + /* Store the RESET key into the RESET PDI register to keep the XMEGA in reset */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_RESET_KEY); + + /* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_CTRL)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02); + + /* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_KEY); + for (uint8_t i = sizeof(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--) + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]); + + /* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */ + return XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(); +} + +/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical PDI interface. */ +void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void) +{ + XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(); + + /* Clear the RESET key in the RESET PDI register to allow the XMEGA to run - must perform this until the + * change takes effect, as in some cases it takes multiple writes (silicon bug?). + */ + do + { + /* Clear reset register */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Read back the reset register, check to see if it took effect */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_RESET)); + } while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00); + + XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(); +} + +/** Retrieves the CRC value of the given memory space. + * + * \param[in] CRCCommand NVM CRC command to issue to the target + * \param[out] CRCDest CRC Destination when read from the target + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, + uint32_t* const CRCDest) +{ + *CRCDest = 0; + + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Set the NVM command to the correct CRC read command */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(CRCCommand); + + /* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the CRC generation */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX); + + /* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy())) + return false; + + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Load the PDI pointer register with the DAT0 register start address */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0); + + /* Send the REPEAT command to grab the CRC bytes */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES - 1); + + /* Read in the CRC bytes from the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES; i++) + ((uint8_t*)CRCDest)[i] = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + + return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0); +} + +/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces. + * + * \param[in] ReadAddress Start address to read from within the target's address space + * \param[out] ReadBuffer Buffer to store read data into + * \param[in] ReadSize Number of bytes to read + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, + uint8_t* ReadBuffer, + uint16_t ReadSize) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the READNVM command to the NVM controller for reading of an arbitrary location */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM); + + if (ReadSize > 1) + { + /* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to read from */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress); + + /* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to read */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(ReadSize - 1); + + /* Send a LD command with indirect access and post-increment to read out the bytes */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining) + *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + } + else + { + /* Send a LDS command with the read address to read out the requested byte */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress); + *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(); + } + + return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0); +} + +/** Writes byte addressed memory to the target's memory spaces. + * + * \param[in] WriteCommand Command to send to the device to write each memory byte + * \param[in] WriteAddress Address to write to within the target's address space + * \param[in] Byte Byte to write to the target + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, + const uint32_t WriteAddress, + const uint8_t Byte) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the memory write command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteCommand); + + /* Send new memory byte to the memory of the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(Byte); + + return true; +} + +/** Writes page addressed memory to the target's memory spaces. + * + * \param[in] WriteBuffCommand Command to send to the device to write a byte to the memory page buffer + * \param[in] EraseBuffCommand Command to send to the device to erase the memory page buffer + * \param[in] WritePageCommand Command to send to the device to write the page buffer to the destination memory + * \param[in] PageMode Bitfield indicating what operations need to be executed on the specified page + * \param[in] WriteAddress Start address to write the page data to within the target's address space + * \param[in] WriteBuffer Buffer to source data from + * \param[in] WriteSize Number of bytes to write + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, + const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand, + const uint8_t WritePageCommand, + const uint8_t PageMode, + const uint32_t WriteAddress, + const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, + uint16_t WriteSize) +{ + if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE) + { + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the memory buffer erase command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseBuffCommand); + + /* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX); + } + + if (WriteSize) + { + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the memory buffer write command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteBuffCommand); + + /* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to write to */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress); + + /* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteSize - 1); + + /* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to write the bytes */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + while (WriteSize--) + XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++)); + } + + if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE) + { + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the memory write command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(WritePageCommand); + + /* Send the address of the first page location to write the memory page */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + } + + return true; +} + +/** Erases a specific memory space of the target. + * + * \param[in] EraseCommand NVM erase command to send to the device + * \param[in] Address Address inside the memory space to erase + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully + */ +bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, + const uint32_t Address) +{ + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* EEPROM and Chip erasures are triggered differently to FLASH section erasures */ + if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE) + { + /* Send the memory erase command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand); + + /* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the erase sequence */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX); + } + else if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM) + { + /* Send the EEPROM page buffer erase command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF); + + /* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX); + + /* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy())) + return false; + + /* Send the EEPROM memory buffer write command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF); + + /* Load the PDI pointer register with the EEPROM page start address */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address); + + /* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XPROG_Param_EEPageSize - 1); + + /* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to tag each byte in the EEPROM page buffer */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < XPROG_Param_EEPageSize; PageByte++) + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Send the memory erase command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand); + + /* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the EEPROM erase sequence */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX); + } + else + { + /* Send the memory erase command to the target */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand); + + /* Other erase modes just need us to address a byte within the target memory space */ + XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE)); + XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address); + XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy())) + return false; + + return true; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a8c5b048a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for XMEGANVM.c. + */ + +#ifndef _XMEGA_NVM_ +#define _XMEGA_NVM_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + #include "XPROGProtocol.h" + #include "XPROGTarget.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + #define XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES 3 + + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR0 0x00 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR1 0x01 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR2 0x02 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0 0x04 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT1 0x05 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT2 0x06 + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD 0x0A + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA 0x0B + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLB 0x0C + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_INTCTRL 0x0D + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS 0x0F + #define XMEGA_NVM_REG_LOCKBITS 0x10 + + #define XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX (1 << 0) + + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP 0x00 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE 0x40 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM 0x43 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF 0x23 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF 0x26 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGE 0x2B + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE 0x2E + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEFLASH 0x2F + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC 0x78 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC 0x20 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE 0x22 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE 0x24 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEAPPSECPAGE 0x25 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC 0x38 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC 0x68 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE 0x2A + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE 0x2C + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEBOOTSECPAGE 0x2D + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC 0x39 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READUSERSIG 0x03 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG 0x18 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG 0x1A + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READCALIBRATION 0x02 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READFUSE 0x07 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE 0x4C + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK 0x08 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF 0x33 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF 0x36 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM 0x30 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE 0x32 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE 0x34 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE 0x35 + #define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READEEPROM 0x06 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void); + bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void); + bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void); + void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void); + bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand, + uint32_t* const CRCDest); + bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress, + uint8_t* ReadBuffer, + uint16_t ReadSize); + bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand, + const uint32_t WriteAddress, + const uint8_t Byte); + bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand, + const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand, + const uint8_t WritePageCommand, + const uint8_t PageMode, + const uint32_t WriteAddress, + const uint8_t* WriteBuffer, + uint16_t WriteSize); + bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand, + const uint32_t Address); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGANVM_C) + static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register); + static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..aa5503f3ff --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c @@ -0,0 +1,480 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * XPROG Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped XPROG commands used in Atmel programmer devices. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C +#include "XPROGProtocol.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) +/** Base absolute address for the target's NVM controller for PDI programming */ +uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase = 0x010001C0; + +/** Size in bytes of the target's EEPROM page */ +uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize = 32; + +/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCMD register for TPI programming */ +uint8_t XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = 0x33; + +/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCSR register for TPI programming */ +uint8_t XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = 0x32; + +/** Currently selected XPROG programming protocol */ +uint8_t XPROG_SelectedProtocol = XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI; + +/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG_SETMODE command, which sets the programmer-to-target protocol used for PDI/TPI + * programming. + */ +void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void) +{ + struct + { + uint8_t Protocol; + } SetMode_XPROG_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SetMode_XPROG_Params, sizeof(SetMode_XPROG_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + XPROG_SelectedProtocol = SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol; + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG_SETMODE); + Endpoint_Write_8((SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol != XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_CMD_FAILED); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG command, which wraps up XPROG commands in a V2 wrapper which need to be + * removed and processed so that the underlying XPROG command can be handled. + */ +void XPROGProtocol_Command(void) +{ + uint8_t XPROGCommand = Endpoint_Read_8(); + + switch (XPROGCommand) + { + case XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE: + XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE: + XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_ERASE: + XPROGProtocol_Erase(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM: + XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM: + XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_CRC: + XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(); + break; + case XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM: + XPROGProtocol_SetParam(); + break; + } +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG ENTER_PROGMODE command to establish a connection with the attached device. */ +static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void) +{ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + bool NVMBusEnabled = false; + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + NVMBusEnabled = XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(); + else if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI) + NVMBusEnabled = TINYNVM_EnableTPI(); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE); + Endpoint_Write_8(NVMBusEnabled ? XPROG_ERR_OK : XPROG_ERR_FAILED); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG LEAVE_PROGMODE command to terminate the PDI programming connection with + * the attached device. + */ +static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void) +{ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(); + else + TINYNVM_DisableTPI(); + + #if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE) && defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) + /* If the XCK rescue clock option is enabled, we need to restart it once the + * XPROG mode has been exited, since the XPROG protocol stops it after use. */ + ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(); + #endif + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_ERR_OK); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPRG ERASE command to erase a specific memory address space in the attached device. */ +static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK; + + struct + { + uint8_t MemoryType; + uint32_t Address; + } Erase_XPROG_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_XPROG_Params, sizeof(Erase_XPROG_Params), NULL); + Erase_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(Erase_XPROG_Params.Address); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t EraseCommand; + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + { + /* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to erase */ + switch (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType) + { + case XPROG_ERASE_CHIP: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_APP: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE; + break; + case XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG; + break; + default: + EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP; + break; + } + + /* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address))) + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + else + { + if (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType == XPROG_ERASE_CHIP) + EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE; + else + EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE; + + /* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(TINYNVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address))) + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ERASE); + Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG WRITE_MEMORY command to write to a specific memory space within the attached device. */ +static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK; + + struct + { + uint8_t MemoryType; + uint8_t PageMode; + uint32_t Address; + uint16_t Length; + uint8_t ProgData[256]; + } WriteMemory_XPROG_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params, (sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) - + sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params).ProgData), NULL); + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address); + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length = SwapEndian_16(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length); + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL); + + // The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need + // to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues + if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) - sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData)) + + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0) + { + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_WaitUntilReady(); + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + { + /* Assume FLASH page programming by default, as it is the common case */ + uint8_t WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE; + uint8_t WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF; + uint8_t EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF; + bool PagedMemory = true; + + switch (WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.MemoryType) + { + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE; + break; + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE; + break; + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE; + WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF; + EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF; + break; + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG; + break; + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE; + PagedMemory = false; + break; + case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS: + WriteCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK; + PagedMemory = false; + break; + } + + /* Send the appropriate memory write commands to the device, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if ((PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(WriteBuffCommand, EraseBuffCommand, WriteCommand, + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) || + (!PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(WriteCommand, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData[0])))) + { + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + } + else + { + /* Send write command to the TPI device, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(TINYNVM_WriteMemory(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, + WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) + { + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM); + Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG READ_MEMORY command to read data from a specific address space within the + * attached device. + */ +static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK; + + struct + { + uint8_t MemoryType; + uint32_t Address; + uint16_t Length; + } ReadMemory_XPROG_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadMemory_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params), NULL); + ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address); + ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length = SwapEndian_16(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint8_t ReadBuffer[256]; + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + { + /* Read the PDI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + else + { + /* Read the TPI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(TINYNVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM); + Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus); + + if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK) + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG CRC command to read a specific memory space's CRC value for comparison between the + * attached device's memory and a data set on the host. + */ +static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK; + + struct + { + uint8_t CRCType; + } ReadCRC_XPROG_Params; + + Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadCRC_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadCRC_XPROG_Params), NULL); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + uint32_t MemoryCRC; + + if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI) + { + uint8_t CRCCommand; + + /* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to CRC */ + switch (ReadCRC_XPROG_Params.CRCType) + { + case XPROG_CRC_APP: + CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC; + break; + case XPROG_CRC_BOOT: + CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC; + break; + default: + CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC; + break; + } + + /* Perform and retrieve the memory CRC, indicate timeout if occurred */ + if (!(XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(CRCCommand, &MemoryCRC))) + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT; + } + else + { + /* TPI does not support memory CRC */ + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED; + } + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_CRC); + Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus); + + if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK) + { + Endpoint_Write_8(MemoryCRC >> 16); + Endpoint_Write_16_LE(MemoryCRC & 0xFFFF); + } + + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +/** Handler for the XPROG SET_PARAM command to set a XPROG parameter for use when communicating with the + * attached device. + */ +static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK; + + uint8_t XPROGParam = Endpoint_Read_8(); + + /* Determine which parameter is being set, store the new parameter value */ + switch (XPROGParam) + { + case XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE: + XPROG_Param_NVMBase = Endpoint_Read_32_BE(); + break; + case XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE: + XPROG_Param_EEPageSize = Endpoint_Read_16_BE(); + break; + case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG: + XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8(); + break; + case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG: + XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8(); + break; + case XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1: + /* TODO: Undocumented parameter added in AVRStudio 5.1, purpose unknown. Must ACK and discard or + the communication with AVRStudio 5.1 will fail. + */ + Endpoint_Discard_16(); + break; + default: + ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED; + break; + } + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR); + Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN); + + Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG); + Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM); + Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e35a1e4a19 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for XPROGProtocol.c. + */ + +#ifndef _XPROG_PROTOCOL_ +#define _XPROG_PROTOCOL_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../V2Protocol.h" + #include "XMEGANVM.h" + #include "TINYNVM.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + /* On the XPLAIN board, we only need PDI programming + for the ATXMEGA128A1 - disable ISP to prevent hardware + damage and force-enable XPROG. + */ + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /* Macros: */ + #define XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE 0x01 + #define XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE 0x02 + #define XPROG_CMD_ERASE 0x03 + #define XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM 0x04 + #define XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM 0x05 + #define XPROG_CMD_CRC 0x06 + #define XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM 0x07 + + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL 1 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT 2 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM 3 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE 4 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS 5 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG 6 + #define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FACTORY_CALIBRATION 7 + + #define XPROG_ERASE_CHIP 1 + #define XPROG_ERASE_APP 2 + #define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT 3 + #define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM 4 + #define XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE 5 + #define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE 6 + #define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE 7 + #define XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG 8 + + #define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_ERASE 0 + #define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_WRITE 1 + + #define XPROG_CRC_APP 1 + #define XPROG_CRC_BOOT 2 + #define XPROG_CRC_FLASH 3 + + #define XPROG_ERR_OK 0 + #define XPROG_ERR_FAILED 1 + #define XPROG_ERR_COLLISION 2 + #define XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT 3 + + #define XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE 0x01 + #define XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE 0x02 + #define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG 0x03 + #define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG 0x04 + #define XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1 0x05 + + #define XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI 0x00 + #define XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG 0x01 + #define XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI 0x02 + + #define XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE (1 << 1) + #define XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE (1 << 0) + + /* External Variables: */ + extern uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase; + extern uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize; + extern uint8_t XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr; + extern uint8_t XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void); + void XPROGProtocol_Command(void); + + #if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)) + static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void); + static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0455329c3d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Target-related functions for the PDI Protocol decoder. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C +#include "XPROGTarget.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently in Tx or Rx mode. */ +bool IsSending; + +/** Enables the target's PDI interface, holding the target in reset until PDI mode is exited. */ +void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void) +{ + IsSending = false; + + /* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */ + DDRD |= (1 << 5) | (1 << 3); + DDRD &= ~(1 << 2); + + /* Set DATA line high for at least 90ns to disable /RESET functionality */ + PORTD |= (1 << 3); + _delay_us(100); + + /* Set up the synchronous USART for XMEGA communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */ + UBRR1 = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1); + UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1); + UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1); + + /* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable PDI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */ + XPROGTarget_SendIdle(); + XPROGTarget_SendIdle(); +} + +/** Enables the target's TPI interface, holding the target in reset until TPI mode is exited. */ +void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void) +{ + IsSending = false; + + /* Set /RESET line low for at least 400ns to enable TPI functionality */ + AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK; + AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; + _delay_us(100); + + /* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */ + DDRD |= (1 << 5) | (1 << 3); + DDRD &= ~(1 << 2); + + /* Set up the synchronous USART for TPI communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */ + UBRR1 = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1); + UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1); + UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1); + + /* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable TPI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */ + XPROGTarget_SendIdle(); + XPROGTarget_SendIdle(); +} + +/** Disables the target's PDI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */ +void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void) +{ + /* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */ + if (IsSending) + XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(); + + /* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */ + UCSR1A = ((1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1)); + UCSR1B = 0; + UCSR1C = 0; + + /* Tristate all pins */ + DDRD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3)); + PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2)); +} + +/** Disables the target's TPI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */ +void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void) +{ + /* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */ + if (IsSending) + XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(); + + /* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */ + UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1); + UCSR1B = 0; + UCSR1C = 0; + + /* Set all USART lines as inputs, tristate */ + DDRD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3)); + PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2)); + + /* Tristate target /RESET line */ + AUX_LINE_DDR &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; + AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK; +} + +/** Sends a byte via the USART. + * + * \param[in] Byte Byte to send through the USART + */ +void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte) +{ + /* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */ + if (!(IsSending)) + XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(); + + /* Wait until there is space in the hardware Tx buffer before writing */ + while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1))); + UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1); + UDR1 = Byte; +} + +/** Receives a byte via the hardware USART, blocking until data is received or timeout expired. + * + * \return Received byte from the USART + */ +uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void) +{ + /* Switch to Rx mode if currently in Tx mode */ + if (IsSending) + XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(); + + /* Wait until a byte has been received before reading */ + while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) && TimeoutTicksRemaining); + + return UDR1; +} + +/** Sends an IDLE via the USART to the attached target, consisting of a full frame of idle bits. */ +void XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void) +{ + /* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */ + if (!(IsSending)) + XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(); + + /* Need to do nothing for a full frame to send an IDLE */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BITS_IN_USART_FRAME; i++) + { + /* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */ + while (PIND & (1 << 5)); + while (!(PIND & (1 << 5))); + while (PIND & (1 << 5)); + } +} + +static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void) +{ + /* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */ + while (PIND & (1 << 5)); + while (!(PIND & (1 << 5))); + while (PIND & (1 << 5)); + + PORTD |= (1 << 3); + DDRD |= (1 << 3); + + UCSR1B &= ~(1 << RXEN1); + UCSR1B |= (1 << TXEN1); + + IsSending = true; +} + +static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void) +{ + while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1))); + UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1); + + UCSR1B &= ~(1 << TXEN1); + UCSR1B |= (1 << RXEN1); + + DDRD &= ~(1 << 3); + PORTD &= ~(1 << 3); + + IsSending = false; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1341384f2f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for XPROGTarget.c. + */ + +#ifndef _XPROG_TARGET_ +#define _XPROG_TARGET_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + #include "../V2Protocol.h" + #include "XPROGProtocol.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1)) + #undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + + #if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + #endif + #endif + + /** Serial carrier TPI/PDI speed in Hz, when hardware TPI/PDI mode is used. */ + #define XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED 2000000 + + /** Total number of bits in a single USART frame. */ + #define BITS_IN_USART_FRAME 12 + + /** \name PDI Related Constants + * @{ + */ + #define PDI_CMD_LDS(AddressSize, DataSize) (0x00 | ( AddressSize << 2) | DataSize) + #define PDI_CMD_LD(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x20 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize) + #define PDI_CMD_STS(AddressSize, DataSize) (0x40 | ( AddressSize << 2) | DataSize) + #define PDI_CMD_ST(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x60 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize) + #define PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDIReg) (0x80 | PDIReg) + #define PDI_CMD_REPEAT(DataSize) (0xA0 | DataSize) + #define PDI_CMD_STCS(PDIReg) (0xC0 | PDIReg) + #define PDI_CMD_KEY 0xE0 + + #define PDI_REG_STATUS 0 + #define PDI_REG_RESET 1 + #define PDI_REG_CTRL 2 + + #define PDI_STATUS_NVM (1 << 1) + + #define PDI_RESET_KEY 0x59 + #define PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF} + + #define PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE 0 + #define PDI_DATASIZE_2BYTES 1 + #define PDI_DATASIZE_3BYTES 2 + #define PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES 3 + + #define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT 0 + #define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI 1 + #define PDI_POINTER_DIRECT 2 + /** @} */ + + /** \name TPI Related Constants + * @{ + */ + #define TPI_CMD_SLD(PointerAccess) (0x20 | PointerAccess) + #define TPI_CMD_SST(PointerAccess) (0x60 | PointerAccess) + #define TPI_CMD_SSTPR 0x68 + #define TPI_CMD_SIN(Address) (0x10 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F)) + #define TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address) (0x90 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F)) + #define TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPIReg) (0x80 | TPIReg) + #define TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPIReg) (0xC0 | TPIReg) + #define TPI_CMD_SKEY 0xE0 + + #define TPI_REG_STATUS 0x00 + #define TPI_REG_CTRL 0x02 + #define TPI_REG_ID 0x0F + + #define TPI_STATUS_NVM (1 << 1) + + #define TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF} + + #define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT 0 + #define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI 4 + /** @} */ + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void); + void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void); + void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void); + void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void); + void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte); + uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void); + void XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void); + bool XPROGTarget_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void); + + #if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)) + static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void); + static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/AVRISP_mkII.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/AVRISP_mkII.inf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..81ea412280 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/AVRISP_mkII.inf diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f916b08986 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0718dfb7c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/amd64/libusb0.sys diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/avrisp_mkii.cat b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/avrisp_mkii.cat Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9f004a584c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/avrisp_mkii.cat diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..292df27857 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f17914b8c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/ia64/libusb0.sys diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c38919ee50 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x64.exe diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..030ec300c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/installer_x86.exe diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..56bb2cda25 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/license/libusb0/installer_license.txt @@ -0,0 +1,851 @@ +Copyright (c) 2002-2004 Stephan Meyer, <ste_meyer@web.de> +Copyright (c) 2000-2004 Johannes Erdfelt, <johannes@erdfelt.com> +Copyright (c) 2000-2004 Thomas Sailer, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch> +Copyright (c) 2010 Travis Robinson, <libusbdotnet@gmail.com> + +This software is distributed under the following licenses: +Driver: GNU General Public License (GPL) +Library, Test Files, Installer: GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) + +*********************************************************************** + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + + Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for +software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed +to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, +the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to +share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free +software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the +GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to +any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you +want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new +free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you +these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have +certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if +you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same +freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive +or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they +know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: +(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License +giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains +that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and +authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as +changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to +authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run +modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer +can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of +protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic +pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to +use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we +have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those +products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we +stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions +of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. +States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of +software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to +avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could +make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that +patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + 0. Definitions. + + "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of +works, such as semiconductor masks. + + "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this +License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and +"recipients" may be individuals or organizations. + + To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work +in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an +exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the +earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. + + A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based +on the Program. + + To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without +permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for +infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a +computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, +distribution (with or without modification), making available to the +public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other +parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through +a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" +to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible +feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) +tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the +extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the +work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If +the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a +menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + 1. Source Code. + + The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work +for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source +form of a work. + + A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official +standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of +interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that +is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other +than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of +packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major +Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that +Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an +implementation is available to the public in source code form. A +"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component +(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system +(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to +produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all +the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable +work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to +control those activities. However, it does not include the work's +System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free +programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but +which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source +includes interface definition files associated with source files for +the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically +linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, +such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those +subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users +can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding +Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that +same work. + + 2. Basic Permissions. + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of +copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated +conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited +permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a +covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its +content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your +rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not +convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains +in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose +of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you +with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with +the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do +not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works +for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction +and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of +your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under +the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 +makes it unnecessary. + + 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological +measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article +11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or +similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such +measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid +circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention +is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to +the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or +modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's +users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of +technological measures. + + 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you +receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and +appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; +keep intact all notices stating that this License and any +non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; +keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all +recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, +and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + + 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to +produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the +terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified + it, and giving a relevant date. + + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is + released under this License and any conditions added under section + 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to + "keep intact all notices". + + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this + License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This + License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 + additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, + regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no + permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not + invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display + Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive + interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your + work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent +works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, +and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, +in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an +"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not +used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users +beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work +in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other +parts of the aggregate. + + 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms +of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the +machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, +in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the + Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium + customarily used for software interchange. + + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a + written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as + long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product + model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a + copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the + product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical + medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no + more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this + conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the + Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the + written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This + alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and + only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord + with subsection 6b. + + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated + place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the + Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no + further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the + Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to + copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source + may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) + that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain + clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the + Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the + Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is + available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided + you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding + Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no + charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded +from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be +included in conveying the object code work. + + A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any +tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, +or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation +into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, +doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular +product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a +typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status +of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user +actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product +is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial +commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent +the only significant mode of use of the product. + + "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, +procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install +and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from +a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must +suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object +code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because +modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or +specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as +part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the +User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a +fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the +Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied +by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply +if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install +modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has +been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a +requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates +for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for +the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a +network may be denied when the modification itself materially and +adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and +protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, +in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly +documented (and with an implementation available to the public in +source code form), and must require no special password or key for +unpacking, reading or copying. + + 7. Additional Terms. + + "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this +License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. +Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall +be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent +that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions +apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately +under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by +this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option +remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of +it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own +removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place +additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, +for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you +add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of +that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the + terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or + author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal + Notices displayed by works containing it; or + + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or + requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in + reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or + authors of the material; or + + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some + trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that + material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of + it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for + any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on + those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further +restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you +received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is +governed by this License along with a term that is a further +restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains +a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this +License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms +of that license document, provided that the further restriction does +not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you +must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the +additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating +where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the +form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; +the above requirements apply either way. + + 8. Termination. + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly +provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or +modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under +this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third +paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your +license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) +provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and +finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright +holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means +prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is +reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the +violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have +received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that +copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after +your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the +licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under +this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently +reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same +material under section 10. + + 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or +run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work +occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission +to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, +nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or +modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do +not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a +covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + + 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically +receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and +propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible +for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an +organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an +organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered +work results from an entity transaction, each party to that +transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever +licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could +give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the +Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if +the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the +rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may +not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of +rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation +(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that +any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for +sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + + 11. Patents. + + A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this +License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The +work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". + + A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims +owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or +hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted +by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, +but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a +consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For +purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant +patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of +this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free +patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to +make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and +propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express +agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent +(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to +sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a +party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a +patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, +and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone +to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a +publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, +then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so +available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the +patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner +consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent +license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have +actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the +covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work +in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that +country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or +arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a +covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties +receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify +or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license +you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered +work and works based on it. + + A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within +the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is +conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are +specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered +work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is +in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment +to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying +the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the +parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory +patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work +conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily +for and in connection with specific products or compilations that +contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, +or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting +any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may +otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + + 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a +covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may +not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you +to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey +the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this +License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + + 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have +permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed +under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single +combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this +License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, +but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, +section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the +combination as such. + + 14. Revised Versions of this License. + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of +the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the +Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General +Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the +option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered +version or of any later version published by the Free Software +Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the +GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published +by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future +versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's +public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you +to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different +permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any +author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a +later version. + + 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY +APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT +HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY +OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, +THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM +IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF +ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 16. Limitation of Liability. + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS +THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY +GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE +USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF +DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD +PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), +EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF +SUCH DAMAGES. + + 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided +above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, +reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates +an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the +Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a +copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short +notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands +might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, +if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. +For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see +<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program +into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you +may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with +the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General +Public License instead of this License. But first, please read +<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + + GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + + Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + + This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates +the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public +License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below. + + 0. Additional Definitions. + + As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser +General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU +General Public License. + + "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License, +other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below. + + An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided +by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. +Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode +of using an interface provided by the Library. + + A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an +Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library +with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked +Version". + + The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the +Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code +for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are +based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version. + + The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the +object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data +and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the +Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work. + + 1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL. + + You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License +without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL. + + 2. Conveying Modified Versions. + + If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a +facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application +that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the +facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified +version: + + a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to + ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the + function or data, the facility still operates, and performs + whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or + + b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of + this License applicable to that copy. + + 3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files. + + The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from +a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object +code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated +material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure +layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates +(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following: + + a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the + Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are + covered by this License. + + b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license + document. + + 4. Combined Works. + + You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, +taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the +portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse +engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of +the following: + + a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that + the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are + covered by this License. + + b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license + document. + + c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during + execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among + these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the + copies of the GNU GPL and this license document. + + d) Do one of the following: + + 0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this + License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form + suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to + recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of + the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the + manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying + Corresponding Source. + + 1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the + Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time + a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer + system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version + of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked + Version. + + e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise + be required to provide such information under section 6 of the + GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is + necessary to install and execute a modified version of the + Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the + Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If + you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany + the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application + Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation + Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL + for conveying Corresponding Source.) + + 5. Combined Libraries. + + You may place library facilities that are a work based on the +Library side by side in a single library together with other library +facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this +License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your +choice, if you do both of the following: + + a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based + on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities, + conveyed under the terms of this License. + + b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it + is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the + accompanying uncombined form of the same work. + + 6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License. + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the +Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version +of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version" +applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and +conditions either of that published version or of any later version +published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you +received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser +General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser +General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide +whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall +apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is +permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the +Library. + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5322e5b978 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0.sys diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6e475b90ac --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/WindowsDriver/x86/libusb0_x86.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11467236b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <!-- Required by the XPLAIN Bridge project as well, so split into a meta module -->
+ <module type="meta" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="."/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="AVRISPDescriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="AVRISPDescriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>
+
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2Protocol.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2Protocol.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>
+ </module>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Clone firmware of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="WindowsDriver"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="AVRISP-MKII.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..faba2c70d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \ + WindowsDriver/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6bc0e0f25a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = AVRISP-MKII +SRC = $(TARGET).c AVRISPDescriptors.c Lib/V2Protocol.c Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c \ + Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..93a39cb7bc --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.c @@ -0,0 +1,311 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Benito project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Benito.h" + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */ +static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128]; + +/** Pulse generation counters to keep track of the number of milliseconds remaining for each pulse type */ +volatile struct +{ + uint8_t ResetPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for target /RESET pulse */ + uint8_t TxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Tx LED pulse */ + uint8_t RxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Rx LED pulse */ + uint8_t PingPongLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for enumeration Tx/Rx ping-pong LED pulse */ +} PulseMSRemaining; + +/** Milliseconds remaining until the receive buffer is flushed to the USB host */ +uint8_t FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS; + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data)); + + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + /* Echo bytes from the host to the target via the hardware USART */ + if ((UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)) && CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface)) + { + UDR1 = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_TX); + PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS; + } + + /* Check if the millisecond timer has elapsed */ + if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A)) + { + /* Clear flush timer expiry flag */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0); + + /* Check if the reset pulse period has elapsed, if so tristate the target reset line */ + if (PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse)) + { + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY); + AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK; + } + + /* Check if the LEDs should be ping-ponging (during enumeration) */ + if (PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse)) + { + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDMASK_TX | LEDMASK_RX); + PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS; + } + + /* Turn off TX LED(s) once the TX pulse period has elapsed */ + if (PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse)) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_TX); + + /* Turn off RX LED(s) once the RX pulse period has elapsed */ + if (PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse)) + LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_RX); + + /* Check if the receive buffer flush period has expired */ + uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer); + if (!(--FlushPeriodRemaining) || (BufferCount > 200)) + { + FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS; + + /* Start RX LED indicator pulse */ + if (BufferCount) + { + LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_RX); + PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS; + } + + /* Echo bytes from the target to the host via the virtual serial port */ + while (BufferCount--) + { + /* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */ + if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, + RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError) + { + break; + } + + /* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */ + RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer); + } + } + } + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Millisecond Timer Interrupt */ + OCR0A = (F_CPU / 64 / 1000); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00)); + + /* Tristate target /RESET Line */ + AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK; + AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK; +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS; + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_TX); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0; + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDS_NO_LEDS : LEDMASK_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to + * the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing + * internally. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event. + * + * \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t ConfigMask = 0; + + switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType) + { + case CDC_PARITY_Odd: + ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10)); + break; + case CDC_PARITY_Even: + ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11); + break; + } + + if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits) + ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1); + + switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits) + { + case 6: + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10); + break; + case 7: + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11); + break; + case 8: + ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10)); + break; + } + + /* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */ + UCSR1B = 0; + UCSR1A = 0; + UCSR1C = 0; + + /* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */ + UBRR1 = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS); + + /* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */ + UCSR1C = ConfigMask; + UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1); + UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1)); +} + +/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer + * for later transmission to the host. + */ +ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1; + + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured) + RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte); +} + +/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Host-to-Device Line Encoding Changed event. + * + * \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) +{ + static bool PreviousDTRState = false; + bool CurrentDTRState = (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice & CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR); + + /* Check if the DTR line has been asserted - if so, start the target AVR's reset pulse */ + if (!(PreviousDTRState) && CurrentDTRState) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY); + + AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR |= AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK; + PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse = AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS; + } + + PreviousDTRState = CurrentDTRState; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..28bed26afa --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.h @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Benito.c. + */ + +#ifndef _BENITO_H_ +#define _BENITO_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate TX activity. */ + #define LEDMASK_TX LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate RX activity. */ + #define LEDMASK_RX LEDS_LED2 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + + void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo); + void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..07bec52b3a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Benito Arduino Programmer Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n + * Arduino Bootloader Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a USB AVR powered programmer for Arduino boards using the official Arduino bootloader. This + * project acts like a regular USB to Serial bridge, except that asserting the DTR line will cause a pulse + * to appear on a given port pin, to control the target's /RESET pin. + * + * This is primarily designed to fit the Benito board from www.dorkbotpdx.org, but will suit all USB AVRs. + * + * After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located + * in this project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use + * its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should + * automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Indicates the PORT register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Indicates the DDR register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Indicates the mask of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the target /RESET pulse.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the activity Tx/Rx LEDs.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the enumeration LED ping-ponging between toggles.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Period between flushings of received data buffer to the attached USB host.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3d81c45b05 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT PORTD + #define AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR DDRD + #define AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK (1 << 4) + + #define AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS 10 + + #define TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS 30 + #define PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS 100 + + #define RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS 10 + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6b113c8276 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..86cfa9a8e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2060, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Benito Arduino Programmer"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..453bb74cad --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Command Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75e93a8a9a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060 + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060 + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060 + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA Benito Programmer"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6f36da7671 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Benito Programmer" id="lufa.projects.benito.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.benito"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.benito" caption="Benito Programmer">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Benito AVR programmer.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="CDC Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Benito.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Benito.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Benito.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dff1b73f1c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Benito Arduino Programmer Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e44ffef936 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Benito/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = atmega32u2 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = BENITO +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = Benito +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..197122fce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) +// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY + #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL +// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here} +// #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e580caa478 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c @@ -0,0 +1,325 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the HIDReportViewer project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "HIDReportViewer.h" + +/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */ +static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo; + +/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Device_HID_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .DataINPipe = + { + .Address = (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1), + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTPipe = + { + .Address = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2), + .Banks = 1, + }, + .HIDInterfaceProtocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + .HIDParserData = &HIDReportInfo + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "HID Device Report Viewer Running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + RetrieveDeviceData(); + + HID_Host_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Task to retrieve the HID device information from an attached device, and output + * the relevant data to the serial port for analysis. + */ +void RetrieveDeviceData(void) +{ + if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) + return; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + OutputReportSizes(); + OutputParsedReportItems(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); +} + +/** Prints a summary of the device's HID report sizes from the HID parser output to the serial port + * for display to the user. + */ +void OutputReportSizes(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nTotal Device Reports: %" PRId8 "\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports); + + for (uint8_t ReportIndex = 0; ReportIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; ReportIndex++) + { + const HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[ReportIndex]; + + uint8_t ReportSizeInBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_In]; + uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out]; + uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature]; + + /* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */ + printf_P(PSTR(" + Report ID 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Input Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n" + " - Output Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n" + " - Feature Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"), + CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID, + ReportSizeInBits, + ((ReportSizeInBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits & 0x07) != 0)), + ReportSizeOutBits, + ((ReportSizeOutBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits & 0x07) != 0)), + ReportSizeFeatureBits, + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0))); + } +} + +/** Prints a summary of the device's parsed and stored report items along with their attributes + * to the serial port for display to the user. + */ +void OutputParsedReportItems(void) +{ + printf_P(PSTR("\r\nReport Items (%" PRId8 " in Table):\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems); + + for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++) + { + const HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex]; + + printf_P(PSTR(" + Item %" PRId8 ":\r\n" + " - Report ID: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Data Direction: %s\r\n" + " - Item Flags: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Item Offset (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Item Size (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Usage Page: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n" + " - Usage: 0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n" + " - Unit Type: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Unit Exponent: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Logical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Logical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Physical Minimum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Physical Maximum: 0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n" + " - Collection Path:\r\n"), + ItemIndex, + RItem->ReportID, + ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In) ? "IN" : ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out) ? "OUT" : "FEATURE")), + RItem->ItemFlags, + RItem->BitOffset, + RItem->Attributes.BitSize, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page, + RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type, + RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum, + RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum); + + OutputCollectionPath(RItem->CollectionPath); + } +} + +/** Prints the HID Collection path (along with each node's attributes) to the serial port + * for display to the user, from the given starting node to the root node. + * + * \param[in] CollectionPath Starting HID Collection node to print + */ +void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath) +{ + const HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrentNode = CollectionPath; + + while (CurrentNode != NULL) + { + printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n" + " - Type: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n" + " - Usage: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"), + CurrentNode->Type, CurrentNode->Usage); + + CurrentNode = CurrentNode->Parent; + } + + printf_P(PSTR(" |\r\n" + " END\r\n")); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Serial_Init(9600, false); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */ + Serial_CreateStream(NULL); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512]; + + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData, + sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Device_HID_Interface, + ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid HID Device.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Device_HID_Interface) != 0) + { + puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); + return; + } + + puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n")); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_Disable(); + + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n" + " -- Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n" + " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store + * an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items + * we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would + * have occupied). + * + * \param[in] CurrentItem Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded + */ +bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem) +{ + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..22224fe1a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HIDReportViewer.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_ +#define _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdio.h> + #include <inttypes.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void RetrieveDeviceData(void); + void OutputReportSizes(void); + void OutputParsedReportItems(void); + void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath); + + void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fccc892c6c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage HID Device Report Viewer Programmer Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Host</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Specification \n + * USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a HID Report viewer. This project is designed to aid in the debugging of USB HID Hosts, where the contents of an + * unknown HID device's HID Report need to be examined. Once a HID device has been plugged into this application, the HID report + * descriptor will be parsed using the internal LUFA HID report parser, and the results dumped to the serial port in a human + * readable format. This output will contain information on the sizes of the reports within the device's HID interface, as well as + * information on each report element (size, usage, minimum/maximum values, etc.). + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7819aabf87 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="HID Report Viewer" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.hid_viewer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer" caption="HID Report Viewer">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ HID device report viewer project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Host"/>
+ <keyword value="HID Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="HIDReportViewer.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="HIDReportViewer.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="HIDReportViewer.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..015e9c0f6a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "HID Device Report Viewer Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75d40e88c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = HIDReportViewer +SRC = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b189943a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ +namespace CPUMonitor +{ + partial class frmCPU + { + /// <summary> + /// Required designer variable. + /// </summary> + private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null; + + /// <summary> + /// Clean up any resources being used. + /// </summary> + /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param> + protected override void Dispose(bool disposing) + { + if (disposing && (components != null)) + { + components.Dispose(); + } + base.Dispose(disposing); + } + + #region Windows Form Designer generated code + + /// <summary> + /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify + /// the contents of this method with the code editor. + /// </summary> + private void InitializeComponent() + { + this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container(); + this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components); + this.tmrCPUTimer = new System.Windows.Forms.Timer(this.components); + this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox(); + this.pcCPUUsage = new System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter(); + this.lblCPU = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components); + this.btnMinimizeToTray = new System.Windows.Forms.Button(); + this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).BeginInit(); + this.SuspendLayout(); + // + // tmrCPUTimer + // + this.tmrCPUTimer.Enabled = true; + this.tmrCPUTimer.Interval = 1000; + this.tmrCPUTimer.Tick += new System.EventHandler(this.tmrCPUTimer_Tick); + // + // cmbComPort + // + this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true; + this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(48, 12); + this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort"; + this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(156, 21); + this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0; + this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged); + // + // pcCPUUsage + // + this.pcCPUUsage.CategoryName = "Processor"; + this.pcCPUUsage.CounterName = "% Processor Time"; + this.pcCPUUsage.InstanceName = "_Total"; + // + // lblCPU + // + this.lblCPU.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 14.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblCPU.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(44, 36); + this.lblCPU.Name = "lblCPU"; + this.lblCPU.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(160, 28); + this.lblCPU.TabIndex = 1; + this.lblCPU.Text = "0%"; + this.lblCPU.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter; + // + // nicoNotifyIcon + // + this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor"; + this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true; + // + // btnMinimizeToTray + // + this.btnMinimizeToTray.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 67); + this.btnMinimizeToTray.Name = "btnMinimizeToTray"; + this.btnMinimizeToTray.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28); + this.btnMinimizeToTray.TabIndex = 2; + this.btnMinimizeToTray.Text = "Minimize to Tray"; + this.btnMinimizeToTray.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true; + this.btnMinimizeToTray.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimizeToTray_Click); + // + // btnExit + // + this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(126, 67); + this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit"; + this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28); + this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3; + this.btnExit.Text = "Exit"; + this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true; + this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click); + // + // frmCPU + // + this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F); + this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font; + this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(249, 106); + this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit); + this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimizeToTray); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblCPU); + this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort); + this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle; + this.MaximizeBox = false; + this.Name = "frmCPU"; + this.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor"; + this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized; + this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.Form1_Load); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).EndInit(); + this.ResumeLayout(false); + + } + + #endregion + + private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort; + private System.Windows.Forms.Timer tmrCPUTimer; + private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort; + private System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter pcCPUUsage; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblCPU; + private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon; + private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimizeToTray; + private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..32543fc59b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.ComponentModel; +using System.Data; +using System.Drawing; +using System.Linq; +using System.Text; +using System.Windows.Forms; +using Microsoft.Win32; + +namespace CPUMonitor +{ + public partial class frmCPU : Form + { + private RegistryKey AppRegKey; + + private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F; + + public frmCPU() + { + InitializeComponent(); + + nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon; + nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick); + } + + private void Form1_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\CPUMonitor"); + + String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames(); + Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); }); + cmbComPort.Items.Clear(); + cmbComPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames); + + cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1; + serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text; + + Hide(); + } + + private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue) + { + byte[] buffer = new byte[3]; + buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX)); + buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX)); + buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX)); + + try + { + serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text; + serSerialPort.Open(); + serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); + serSerialPort.Close(); + } + catch (Exception e) + { + + } + } + + private void tmrCPUTimer_Tick(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + float CPUUsage = pcCPUUsage.NextValue(); + + int Red = 0; + int Green = 0; + int Blue = 0; + + if (CPUUsage < 25) + { + Green = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * CPUUsage); + } + else if (CPUUsage < 50) + { + Blue = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 25)); + Green = LIGHT_MAX - Blue; + } + else if (CPUUsage < 75) + { + Red = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 50)); + Blue = LIGHT_MAX - Red; + } + else + { + Red = LIGHT_MAX; + } + + NotifyLight(Red, Green, Blue); + lblCPU.Text = ((int)CPUUsage).ToString() + "%"; + } + + private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + Application.Exit(); + } + + private void btnMinimizeToTray_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + this.Hide(); + } + + private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e) + { + this.Show(); + this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal; + } + + private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1); + serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text; + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d568a9dc48 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003"> + <PropertyGroup> + <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration> + <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform> + <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion> + <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion> + <ProjectGuid>{6040B049-4241-4FFD-B388-AACDA78D1469}</ProjectGuid> + <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType> + <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder> + <RootNamespace>CPUMonitor</RootNamespace> + <AssemblyName>CPUMonitor</AssemblyName> + <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion> + <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment> + <FileUpgradeFlags> + </FileUpgradeFlags> + <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion> + <UpgradeBackupLocation /> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols> + <DebugType>full</DebugType> + <Optimize>false</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType> + <Optimize>true</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Reference Include="System" /> + <Reference Include="System.Core"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data" /> + <Reference Include="System.Deployment" /> + <Reference Include="System.Drawing" /> + <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" /> + <Reference Include="System.Xml" /> + </ItemGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.cs"> + <SubType>Form</SubType> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.Designer.cs"> + <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="Program.cs" /> + <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" /> + <EmbeddedResource Include="CPUMonitor.resx"> + <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx"> + <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon> + <DesignTime>True</DesignTime> + </Compile> + <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings"> + <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + </None> + <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon> + <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput> + </Compile> + </ItemGroup> + <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" /> + <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. + Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets. + <Target Name="BeforeBuild"> + </Target> + <Target Name="AfterBuild"> + </Target> + --> +</Project>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c62b1b0203 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" /> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a"> + <value>17, 17</value> + </metadata> + <metadata name="tmrCPUTimer.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a"> + <value>137, 17</value> + </metadata> + <metadata name="pcCPUUsage.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a"> + <value>262, 17</value> + </metadata> + <metadata name="nicoNotifyIcon.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a"> + <value>383, 17</value> + </metadata> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cb4fd89f23 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.Linq; +using System.Windows.Forms; + +namespace CPUMonitor +{ + static class Program + { + /// <summary> + /// The main entry point for the application. + /// </summary> + [STAThread] + static void Main() + { + Application.EnableVisualStyles(); + Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false); + Application.Run(new frmCPU()); + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..85d31fcba7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +using System.Reflection; +using System.Runtime.CompilerServices; +using System.Runtime.InteropServices; + +// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following +// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information +// associated with an assembly. +[assembly: AssemblyTitle("CPUMonitor")] +[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")] +[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")] +[assembly: AssemblyProduct("CPUMonitor")] +[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")] +[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")] + +// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible +// to COM components. If you need to access a type in this assembly from +// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type. +[assembly: ComVisible(false)] + +// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM +[assembly: Guid("3e4a61da-cdde-46de-848b-b5206d225e21")] + +// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values: +// +// Major Version +// Minor Version +// Build Number +// Revision +// +// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers +// by using the '*' as shown below: +// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")] +[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")] +[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")] diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bf80e05fc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace CPUMonitor.Properties { + using System; + + + /// <summary> + /// A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. + /// </summary> + // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder + // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio. + // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen + // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project. + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")] + [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()] + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + internal class Resources { + + private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan; + + private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture; + + [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")] + internal Resources() { + } + + /// <summary> + /// Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager { + get { + if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) { + global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("CPUMonitor.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly); + resourceMan = temp; + } + return resourceMan; + } + } + + /// <summary> + /// Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all + /// resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture { + get { + return resourceCulture; + } + set { + resourceCulture = value; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af7dbebbac --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..690fde3ba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace CPUMonitor.Properties { + + + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")] + internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase { + + private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings()))); + + public static Settings Default { + get { + return defaultInstance; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39645652af --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)"> + <Profiles> + <Profile Name="(Default)" /> + </Profiles> + <Settings /> +</SettingsFile> diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75713f94d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..31e6b44b64 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2044, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LED Notifier"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b19682a2b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Command Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..595083a4a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ +namespace LEDMixer +{ + partial class LEDMixer + { + /// <summary> + /// Required designer variable. + /// </summary> + private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null; + + /// <summary> + /// Clean up any resources being used. + /// </summary> + /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param> + protected override void Dispose(bool disposing) + { + if (disposing && (components != null)) + { + components.Dispose(); + } + base.Dispose(disposing); + } + + #region Windows Form Designer generated code + + /// <summary> + /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify + /// the contents of this method with the code editor. + /// </summary> + private void InitializeComponent() + { + this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container(); + this.tbRed = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar(); + this.tbGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar(); + this.tbBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar(); + this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components); + this.cbPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox(); + this.lblRed = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.lblBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.lblGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).BeginInit(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).BeginInit(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).BeginInit(); + this.SuspendLayout(); + // + // tbRed + // + this.tbRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 64); + this.tbRed.Maximum = 512; + this.tbRed.Name = "tbRed"; + this.tbRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45); + this.tbRed.TabIndex = 0; + this.tbRed.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbRed_Scroll); + // + // tbGreen + // + this.tbGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 115); + this.tbGreen.Maximum = 512; + this.tbGreen.Name = "tbGreen"; + this.tbGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45); + this.tbGreen.TabIndex = 1; + this.tbGreen.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbGreen_Scroll); + // + // tbBlue + // + this.tbBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 163); + this.tbBlue.Maximum = 512; + this.tbBlue.Name = "tbBlue"; + this.tbBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45); + this.tbBlue.TabIndex = 2; + this.tbBlue.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbBlue_Scroll); + // + // cbPort + // + this.cbPort.FormattingEnabled = true; + this.cbPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(97, 12); + this.cbPort.Name = "cbPort"; + this.cbPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(99, 21); + this.cbPort.TabIndex = 3; + this.cbPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged); + // + // lblRed + // + this.lblRed.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 64); + this.lblRed.Name = "lblRed"; + this.lblRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(48, 29); + this.lblRed.TabIndex = 4; + this.lblRed.Text = "Red"; + this.lblRed.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight; + // + // lblBlue + // + this.lblBlue.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 115); + this.lblBlue.Name = "lblGreen"; + this.lblBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 27); + this.lblBlue.TabIndex = 5; + this.lblBlue.Text = "Green"; + this.lblBlue.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight; + // + // lblGreen + // + this.lblGreen.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 163); + this.lblGreen.Name = "lblBlue"; + this.lblGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 25); + this.lblGreen.TabIndex = 6; + this.lblGreen.Text = "Blue"; + this.lblGreen.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight; + // + // LEDMixer + // + this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F); + this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font; + this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(284, 207); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblGreen); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblBlue); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblRed); + this.Controls.Add(this.cbPort); + this.Controls.Add(this.tbBlue); + this.Controls.Add(this.tbGreen); + this.Controls.Add(this.tbRed); + this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle; + this.MaximizeBox = false; + this.MinimizeBox = false; + this.Name = "LEDMixer"; + this.Text = "LED Mixer"; + this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.LEDMixer_Load); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).EndInit(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).EndInit(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).EndInit(); + this.ResumeLayout(false); + this.PerformLayout(); + + } + + #endregion + + private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbRed; + private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbGreen; + private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbBlue; + private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort; + private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cbPort; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblRed; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblBlue; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblGreen; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dfaffed309 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.ComponentModel; +using System.Data; +using System.Drawing; +using System.Linq; +using System.Text; +using System.Windows.Forms; + +namespace LEDMixer +{ + public partial class LEDMixer : Form + { + private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F; + + public LEDMixer() + { + InitializeComponent(); + } + + private void LEDMixer_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames(); + Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); }); + cbPort.Items.Clear(); + cbPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames); + + cbPort.SelectedIndex = 0; + + tbRed.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX; + tbGreen.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX; + tbBlue.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX; + } + + private void tbRed_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value); + } + + private void tbGreen_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value); + } + + private void tbBlue_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value); + } + + private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue) + { + byte[] buffer = new byte[3]; + buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX)); + buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX)); + buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX)); + + try + { + serSerialPort.PortName = cbPort.Text; + serSerialPort.Open(); + serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length); + serSerialPort.Close(); + } + catch (Exception e) + { + + } + } + + private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value); + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6287ddcff1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003"> + <PropertyGroup> + <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration> + <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform> + <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion> + <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion> + <ProjectGuid>{A7814DA7-FA30-4A3D-878F-2E1975F9B27D}</ProjectGuid> + <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType> + <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder> + <RootNamespace>LEDMixer</RootNamespace> + <AssemblyName>LEDMixer</AssemblyName> + <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion> + <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment> + <FileUpgradeFlags> + </FileUpgradeFlags> + <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion> + <UpgradeBackupLocation /> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols> + <DebugType>full</DebugType> + <Optimize>false</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType> + <Optimize>true</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Reference Include="System" /> + <Reference Include="System.Core"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data" /> + <Reference Include="System.Deployment" /> + <Reference Include="System.Drawing" /> + <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" /> + <Reference Include="System.Xml" /> + </ItemGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Compile Include="LEDMixer.cs"> + <SubType>Form</SubType> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="LEDMixer.Designer.cs"> + <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="Program.cs" /> + <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" /> + <EmbeddedResource Include="LEDMixer.resx"> + <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx"> + <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon> + <DesignTime>True</DesignTime> + </Compile> + <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings"> + <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + </None> + <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon> + <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput> + </Compile> + </ItemGroup> + <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" /> + <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. + Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets. + <Target Name="BeforeBuild"> + </Target> + <Target Name="AfterBuild"> + </Target> + --> +</Project>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0601840d7b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" /> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a"> + <value>17, 17</value> + </metadata> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8958f86d2a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.Linq; +using System.Windows.Forms; + +namespace LEDMixer +{ + static class Program + { + /// <summary> + /// The main entry point for the application. + /// </summary> + [STAThread] + static void Main() + { + Application.EnableVisualStyles(); + Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false); + Application.Run(new LEDMixer()); + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c88194381e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +using System.Reflection; +using System.Runtime.CompilerServices; +using System.Runtime.InteropServices; + +// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following +// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information +// associated with an assembly. +[assembly: AssemblyTitle("LEDMixer")] +[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")] +[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")] +[assembly: AssemblyProduct("LEDMixer")] +[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")] +[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")] + +// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible +// to COM components. If you need to access a type in this assembly from +// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type. +[assembly: ComVisible(false)] + +// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM +[assembly: Guid("335c1112-9aa6-42a0-9765-5cc6deb78c88")] + +// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values: +// +// Major Version +// Minor Version +// Build Number +// Revision +// +// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers +// by using the '*' as shown below: +// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")] +[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")] +[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")] diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..53e3f2e0b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace LEDMixer.Properties { + using System; + + + /// <summary> + /// A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. + /// </summary> + // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder + // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio. + // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen + // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project. + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")] + [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()] + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + internal class Resources { + + private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan; + + private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture; + + [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")] + internal Resources() { + } + + /// <summary> + /// Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager { + get { + if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) { + global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("LEDMixer.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly); + resourceMan = temp; + } + return resourceMan; + } + } + + /// <summary> + /// Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all + /// resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture { + get { + return resourceCulture; + } + set { + resourceCulture = value; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af7dbebbac --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d79f28b804 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace LEDMixer.Properties { + + + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")] + internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase { + + private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings()))); + + public static Settings Default { + get { + return defaultInstance; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39645652af --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)"> + <Profiles> + <Profile Name="(Default)" /> + </Profiles> + <Settings /> +</SettingsFile> diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f399e1164f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the LEDNotfier project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "LEDNotifier.h" + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + +/** Counter for the software PWM. */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Count; + +/** Duty cycle for the first software PWM channel. */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty; + +/** Duty cycle for the second software PWM channel. */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty; + +/** Duty cycle for the third software PWM channel. */ +static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty; + +/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be + * used like any regular character stream in the C APIs. + */ +static FILE USBSerialStream; + + +/** Interrupt handler for managing the software PWM channels for the LEDs */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS; + + if (++SoftPWM_Count == 0b00011111) + SoftPWM_Count = 0; + + if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty) + LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED1; + + if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty) + LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED2; + + if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty) + LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED3; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Create a regular blocking character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */ + CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream); + + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + /* Read in next LED colour command from the host */ + uint8_t ColourUpdate = fgetc(&USBSerialStream); + + /* Top 3 bits select the LED, bottom 5 control the brightness */ + uint8_t Channel = (ColourUpdate & 0b11100000); + uint8_t Duty = (ColourUpdate & 0b00011111); + + if (Channel & (1 << 5)) + SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty = Duty; + + if (Channel & (1 << 6)) + SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty = Duty; + + if (Channel & (1 << 7)) + SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty = Duty; + + fputc(&USBSerialStream, ColourUpdate); + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Timer Initialization */ + OCR0A = 100; + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); + TCCR0B = (1 << CS00); + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f094d43e51 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for LEDNotifier.c. + */ + +#ifndef _LEDNOTIFIER_H_ +#define _LEDNOTIFIER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..53728f448f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage USB LED Notifier Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li AT90USB646 + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * USB LED Notifier Project. This project is designed for the Busware BUI board, however it can run easily on any + * USB AVR. It is a generic RGB LED controller (via a three channel software PWM) which listens for commands from the + * host on a CDC virtual serial port. When new commands are received, it updates the board LEDs. + * + * This can be controlled with any host application that can write to the virtual serial port, allowing it to become + * a visual notification system for any number of custom host applications, such as a new unread email notifier. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc3f0e74aa --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA LED Notifier.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..01f3468381 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="LED Notifier Widget" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.led_notifier"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier" caption="LED Notifier Widget">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ RGB LED notification widget project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="CDC Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LEDNotifier.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA LED Notifier.inf"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="CPUUsageApp"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="LEDMixerApp"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="LEDNotifier.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="LEDNotifier.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..89391e8a61 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2397 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB LED Notifier Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \ + CPUUsageApp/ \ + LEDMixerApp/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b426834fc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = atmega32u2 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USB2AX +F_CPU = 16000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = LEDNotifier +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9c1cfe675d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES 3 + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75713f94d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b4bcea1ee7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,314 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2048, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .Audio_ControlInterface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 0, + + .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass, + .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass, + .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .Audio_ControlInterface_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .ACSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0), + .TotalLength = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), + + .InCollection = 1, + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream, + }, + + .Audio_StreamInterface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass, + .SubClass = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass, + .Protocol = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .Audio_StreamInterface_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General, + + .AudioSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0), + + .TotalLength = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) - + offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC)) + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Emb = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded, + .JackID = 0x01, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Ext = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External, + .JackID = 0x02, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded, + .JackID = 0x03, + + .NumberOfPins = 1, + .SourceJackID = {0x02}, + .SourcePinID = {0x01}, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal, + + .JackType = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External, + .JackID = 0x04, + + .NumberOfPins = 1, + .SourceJackID = {0x01}, + .SourcePinID = {0x01}, + + .JackStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint = + { + .Endpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .Refresh = 0, + .SyncEndpointNumber = 0 + }, + + .MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General, + + .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01, + .AssociatedJackID = {0x01} + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint = + { + .Endpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .Refresh = 0, + .SyncEndpointNumber = 0 + }, + + .MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint}, + .Subtype = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General, + + .TotalEmbeddedJacks = 0x01, + .AssociatedJackID = {0x03} + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA MIDI Demo"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f973b4da78 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1) + + /** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // MIDI Audio Control Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_ControlInterface; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t Audio_ControlInterface_SPC; + + // MIDI Audio Streaming Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t Audio_StreamInterface; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t Audio_StreamInterface_SPC; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t MIDI_In_Jack_Ext; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint; + USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d9e08a19d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h" + +/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR, + .Size = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + +/** 8-bit 256 entry Sine Wave lookup table */ +static const uint8_t SineTable[256] = +{ + 128, 131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 146, 149, 152, 156, 159, 162, 165, 168, 171, 174, + 176, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 193, 196, 199, 201, 204, 206, 209, 211, 213, 216, + 218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 245, + 246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 252, 253, 254, 254, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, + 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 254, 254, 253, 252, 252, 251, 250, 249, 248, 247, + 246, 245, 243, 242, 240, 239, 237, 236, 234, 232, 230, 228, 226, 224, 222, 220, + 218, 216, 213, 211, 209, 206, 204, 201, 199, 196, 193, 191, 188, 185, 182, 179, + 176, 174, 171, 168, 165, 162, 159, 156, 152, 149, 146, 143, 140, 137, 134, 131, + 128, 124, 121, 118, 115, 112, 109, 106, 103, 99, 96, 93, 90, 87, 84, 81, + 79, 76, 73, 70, 67, 64, 62, 59, 56, 54, 51, 49, 46, 44, 42, 39, + 37, 35, 33, 31, 29, 27, 25, 23, 21, 19, 18, 16, 15, 13, 12, 10, + 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 3, 2, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, + 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, + 9, 10, 12, 13, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, + 37, 39, 42, 44, 46, 49, 51, 54, 56, 59, 62, 64, 67, 70, 73, 76, + 79, 81, 84, 87, 90, 93, 96, 99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 118, 121, 124, +}; + +/** Array of structures describing each note being generated */ +static DDSNoteData NoteData[MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES]; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent; + if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent)) + { + if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0)) + { + DDSNoteData* LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[0]; + + /* Find a free entry in the note table to use for the note being turned on */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + /* Check if the note is unused */ + if (!(NoteData[i].Pitch)) + { + /* If a note is unused, it's age is essentially infinite - always prefer unused note entries */ + LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i]; + break; + } + else if (NoteData[i].LRUAge >= LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge) + { + /* If an older entry that the current entry has been found, prefer overwriting that one */ + LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i]; + } + + NoteData[i].LRUAge++; + } + + /* Update the oldest note entry with the new note data and reset its age */ + LRUNoteStruct->Pitch = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2; + LRUNoteStruct->TableIncrement = (uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * SCALE_FACTOR) + + ((uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO * SCALE_FACTOR) * + (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 - BASE_PITCH_INDEX)); + LRUNoteStruct->TablePosition = 0; + LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge = 0; + + /* Turn on indicator LED to indicate note generation activity */ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + } + else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0)) + { + bool FoundActiveNote = false; + + /* Find the note in the note table to turn off */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + if (NoteData[i].Pitch == ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2) + NoteData[i].Pitch = 0; + else if (NoteData[i].Pitch) + FoundActiveNote = true; + } + + /* If all notes off, turn off the indicator LED */ + if (!(FoundActiveNote)) + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS); + } + } + + MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */ +ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + uint16_t MixedSample = 0; + + /* Sum together all the active notes to form a single sample */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + { + /* A non-zero pitch indicates the note is active */ + if (NoteData[i].Pitch) + { + /* Use the top 8 bits of the table position as the sample table index */ + uint8_t TableIndex = (NoteData[i].TablePosition >> 24); + + /* Add the new tone sample to the accumulator and increment the table position */ + MixedSample += SineTable[TableIndex]; + NoteData[i].TablePosition += NoteData[i].TableIncrement; + } + } + + /* Output clamped mixed sample value to the PWM */ + OCR3A = (MixedSample <= 0xFF) ? MixedSample : 0xFF; +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + + /* Sample reload timer initialization */ + TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A); + OCR0A = (VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 8); + TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01); // CTC mode + TCCR0B = (1 << CS01); // Fcpu/8 speed + + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); + + /* PWM speaker timer initialization */ + TCCR3A = ((1 << WGM31) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP + TCCR3B = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30)); // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + /* Set speaker as output */ + DDRC |= (1 << 6); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + /* Disable any notes currently being played */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++) + NoteData[i].Pitch = 0; + + /* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */ + DDRC &= ~(1 << 6); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..026a6ee38d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for AudioOutput.c. + */ + +#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ +#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** Scale factor used to convert the floating point frequencies and ratios into a fixed point number */ + #define SCALE_FACTOR 65536 + + /** Base (lowest) allowable MIDI note frequency */ + #define BASE_FREQUENCY 27.5 + + /** Ratio between each note in an octave */ + #define NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO 1.05946 + + /** Lowest valid MIDI pitch index */ + #define BASE_PITCH_INDEX 21 + + /** Number of samples in the virtual sample table (can be expanded to lower maximum frequency, but allow for + * more simultaneous notes due to the reduced amount of processing time needed when the samples are spaced out) + */ + #define VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE 512 + + /** Sample table increments per period for the base MIDI note frequency */ + #define BASE_INCREMENT (((F_CPU / VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 2) / BASE_FREQUENCY)) + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t LRUAge; + uint8_t Pitch; + uint32_t TableIncrement; + uint32_t TablePosition; + } DDSNoteData; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7d0f019ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage MIDI Tone Generator Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Audio Class</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Standard Audio Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n + * USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n + * General MIDI Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * MIDI note synthesiser project. This project implements a basic DDS frequency synthesiser, capable of producing 8-bit PWM sine + * waves of variable frequency. When attached to a USB host, this project will allow for multiple MIDI notes to be synthesised into + * audiable sound via PWM, using the notes sent to MIDI channel 1. + * + * Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare channel A. Decouple the audio output with a capacitor + * and attach to a speaker to hear the audio. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Sets the maximum number of MIDI notes that can be generated simultaneously. More notes require more processing time, + * and thus a value that is too high will cause audiable sound distortion due to insufficient CPU time.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6795c1bb8e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="MIDI Tone Generator" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen" caption="MIDI Tone Generator">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ MIDI tone generator project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="MIDI Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="MIDIToneGenerator.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..19bdcef4ed --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - MIDI Tone Generator Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c4132de45c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = MIDIToneGenerator +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b417b8a90 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define MAG_T1_CLOCK (1 << 0) + #define MAG_T1_DATA (1 << 1) + #define MAG_T2_CLOCK (1 << 2) + #define MAG_T2_DATA (1 << 3) + #define MAG_T3_CLOCK (1 << 4) + #define MAG_T3_DATA (1 << 5) + #define MAG_CARDPRESENT (1 << 6) + + #define MAG_PORT PORTC + #define MAG_PIN PINC + #define MAG_DDR DDRC + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2b8d027a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8032bccc84 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,216 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the + * reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent, + * where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used. + * + * See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] = +{ + /* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report. + * Max simultaneous keys: 6 + */ + HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6) +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2042, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .HID_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard, + .AlternateSetting = 0x00, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass, + .SubClass = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass, + .Protocol = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .HID_KeyboardHID = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID}, + + .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1), + .CountryCode = 0x00, + .TotalReportDescriptors = 1, + .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report, + .HIDReportLength = sizeof(KeyboardReport) + }, + + .HID_ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = KEYBOARD_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Magnetic Card Reader"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case HID_DTYPE_HID: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID; + Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case HID_DTYPE_Report: + Address = &KeyboardReport; + Size = sizeof(KeyboardReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..149fe75314 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */ + + // Keyboard HID Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */ + USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */ + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */ + #define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE 8 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..802d040c5b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits + * to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce + * overall RAM usage. + */ + +#include "CircularBitBuffer.h" + +/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */ +void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) +{ + /* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */ + Buffer->Elements = 0; + + /* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */ + Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0); +} + +/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */ +void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, + const bool Bit) +{ + /* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */ + if (Bit) + *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask; + + /* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */ + Buffer->Elements++; + + /* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */ + if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7)) + { + /* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */ + if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1]) + Buffer->In.CurrentByte++; + else + Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + + /* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */ + Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + } + else + { + /* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */ + Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1; + } +} + +/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */ +bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) +{ + /* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */ + bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0); + + /* Clear the buffer bit */ + *Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask; + + /* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */ + Buffer->Elements--; + + /* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */ + if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7)) + { + /* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */ + if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1]) + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++; + else + Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data; + + /* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */ + Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0); + } + else + { + /* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */ + Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1; + } + + /* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */ + return Bit; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0adbe0c89e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_ +#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \ + defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + /** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eighth of this value per buffer. */ + #define MAX_BITS 8192 + #else + #define MAX_BITS 1024 + #endif + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */ + uint8_t ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */ + } BitBufferPointer_t; + + /** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */ + uint16_t Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */ + + BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */ + BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */ + } BitBuffer_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + /** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Bit buffer to initialize + */ + void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Bit buffer to store a bit into + * \param[in] Bit Bit to store into the buffer + */ + void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer, + const bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + + /** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer. + * + * \param[in,out] Buffer Bit buffer to retrieve a bit from + * + * \return Next bit from the buffer + */ + bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d9cc8cbc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros + prior to including the file: + + MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC1) + MAG_T1_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (i.e.. PORTC2) + MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC3) + MAG_T2_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (i.e.. PORTC0) + MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC5) + MAG_T3_DATA_PIN Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (i.e.. PORTC6) + MAG_CLS_PIN Pin connected to card loaded wire (i.e.. PORTC4) + MAG_PIN PIN macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PINC) + MAG_DDR DDR macro for the reader's port (i.e.. DDRC) + MAG_PORT PORT macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PORTC) + + The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is + connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to + pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded + wire is connected to pin 4 on port C. + + If the mag-stripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks, + then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a + pin that is unused. For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on + port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are + not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or + temperature sensor). + + Connecting wires to pins on different ports (i.e.. a data wire to pin 0 + on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently + unsupported. All pins specified above must be on the same port. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K). + */ + +#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_ +#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Private Interface - For use in library only: */ + /* Macros: */ + /** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */ + #define MAG_MASK (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \ + MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \ + MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \ + MAG_CARDPRESENT) + + /* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */ + /* Inline Functions: */ + /** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader + * device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before + * trying to read any of the card reader's status lines. + */ + static inline void Magstripe_Init(void) + { + MAG_DDR &= ~MAG_MASK; + MAG_PORT |= MAG_MASK; + }; + + /** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs. + * + * \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low + */ + static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT; + static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) + { + /* Mag-stripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */ + return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK); + } + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9bb6ff01a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MagStripe reader program. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Magstripe.h" + +/** Bit buffers to hold the read bits for each of the three magnetic card tracks before they are transmitted + * to the host as keyboard presses. + */ +static BitBuffer_t TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]; + +/** Pointer to the current track buffer being sent to the host. */ +static BitBuffer_t* CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]; + +/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */ +static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)]; + +/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard, + .ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Address = KEYBOARD_EPADDR, + .Size = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .PrevReportINBuffer = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer, + .PrevReportINBufferSize = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer), + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + for (uint8_t Buffer = 0; Buffer < TOTAL_TRACKS; Buffer++) + BitBuffer_Init(&TrackDataBuffers[Buffer]); + + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + if (Magstripe_GetStatus() & MAG_CARDPRESENT) + ReadMagstripeData(); + + HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Magstripe_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Determines if a card has been inserted, and if so reads in each track's contents into the bit buffers + * until they are read out to the host as a series of keyboard presses. + */ +void ReadMagstripeData(void) +{ + /* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the separate card tracks */ + const struct + { + uint8_t ClockMask; + uint8_t DataMask; + } TrackInfo[] = {{MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA}, + {MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA}, + {MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}}; + + uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0; + uint8_t Magstripe_LCL = Magstripe_GetStatus(); + + while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT) + { + for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < TOTAL_TRACKS; Track++) + { + bool DataPinLevel = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0); + bool ClockPinLevel = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0); + bool ClockLevelChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0); + + /* Sample data on rising clock edges from the card reader */ + if (ClockPinLevel && ClockLevelChanged) + BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&TrackDataBuffers[Track], DataPinLevel); + } + + Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL; + Magstripe_LCL = Magstripe_GetStatus(); + } + + CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[0]; +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface); + + USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) +{ + HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface); +} + +/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced + * \param[in,out] ReportID Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID + * \param[in] ReportType Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[out] ReportData Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored + * \param[out] ReportSize Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent) + * + * \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent + */ +bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize) +{ + USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData; + + static bool IsKeyReleaseReport; + + /* Key reports must be interleaved with key release reports, or repeated keys will be ignored */ + IsKeyReleaseReport = !IsKeyReleaseReport; + + if ((IsKeyReleaseReport) || (CurrentTrackBuffer == &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS])) + { + /* No more data to send, or key release report between key presses */ + KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_NONE; + } + else if (!(CurrentTrackBuffer->Elements)) + { + /* End of current track, send an enter press and change to the next track's buffer */ + KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER; + CurrentTrackBuffer++; + } + else + { + /* Still data in the current track; convert next bit to a 1 or 0 keypress */ + KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(CurrentTrackBuffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0; + } + + *ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t); + return false; +} + +/** HID Class driver callback function for the processing of a received HID report from the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID interface structure for the HID interface being referenced + * \param[in] ReportID Report ID of the received report from the host + * \param[in] ReportType The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[in] ReportData Pointer to the report buffer where the received report is stored + * \param[in] ReportSize Size in bytes of the report received from the host + */ +void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize) +{ + // Ignore keyboard LED reports from the host, but still need to declare the callback routine +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..342cd8ffe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Magstripe.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_ +#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Lib/MagstripeHW.h" + #include "Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Total number of tracks which can be read from the card, between 1 and 3. */ + #define TOTAL_TRACKS 3 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that no is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_NONE 0 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_1 30 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_0 39 + + /** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */ + #define KEY_ENTER 40 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void ReadMagstripeData(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void); + + bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize); + void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a11dfaf804 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li AT90USB1287 + * \li AT90USB1286 + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Keyboard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card + * reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed + * to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at <a>http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/</a>. + * + * See <a>http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/</a> for the USB reader hardware project website, + * including construction and support details. + * + * To use, connect your magnetic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted + * from the project makefile): + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Signal:</b></th> + * <th><b>AVR Port:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 1 Data</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 1 Clock</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 2 Data</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 2 Clock</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 3 Data</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Track 3 Clock</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Card Detect</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard project demonstration application, written by Denver Gingerich. + * + * This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected a TTL magnetic stripe reader + * to the connected computer. The raw bitstream obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through + * the keyboard driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the project will send a return key. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAX_BITS</td> + * <td>CircularBitBuffer.h</td> + * <td>Gives the maximum number of bits per track which can be buffered by the device for later transmission to a host.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T1_CLOCK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 1 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T1_DATA</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 1 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T2_CLOCK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 2 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T2_DATA</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 2 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T3_CLOCK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 3 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_T3_DATA</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 3 output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_CARDPRESENT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's card detection output.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_PIN</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>PIN register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_PORT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>PORT register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAG_DDR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>DDR register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9fc5311e26 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader" id="lufa.projects.magstripe.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.magstripe"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.magstripe" caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Magnetic strip card reader project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="HID Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Magstripe.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Magstripe.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Magstripe.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/MagstripeHW.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..23554c194b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3fc1bf526c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Magstripe/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = NONE +F_CPU = 16000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = Magstripe +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..75713f94d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3213e76fe2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MediaControlReport[] = +{ + HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x0C), /* Consumer Page */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Consumer Controls */ + HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB0), /* Play */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB1), /* Pause */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB3), /* Fast Forward */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB4), /* Rewind */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB5), /* Next Track */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB6), /* Previous Track */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB7), /* Stop */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xCD), /* Play/Pause (toggle) */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE2), /* Mute */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE9), /* Volume Up */ + HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xEA), /* Volume Down */ + HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01), + HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x0B), + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0), + HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1), + HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE), + HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05), + HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT), + HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0), +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x206A, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .HID_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_HID, + .AlternateSetting = 0x00, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass, + .SubClass = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass, + .Protocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .HID_MediaControlHID = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID}, + + .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1), + .CountryCode = 0x00, + .TotalReportDescriptors = 1, + .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report, + .HIDReportLength = sizeof(MediaControlReport) + }, + + .HID_ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Media Controller"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case HID_DTYPE_HID: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MediaControlHID; + Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case HID_DTYPE_Report: + Address = &MediaControlReport; + Size = sizeof(MediaControlReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e0e29dc106 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Media Controller HID Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface; + USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_MediaControlHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_HID = 0, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Size in bytes of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE 8 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5b3121a50b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MediaControl project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "MediaController.h" + +/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Media Control HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */ +static uint8_t PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t)]; + +/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t MediaControl_HID_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_HID, + .ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Address = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR, + .Size = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .PrevReportINBuffer = PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer, + .PrevReportINBufferSize = sizeof(PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer), + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + HID_Device_USBTask(&MediaControl_HID_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware() +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Joystick_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + Buttons_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&MediaControl_HID_Interface); + + USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&MediaControl_HID_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void) +{ + HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&MediaControl_HID_Interface); +} + +/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced + * \param[in,out] ReportID Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID + * \param[in] ReportType Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[out] ReportData Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored + * \param[out] ReportSize Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent) + * + * \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent + */ +bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize) +{ + USB_MediaReport_Data_t* MediaReport = (USB_MediaReport_Data_t*)ReportData; + + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus(); + + /* Update the Media Control report with the user button presses */ + MediaReport->Mute = ((ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? true : false); + MediaReport->PlayPause = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) ? true : false); + MediaReport->VolumeUp = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) ? true : false); + MediaReport->VolumeDown = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) ? true : false); + MediaReport->PreviousTrack = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) ? true : false); + MediaReport->NextTrack = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) ? true : false); + + *ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t); + return false; +} + +/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced + * \param[in] ReportID Report ID of the received report from the host + * \param[in] ReportType The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[in] ReportData Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored + * \param[in] ReportSize Size in bytes of the received HID report + */ +void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize) +{ + // Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0e8ed5d6f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MediaControl.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MEDIACONTROL_H_ +#define _MEDIACONTROL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + #include <string.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a Media Control HID report. This report contains the bits to match the usages defined + * in the HID report of the device. When set to a true value, the relevant media controls on the host will + * be triggered. + */ + typedef struct + { + unsigned Play : 1; + unsigned Pause : 1; + unsigned FForward : 1; + unsigned Rewind : 1; + unsigned NextTrack : 1; + unsigned PreviousTrack : 1; + unsigned Stop : 1; + unsigned PlayPause : 1; + unsigned Mute : 1; + unsigned VolumeUp : 1; + unsigned VolumeDown : 1; + unsigned RESERVED : 5; + } ATTR_PACKED USB_MediaReport_Data_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void); + + bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize); + void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dece2132a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Media Controller Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Specification \n + * USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode \n + * Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Media Controller project. This project implements a basic Media Control device, to signal the host to play, pause, toggle playback, + * mute and/or adjust the host volume, in addition to other such media commands. This project may be extended to create a dedicated + * media playback control device, for home media centers or other equipment. By default, some of the most commonly used playback controls + * are controlled by the board joystick and LEDs, however this may be altered as desired. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2d476da51a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Media Controller" id="lufa.projects.media_control.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.media_control"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.media_control" caption="Media Controller">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Magnetic strip card reader project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="HID Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MediaController.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="MediaController.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="MediaController.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7206cf6495 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Media Controller Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4df317e89f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MediaController/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = MediaController +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..da8a8cc0d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) +// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY + #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL +// #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE {Insert Value Here} +// #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d6a7b8726e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations + * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures + * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + +/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This + * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate + * with compatible devices. + * + * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint. + * + * \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum. + */ +uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void) +{ + uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512]; + void* CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData; + uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem; + + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface = NULL; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* DataINEndpoint = NULL; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* DataOUTEndpoint = NULL; + + /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */ + switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData))) + { + case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful: + break; + case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData: + return InvalidConfigDataReturned; + case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow: + return DescriptorTooLarge; + default: + return ControlError; + } + + while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint)) + { + /* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */ + if (!(HIDInterface) || + USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, + DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor + * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */ + if (DataINEndpoint) + break; + + /* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */ + if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation, + DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found) + { + /* Descriptor not found, error out */ + return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound; + } + + /* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */ + HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t); + + /* Clear any found endpoints */ + DataOUTEndpoint = NULL; + + /* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */ + continue; + } + + /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */ + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t); + + /* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */ + if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN) + DataINEndpoint = EndpointData; + else + DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData; + } + + /* Configure the HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1); + Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS); + + /* Check if the HID interface contained an optional OUT data endpoint */ + if (DataOUTEndpoint) + { + /* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1); + } + + /* Valid data found, return success */ + return SuccessfulConfigRead; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t); + + /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */ + if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface) + { + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t); + + /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */ + if (Interface->Class == HID_CLASS) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + } + + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; +} + +/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's + * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration + * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found. + * + * This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor, + * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint. + * + * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum + */ +uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor) +{ + USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t); + + /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */ + if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint) + { + /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found; + } + else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface) + { + /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail; + } + else + { + /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */ + return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..32e86ad7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c. + */ + +#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ +#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "MissileLauncher.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class. */ + #define HID_CLASS 0x03 + + /** Pipe address for the HID data IN pipe. */ + #define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Pipe address for the HID data OUT pipe. */ + #define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2) + + /* Enums: */ + /** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */ + enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t + { + SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */ + ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */ + DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */ + InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */ + NoCompatibleInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void); + + uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor); + uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..006543d86d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c @@ -0,0 +1,323 @@ +/* + USB Missile Launcher Demo + Copyright (C) Dave Fletcher, 2010. + fletch at fletchtronics dot net + + Based on research by Scott Weston at + http://code.google.com/p/pymissile + */ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2010 Dave Fletcher (fletch [at] fletchtronics [dot] net) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/* + * Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers, + * which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the + * launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC. + */ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the MissileLauncher application. This file contains the main tasks of + * the application and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration as well + * as the sending of commands to the attached launcher toy. + */ + +#include "MissileLauncher.h" + +/** Launcher first init command report data sequence */ +static const uint8_t CMD_INITA[8] = { 85, 83, 66, 67, 0, 0, 4, 0 }; + +/** Launcher second init command report data sequence */ +static const uint8_t CMD_INITB[8] = { 85, 83, 66, 67, 0, 64, 2, 0 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to stop all movement */ +static const uint8_t CMD_STOP[8] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left */ +static const uint8_t CMD_LEFT[8] = { 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right */ +static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHT[8] = { 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move up */ +static const uint8_t CMD_UP[8] = { 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move down */ +static const uint8_t CMD_DOWN[8] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and up */ +static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTUP[8] = { 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and up */ +static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTUP[8] = { 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and down */ +static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTDOWN[8] = { 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and down */ +static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTDOWN[8] = { 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0, 8, 8 }; + +/** Launcher command report data sequence to fire a missile */ +static const uint8_t CMD_FIRE[8] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 8, 8 }; + +/** Last command sent to the launcher, to determine what new command (if any) must be sent */ +static const uint8_t* CmdState; + +/** Buffer to hold a command to send to the launcher */ +static uint8_t CmdBuffer[LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE]; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + CmdState = CMD_STOP; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + Read_Joystick_Status(); + DiscardNextReport(); + + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); + Joystick_Init(); + Buttons_Init(); +} + +/** Reads the joystick and button status, sending commands to the launcher as needed. */ +void Read_Joystick_Status(void) +{ + uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus(); + uint8_t Buttons_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus(); + + if (Buttons_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) + Send_Command(CMD_FIRE); + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP) + Send_Command(CMD_UP); + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN) + Send_Command(CMD_DOWN); + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT) + Send_Command(CMD_LEFT); + else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) + Send_Command(CMD_RIGHT); + else if (CmdState != CMD_STOP) + Send_Command(CMD_STOP); +} + +/** Lower level send routine, copies report into a larger buffer and sends. + * + * \param[in] Report Report data to send. + * \param[in] ReportSize Report length in bytes. + */ +void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report, + const uint16_t ReportSize) +{ + memcpy(CmdBuffer, Report, 8); + WriteNextReport(CmdBuffer, ReportSize); +} + +/** Sends one of the \c CMD_* command constants to the attached device. + * + * \param[in] Command One of the command constants. + */ +void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command) +{ + if ((CmdState == CMD_STOP && Command != CMD_STOP) || + (CmdState != CMD_STOP && Command == CMD_STOP)) + { + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED4); + + Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITA, 8); + Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITB, 8); + Send_Command_Report(Command, LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE); + } + + CmdState = Command; +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */ + if (ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() != SuccessfulConfigRead) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + /* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */ + if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_Disable(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Reads in and discards the next report from the attached device. */ +void DiscardNextReport(void) +{ + if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) + return; + + /* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE); + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Check to see if a packet has been received */ + if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived())) + { + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */ + Pipe_ClearIN(); + + /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); +} + +/** Writes a report to the attached device. + * + * \param[in] ReportOUTData Buffer containing the report to send to the device + * \param[in] ReportLength Length of the report to send + */ +void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, + const uint16_t ReportLength) +{ + if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured) + return; + + /* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE); + + /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the + * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */ + if (Pipe_IsConfigured()) + { + Pipe_Unfreeze(); + + /* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */ + if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady())) + { + /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + + return; + } + + /* Write out HID report data */ + Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength, NULL); + + /* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */ + Pipe_ClearOUT(); + + /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */ + Pipe_Freeze(); + } + else + { + /* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */ + USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t) + { + .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE), + .bRequest = HID_REQ_SetReport, + .wValue = 0x02, + .wIndex = 0x01, + .wLength = ReportLength, + }; + + /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */ + Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE); + + /* Send the request to the device */ + USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData); + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f06d6f8c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for MissileLauncher.c. + */ + +#ifndef _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_ +#define _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + #include "ConfigDescriptor.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** Size of the Launcher report command buffer. */ + #define LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE 64 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void Read_Joystick_Status(void); + void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report, + const uint16_t ReportSize); + void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command); + + void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + + void DiscardNextReport(void); + void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData, + const uint16_t ReportLength); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a0ddd15cd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage David Fletcher's Missile Launcher + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Host</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers, + * which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the + * launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1b8ac1bd56 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Missile Launcher" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.missile_launcher"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher" caption="Missile Launcher">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Missile launcher project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Host"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MissileLauncher.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="MissileLauncher.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="MissileLauncher.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a31d4536a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Dave Fletcher's Missile Launcher Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..882f338d89 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = MissileLauncher +SRC = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ffe5d9c11 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 + #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..635e2ca7d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x04B4, + .ProductID = 0xFD11, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = STRING_ID_Serial, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 1, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(500) + }, + + .RelayBoardInterface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 0, + + .Class = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass, + .SubClass = 0x00, + .Protocol = 0x00, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_LanguageString = +{ + .Header = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String}, + + .UnicodeString = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG} +}; + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"SISPM"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"RelayBoard"); + +/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a + * series of uppercase hexadecimal digits. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"00001"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &RelayBoard_LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &RelayBoard_ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &RelayBoard_ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Serial: + Address = &RelayBoard_SerialString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_SerialString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f763196a0d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Relay Board Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t RelayBoardInterface; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard = 0, /**< Relay board interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + STRING_ID_Serial = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b69ee5710a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the RelayBoard program. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "RelayBoard.h" + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + USB_USBTask(); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the project's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Initialize Relays */ + DDRC |= ALL_RELAYS; + PORTC &= ~ALL_RELAYS; +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + const uint8_t SerialNumber[5] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 }; + uint8_t ControlData[2] = { 0, 0 }; + + switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest) + { + case 0x09: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData)); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue) + { + case 0x303: + if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY1; else PORTC |= RELAY1; + break; + case 0x306: + if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY2; else PORTC |= RELAY2; + break; + case 0x309: + if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY3; else PORTC |= RELAY3; + break; + case 0x30c: + if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY4; else PORTC |= RELAY4; + break; + } + } + + break; + case 0x01: + if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE)) + { + LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1); + + Endpoint_ClearSETUP(); + + switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue) + { + case 0x301: + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SerialNumber, sizeof(SerialNumber)); + break; + case 0x303: + ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY1) ? 2 : 3; + break; + case 0x306: + ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY2) ? 2 : 3; + break; + case 0x309: + ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY3) ? 2 : 3; + break; + case 0x30c: + ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY4) ? 2 : 3; + break; + } + + if (ControlData[1]) + Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData)); + + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + } + + break; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..31ea732982 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com) + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for RelayBoard.c. + */ + +#ifndef _RELAYBOARD_H_ +#define _RELAYBOARD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #define RELAY1 (1 << 7) + #define RELAY2 (1 << 6) + #define RELAY3 (1 << 5) + #define RELAY4 (1 << 4) + #define ALL_RELAYS (RELAY1 | RELAY2 | RELAY3 | RELAY4) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4b190dfe32 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage OB's Quad-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++ + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li AT90USB1286 + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>None</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>None</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USB Standards</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a Teensy2++ AVR-based miniboard to control four relays, using the + * same protocol used by the commercially available Silver Shield PM power outlets + * ( http://sourceforge.net/projects/sispmctl ) sold for some time. Because this + * project mimics the original device, it can be controlled using the "sismpctl" + * package included in many Linux distributions - including router-orientated + * versions such as OpenWRT - to control the board's relays. + * + * Relays 1 to 4 are respectively wired to pins C4, C5, C6 and C7 of the Teensy++ V2, + * which are the PORTC bits 4 to 7 of the AT90USB1286. The relays MUST be wired through + * a transistor, and a diode must be added in antiparallel on the relay's coil pins to + * protect the transistor from back EMF generated from the relay when the coil is turned off. + * The transistor base pin is wired to the Teensy data port through a 10K resistor. A + * LED may be also be added as a relay status indicator on each channel. + * + * The Relay coil will be driven by the transistor, but the power will come from + * the 5V from the PC's USB port: Be careful in choosing the relay to avoid overloading + * the PC, as the maximum current used MUST remains under ~450mA @ 5V. + * + * The author's tested relays are 2 Finder 32.21.7.005.2000, coil il 125ohm, which can + * handle 5A @ 250VAC. Be careful to use proper isolation if high voltages are manipulated. + * The author used Hotglue to isolate all parts of the PCB in contact with high voltage. + * + * See <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a> for the Teensy2++ website. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Signal:</b></td> + * <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Relay 1</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Relay 2</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Relay 3</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Relay 4</td> + * <td>PORTC, Pin 7</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>Teensy2++ Yellow Led</td> + * <td>PORTD, pin 6</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e3a2ef4b20 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Relay Board Controller" id="lufa.projects.relay_board.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.relay_board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.relay_board" caption="Relay Board Controller">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Relay Board Controller project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RelayBoard.txt"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="RelayBoard.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="RelayBoard.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..12224900eb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "OB's Dual-Relay Outlet Control Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9553a85859 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = RelayBoard +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6b113c8276 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..374ee0a16b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + +/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as + * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL. + * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated + * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices + * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value + * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and + * port location). + */ +#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR) + #warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor. +#endif + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x204B, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Simon Foster"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"USB-HD44780 Adapter"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..360aa421ba --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Command Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/LUFA SerialToLCD.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/LUFA SerialToLCD.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4799bd1a7e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/LUFA SerialToLCD.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA VirtualSerial.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..61a9b7ec6d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +#include "HD44780.h" + +static void HD44780_WriteNibble(const uint8_t nib) +{ + /* Read PORTD and clear the ENABLE and PD0..3 bits + then OR in the data */ + + PORTD = (PORTD & ~(ENABLE | LO4_MASK)) | (nib & LO4_MASK); + + /* Enforce address setup time (tAS) 60ns + 60 @ 16MHz = <1 + Let's us a few NOPs for good measure */ + asm volatile("nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + :: ); + + /* Take enable high and enforce Enable High time (tEH=450ns) + 450ns @ 16MHz = 7.2 => 7 NOPs */ + + PORTD |= ENABLE; + + asm volatile("nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + :: ); + + /* Take enable low and enforce Enable Low time (tEL=500ns) + 500ns @ 16MHz = 8.0 => 7 NOPs */ + PORTD &= ~ENABLE; + + asm volatile("nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + "nop\n\t" + :: ); +} + +static void HD44780_WriteByte(const uint8_t c) +{ + HD44780_WriteNibble(HI4(c)); + HD44780_WriteNibble(LO4(c)); +} + +static void HD44780_PowerUp4Bit(void) +{ + /* Wait for more than 40 ms after VCC rises to 2.7 V */ + _delay_ms(40); + HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03); // FN_SET 8-bit + + /* Wait for more than 4.1 ms */ + _delay_ms(5); + HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03); // FN_SET 8-bit + + /* Wait for more than 100 µs */ + _delay_us(100); + HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03); // FN_SET 8-bit + + /* From now on we must allow 40us for each command */ + _delay_us(50); + HD44780_WriteNibble(0x02); // FN_SET 4-bit + + /* The LCD is now in 4-bit mode so we can continue + using the 4-bit API */ + _delay_us(50); +} + +void HD44780_Initialize(void) +{ + PORTD &= ~ALL_BITS; + DDRD |= ALL_BITS; + HD44780_PowerUp4Bit(); +} + +void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c) +{ + PORTD &= ~RS; + HD44780_WriteByte(c); + _delay_us(50); +} + +void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c) +{ + PORTD |= RS; + HD44780_WriteByte(c); + PORTD &= ~RS; + _delay_us(50); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0128037851 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HD44780.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HD44780_H_ +#define _HD44780_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #define RS (1 << 4) /* PD4 */ + #define ENABLE (1 << 7) /* PD7 */ + + #define HI4_MASK 0xF0 + #define LO4_MASK 0x0F /* PD0-PD3 */ + + #define ALL_BITS (RS | ENABLE | LO4_MASK) + + #define HI4(c) ((c & HI4_MASK) >> 4) + #define LO4(c) ((c & LO4_MASK) >> 0) + + #define CMD_DISPLAY_ON 0x0C + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void HD44780_Initialize(void); + void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c); + void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c); + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..85abbdb50d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the SerialToLCD program. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "SerialToLCD.h" + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the LCD */ +static RingBuffer_t FromHost_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref FromHost_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t FromHost_Buffer_Data[128]; + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&FromHost_Buffer, FromHost_Buffer_Data, sizeof(FromHost_Buffer_Data)); + + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + /* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */ + if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&FromHost_Buffer))) + { + int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + /* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the USART transmit buffer */ + if (!(ReceivedByte < 0)) + RingBuffer_Insert(&FromHost_Buffer, ReceivedByte); + } + + while (RingBuffer_GetCount(&FromHost_Buffer) > 0) + { + static uint8_t EscapePending = 0; + int16_t HD44780Byte = RingBuffer_Remove(&FromHost_Buffer); + + if (HD44780Byte == COMMAND_ESCAPE) + { + if (EscapePending) + { + HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte); + EscapePending = 0; + } + else + { + /* Next received character is the command byte */ + EscapePending = 1; + } + } + else + { + if (EscapePending) + { + HD44780_WriteCommand(HD44780Byte); + EscapePending = 0; + } + else + { + HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte); + } + } + } + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the application's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + USB_Init(); + + /* Power up the HD44780 Interface */ + HD44780_Initialize(); + HD44780_WriteCommand(CMD_DISPLAY_ON); + + /* Start the flush timer so that overflows occur rapidly to push received bytes to the USB interface */ + TCCR0B = (1 << CS02); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..03d28799bb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + Copyright 2012 Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SerialToLCD.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SERIALTOLCD_H_ +#define _SERIALTOLCD_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Lib/HD44780.h" + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + #define COMMAND_ESCAPE 0x1B + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a2f3396489 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li AT90USB162 + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Firmware for a USB Virtual Serial to HD44780 LCD controller project, by Simon Foster. This + * project connects a standard HD7780 compatible LCD controller to a PC via a virtual serial + * link, so that data supplied by the host can be written to the display. This project is + * designed to use the Minimum USB AVR board, however it can be modified to suit other hardware + * if desired. + * + * LCD Datasheet: http://www.sparkfun.com/datasheets/LCD/HD44780.pdf \n + * More Information: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HD44780_Character_LCD \n + * + * Below are the connections between the AVR Minimus board and LCD. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>AVR Pin:</b></td> + * <td><b>HD44780 LCD Pin:</b></td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>VCC</td> + * <td>VCC</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>GND</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD0</td> + * <td>DB4</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD1</td> + * <td>DB5</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD2</td> + * <td>DB6</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD3</td> + * <td>DB7</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD4</td> + * <td>/RS</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>GND</td> + * <td>/RW</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>PD7</td> + * <td>/E</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f298727949 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="USB Serial to LCD Display" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd" caption="USB Serial to LCD Display">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ USB Serial to LCD Controller project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="CDC Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="SerialToLCD.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA SerialToLCD.inf"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="SerialToLCD.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="SerialToLCD.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/HD44780.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/HD44780.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..64b4d5a83a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..76e7350e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb162 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = MINIMUS +F_CPU = 16000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = SerialToLCD +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/HD44780.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fcfcb2590e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define DUMMY_RTC + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f7d7e62708 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c07a588782 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the + * USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This + * descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding) + * the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for + * more details on HID report descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] = +{ + /* Use the HID class driver's standard Vendor HID report. + * Vendor Usage Page: 1 + * Vendor Collection Usage: 1 + * Vendor Report IN Usage: 2 + * Vendor Report OUT Usage: 3 + * Vendor Report Size: GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE + */ + HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE) +}; + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2063, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .MS_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass, + .SubClass = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass, + .Protocol = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MS_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .MS_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .HID_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_HID, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = HID_CSCP_HIDClass, + .SubClass = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass, + .Protocol = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .HID_GenericHID = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID}, + + .HIDSpec = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1), + .CountryCode = 0x00, + .TotalReportDescriptors = 1, + .HIDReportType = HID_DTYPE_Report, + .HIDReportLength = sizeof(GenericReport) + }, + + .HID_ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = GENERIC_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Temperature Datalogger"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + case HID_DTYPE_HID: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID; + Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t); + break; + case HID_DTYPE_Report: + Address = &GenericReport; + Size = sizeof(GenericReport); + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ffbd65d465 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "TempDataLogger.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */ + #define GENERIC_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */ + #define GENERIC_EPSIZE 16 + + /** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */ + #define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE sizeof(Device_Report_t) + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // Mass Storage Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MS_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataOutEndpoint; + + // Settings Management Generic HID Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t HID_Interface; + USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t HID_GenericHID; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t HID_ReportINEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_HID = 1, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b1111ce39b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c @@ -0,0 +1,534 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of + * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored + * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such + * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C +#include "DataflashManager.h" + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes + * them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the current endpoint bank */ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the + * Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the + * Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + * \param[in] BufferPtr Pointer to the data source RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + const uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++)); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read + * the files stored on the Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + * \param[out] BufferPtr Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */ +void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void) +{ + /* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + + /* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */ + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + #endif + + /* Deselect current Dataflash chip */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise + */ +bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnByte; + + /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + #endif + + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f0feeb67bc --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DataflashManager.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ +#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + + #include "../TempDataLogger.h" + #include "../Descriptors.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16) + #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) + + /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying + * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not + * change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void); + bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..80d8843d13 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 + + +FILES + + ffconf.h Configuration file for FatFs module. + ff.h Common include file for FatFs and application module. + ff.c FatFs module. + diskio.h Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module. + diskio.c An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs. + integer.h Integer type definitions for FatFs. + option Optional external functions. + + Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs + module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific + storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written + to control your storage device. + + + +AGREEMENTS + + FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to + small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education, + research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems. + + Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. + + * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. + * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for + personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. + * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. + + + +REVISION HISTORY + + Feb 26, 2006 R0.00 Prototype + + Apr 29, 2006 R0.01 First release. + + Jun 01, 2006 R0.02 Added FAT12. + Removed unbuffered mode. + Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition. + + Jun 10, 2006 R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM. + + Sep 22, 2006 R0.03 Added f_rename. + Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE. + + Dec 11, 2006 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast. + Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32. + + Feb 04, 2007 R0.04 Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs) + Changed some APIs for multiple drive system. + Added f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs) + + Apr 01, 2007 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs) + Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek. + Added minimization level 3. + Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an + existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs) + + May 05, 2007 R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option. + Added FSInfo support. + Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs) + Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME. + Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object. + + Aug 25, 2007 R0.05 Changed arguments of f_read, f_write. + Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs) + Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs) + + Feb 03, 2008 R0.05a Added f_truncate(). + Added f_utime(). + Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination. + Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated. + Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write. + + Apr 01, 2008 R0.06 Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs) + Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets(). + Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster. + + Apr 01, 2009, R0.07 Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option. + Added long file name support. + Added multiple code page support. + Added re-entrancy for multitask operation. + Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs(). + Added rewind option to f_readdir(). + Changed result code of critical errors. + Renamed string functions to avoid name collision. + + Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg. + Added multiple sector size support. + + Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error. + Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek(). + Added relative path feature. + Added f_chdir(). + Added f_chdrive(). + Added proper case conversion for extended characters. + + Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h. + Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE. + Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH. + Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary. + Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg. + + May 15, 2010, R0.08 Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN) + Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE) + Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK) + Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR. + Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg. + String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg. + + Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2) + Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE) + Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss. + Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'. + Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume. + + Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write(). + f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP. + Extended format syntax of f_printf function. + Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names. + + Sep 06,'11 R0.09 f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature. + Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2) + + Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16. + Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash. + Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK. diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8cc8cd4049 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs (C)ChaN, 2007 */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */ +/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#include "diskio.h" + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Initialize a Drive */ + +DSTATUS disk_initialize ( + BYTE drv /* Physical drive number (0..) */ +) +{ + return FR_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Return Disk Status */ + +DSTATUS disk_status ( + BYTE drv /* Physical drive number (0..) */ +) +{ + return FR_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read Sector(s) */ + +DRESULT disk_read ( + BYTE drv, /* Physical drive number (0..) */ + BYTE *buff, /* Data buffer to store read data */ + DWORD sector, /* Sector address (LBA) */ + BYTE count /* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */ +) +{ + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff); + return RES_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Write Sector(s) */ + +#if _READONLY == 0 +DRESULT disk_write ( + BYTE drv, /* Physical drive number (0..) */ + const BYTE *buff, /* Data to be written */ + DWORD sector, /* Sector address (LBA) */ + BYTE count /* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */ +) +{ + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff); + return RES_OK; +} +#endif /* _READONLY */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Miscellaneous Functions */ + +DRESULT disk_ioctl ( + BYTE drv, /* Physical drive number (0..) */ + BYTE ctrl, /* Control code */ + void *buff /* Buffer to send/receive control data */ +) +{ + if (ctrl == CTRL_SYNC) + return RES_OK; + else + return RES_PARERR; +} + + +DWORD get_fattime (void) +{ + TimeDate_t CurrTimeDate; + + RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrTimeDate); + + + return ((DWORD)(20 + CurrTimeDate.Year) << 25) | + ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Month << 21) | + ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Day << 16) | + ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Hour << 11) | + ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Minute << 5) | + (((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Second >> 1) << 0); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d3c3149a59 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +/*----------------------------------------------------------------------- +/ Low level disk interface module include file +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED +#define _DISKIO_DEFINED + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +#include "integer.h" + +#include "../DataflashManager.h" + + +/* Status of Disk Functions */ +typedef BYTE DSTATUS; + +/* Results of Disk Functions */ +typedef enum { + RES_OK = 0, /* 0: Successful */ + RES_ERROR, /* 1: R/W Error */ + RES_WRPRT, /* 2: Write Protected */ + RES_NOTRDY, /* 3: Not Ready */ + RES_PARERR /* 4: Invalid Parameter */ +} DRESULT; + + +/*---------------------------------------*/ +/* Prototypes for disk control functions */ + +DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE); +DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE); +DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE); +#if _READONLY == 0 +DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE); +#endif +DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*); + + +/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */ + +#define STA_NOINIT 0x01 /* Drive not initialized */ +#define STA_NODISK 0x02 /* No medium in the drive */ +#define STA_PROTECT 0x04 /* Write protected */ + +/* Generic command */ +#define CTRL_SYNC 0 /* Mandatory for write functions */ + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..059b5885ae --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c @@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@ +/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems. +/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial +/ developments under license policy of following terms. +/ +/ Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. +/ +/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. +/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for +/ personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. +/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. +/ +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00 Prototype. +/ +/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01 First stable version. +/ +/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02 Added FAT12 support. +/ Removed unbuffered mode. +/ Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition. +/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM). +/ +/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03 Added f_rename(). +/ Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE. +/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast. +/ Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32. +/ +/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04 Supported multiple drive system. +/ Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system. +/ Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount(). +/ Added f_mkfs(). +/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive. +/ Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek(). +/ Added minimization level 3. +/ Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs(). +/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG. +/ Added FSInfo support. +/ Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME. +/ Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object. +/ +/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05 Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs(). +/ Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. +/ Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. +/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime(). +/ Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination. +/ Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated. +/ Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write. +/ +/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06 Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets(). +/ Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster. +/ +/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07 Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY) +/ Added long file name feature. +/ Added multiple code page feature. +/ Added re-entrancy for multitask operation. +/ Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs(). +/ Added rewind option to f_readdir(). +/ Changed result code of critical errors. +/ Renamed string functions to avoid name collision. +/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg. +/ Added multiple sector size feature. +/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error. +/ Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek(). +/ Added relative path feature. +/ Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive(). +/ Added proper case conversion to extended char. +/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h. +/ Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH. +/ Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary. +/ Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE. +/ Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg. +/ +/ May 15,'10 R0.08 Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3) +/ Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE) +/ Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK) +/ Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR. +/ Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg. +/ String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg. +/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2) +/ Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE) +/ Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss. +/ Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'. +/ Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume. +/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write(). +/ f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP. +/ Extended format syntax of f_printf function. +/ Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name. +/ +/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09 f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature. +/ Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2) +/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume. +/ Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash. +/ Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK. +/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#include "ff.h" /* FatFs configurations and declarations */ +#include "diskio.h" /* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */ + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Module Private Definitions + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _FATFS != 4004 /* Revision ID */ +#error Wrong include file (ff.h). +#endif + + +/* Definitions on sector size */ +#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096 +#error Wrong sector size. +#endif +#if _MAX_SS != 512 +#define SS(fs) ((fs)->ssize) /* Variable sector size */ +#else +#define SS(fs) 512U /* Fixed sector size */ +#endif + + +/* Reentrancy related */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT +#if _USE_LFN == 1 +#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration. +#endif +#define ENTER_FF(fs) { if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; } +#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res) { unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; } +#else +#define ENTER_FF(fs) +#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res) return res +#endif + +#define ABORT(fs, res) { fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); } + + +/* File access control feature */ +#if _FS_LOCK +#if _FS_READONLY +#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg. +#endif +typedef struct { + FATFS *fs; /* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */ + DWORD clu; /* File ID 2, directory */ + WORD idx; /* File ID 3, directory index */ + WORD ctr; /* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */ +} FILESEM; +#endif + + + +/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */ + +#if _CODE_PAGE == 932 /* Japanese Shift-JIS */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 /* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */ +#define _DF1E 0x9F /* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */ +#define _DF2S 0xE0 /* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */ +#define _DF2E 0xFC /* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */ +#define _DS1S 0x40 /* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */ +#define _DS1E 0x7E /* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */ +#define _DS2S 0x80 /* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */ +#define _DS2E 0xFC /* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */ + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936 /* Simplified Chinese GBK */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x40 +#define _DS1E 0x7E +#define _DS2S 0x80 +#define _DS2E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949 /* Korean */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x41 +#define _DS1E 0x5A +#define _DS2S 0x61 +#define _DS2E 0x7A +#define _DS3S 0x81 +#define _DS3E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950 /* Traditional Chinese Big5 */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x40 +#define _DS1E 0x7E +#define _DS2S 0xA1 +#define _DS2E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437 /* U.S. (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720 /* Arabic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737 /* Greek (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \ + 0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775 /* Baltic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850 /* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852 /* Latin 2 (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855 /* Cyrillic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \ + 0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857 /* Turkish (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858 /* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862 /* Hebrew (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866 /* Russian (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874 /* Thai (OEM, Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \ + 0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \ + 0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1 /* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */ +#if _USE_LFN +#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page. +#endif +#define _DF1S 0 + +#else +#error Unknown code page + +#endif + + +/* Character code support macros */ +#define IsUpper(c) (((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z')) +#define IsLower(c) (((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z')) +#define IsDigit(c) (((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9')) + +#if _DF1S /* Code page is DBCS */ + +#ifdef _DF2S /* Two 1st byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS1(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E)) +#else /* One 1st byte area */ +#define IsDBCS1(c) ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) +#endif + +#ifdef _DS3S /* Three 2nd byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS2(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E)) +#else /* Two 2nd byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS2(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E)) +#endif + +#else /* Code page is SBCS */ + +#define IsDBCS1(c) 0 +#define IsDBCS2(c) 0 + +#endif /* _DF1S */ + + +/* Name status flags */ +#define NS 11 /* Index of name status byte in fn[] */ +#define NS_LOSS 0x01 /* Out of 8.3 format */ +#define NS_LFN 0x02 /* Force to create LFN entry */ +#define NS_LAST 0x04 /* Last segment */ +#define NS_BODY 0x08 /* Lower case flag (body) */ +#define NS_EXT 0x10 /* Lower case flag (ext) */ +#define NS_DOT 0x20 /* Dot entry */ + + +/* FAT sub-type boundaries */ +/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */ +#define MIN_FAT16 4086 /* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */ +#define MIN_FAT32 65526 /* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */ + + +/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of +/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between +/ different platforms */ + +#define BS_jmpBoot 0 /* Jump instruction (3) */ +#define BS_OEMName 3 /* OEM name (8) */ +#define BPB_BytsPerSec 11 /* Sector size [byte] (2) */ +#define BPB_SecPerClus 13 /* Cluster size [sector] (1) */ +#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt 14 /* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_NumFATs 16 /* Number of FAT copies (1) */ +#define BPB_RootEntCnt 17 /* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */ +#define BPB_TotSec16 19 /* Volume size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_Media 21 /* Media descriptor (1) */ +#define BPB_FATSz16 22 /* FAT size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_SecPerTrk 24 /* Track size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_NumHeads 26 /* Number of heads (2) */ +#define BPB_HiddSec 28 /* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */ +#define BPB_TotSec32 32 /* Volume size [sector] (4) */ +#define BS_DrvNum 36 /* Physical drive number (2) */ +#define BS_BootSig 38 /* Extended boot signature (1) */ +#define BS_VolID 39 /* Volume serial number (4) */ +#define BS_VolLab 43 /* Volume label (8) */ +#define BS_FilSysType 54 /* File system type (1) */ +#define BPB_FATSz32 36 /* FAT size [sector] (4) */ +#define BPB_ExtFlags 40 /* Extended flags (2) */ +#define BPB_FSVer 42 /* File system version (2) */ +#define BPB_RootClus 44 /* Root dir first cluster (4) */ +#define BPB_FSInfo 48 /* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */ +#define BPB_BkBootSec 50 /* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */ +#define BS_DrvNum32 64 /* Physical drive number (2) */ +#define BS_BootSig32 66 /* Extended boot signature (1) */ +#define BS_VolID32 67 /* Volume serial number (4) */ +#define BS_VolLab32 71 /* Volume label (8) */ +#define BS_FilSysType32 82 /* File system type (1) */ +#define FSI_LeadSig 0 /* FSI: Leading signature (4) */ +#define FSI_StrucSig 484 /* FSI: Structure signature (4) */ +#define FSI_Free_Count 488 /* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */ +#define FSI_Nxt_Free 492 /* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */ +#define MBR_Table 446 /* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */ +#define SZ_PTE 16 /* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */ +#define BS_55AA 510 /* Boot sector signature (2) */ + +#define DIR_Name 0 /* Short file name (11) */ +#define DIR_Attr 11 /* Attribute (1) */ +#define DIR_NTres 12 /* NT flag (1) */ +#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth 13 /* Created time sub-second (1) */ +#define DIR_CrtTime 14 /* Created time (2) */ +#define DIR_CrtDate 16 /* Created date (2) */ +#define DIR_LstAccDate 18 /* Last accessed date (2) */ +#define DIR_FstClusHI 20 /* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */ +#define DIR_WrtTime 22 /* Modified time (2) */ +#define DIR_WrtDate 24 /* Modified date (2) */ +#define DIR_FstClusLO 26 /* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */ +#define DIR_FileSize 28 /* File size (4) */ +#define LDIR_Ord 0 /* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */ +#define LDIR_Attr 11 /* LFN attribute (1) */ +#define LDIR_Type 12 /* LFN type (1) */ +#define LDIR_Chksum 13 /* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */ +#define LDIR_FstClusLO 26 /* Filled by zero (0) */ +#define SZ_DIR 32 /* Size of a directory entry */ +#define LLE 0x40 /* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */ +#define DDE 0xE5 /* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */ +#define NDDE 0x05 /* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */ + + +/*------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Module private work area */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are +/ zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up +/ routine is out of ANSI-C standard. +*/ + +#if _VOLUMES +static +FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES]; /* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */ +#else +#error Number of volumes must not be 0. +#endif + +static +WORD Fsid; /* File system mount ID */ + +#if _FS_RPATH +static +BYTE CurrVol; /* Current drive */ +#endif + +#if _FS_LOCK +static +FILESEM Files[_FS_LOCK]; /* File lock semaphores */ +#endif + +#if _USE_LFN == 0 /* No LFN feature */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) (dobj).fn = sfn +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 1 /* LFN feature with static working buffer */ +static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1]; +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; } +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 2 /* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; } +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 3 /* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \ + if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \ + (dobj).lfn = lfn; (dobj).fn = sfn; } +#define FREE_BUF() ff_memfree(lfn) + +#else +#error Wrong LFN configuration. +#endif + + + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Module Private Functions + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* String functions */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* Copy memory to memory */ +static +void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) { + BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst; + const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src; + +#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1 + while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) { + *(int*)d = *(int*)s; + d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int); + cnt -= sizeof (int); + } +#endif + while (cnt--) + *d++ = *s++; +} + +/* Fill memory */ +static +void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) { + BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst; + + while (cnt--) + *d++ = (BYTE)val; +} + +/* Compare memory to memory */ +static +int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) { + const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src; + int r = 0; + + while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ; + return r; +} + +/* Check if chr is contained in the string */ +static +int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) { + while (*str && *str != chr) str++; + return *str; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Request/Release grant to access the volume */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_REENTRANT + +static +int lock_fs ( + FATFS *fs /* File system object */ +) +{ + return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj); +} + + +static +void unlock_fs ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + FRESULT res /* Result code to be returned */ +) +{ + if (fs && + res != FR_NOT_ENABLED && + res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE && + res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT && + res != FR_TIMEOUT) { + ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj); + } +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* File lock control functions */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_LOCK + +static +FRESULT chk_lock ( /* Check if the file can be accessed */ + DIR* dj, /* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */ + int acc /* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */ +) +{ + UINT i, be; + + /* Search file semaphore table */ + for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { + if (Files[i].fs) { /* Existing entry */ + if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs && /* Check if the file matched with an open file */ + Files[i].clu == dj->sclust && + Files[i].idx == dj->index) break; + } else { /* Blank entry */ + be++; + } + } + if (i == _FS_LOCK) /* The file is not opened */ + return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES; /* Is there a blank entry for new file? */ + + /* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */ + return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK; +} + + +static +int enq_lock (void) /* Check if an entry is available for a new file */ +{ + UINT i; + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ; + return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1; +} + + +static +UINT inc_lock ( /* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */ + DIR* dj, /* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */ + int acc /* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */ +) +{ + UINT i; + + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { /* Find the file */ + if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs && + Files[i].clu == dj->sclust && + Files[i].idx == dj->index) break; + } + + if (i == _FS_LOCK) { /* Not opened. Register it as new. */ + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ; + if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0; /* No space to register (int err) */ + Files[i].fs = dj->fs; + Files[i].clu = dj->sclust; + Files[i].idx = dj->index; + Files[i].ctr = 0; + } + + if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0; /* Access violation (int err) */ + + Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1; /* Set semaphore value */ + + return i + 1; +} + + +static +FRESULT dec_lock ( /* Decrement file open counter */ + UINT i /* Semaphore index */ +) +{ + WORD n; + FRESULT res; + + + if (--i < _FS_LOCK) { + n = Files[i].ctr; + if (n == 0x100) n = 0; + if (n) n--; + Files[i].ctr = n; + if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } else { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + return res; +} + + +static +void clear_lock ( /* Clear lock entries of the volume */ + FATFS *fs +) +{ + UINT i; + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { + if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0; + } +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change window offset */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT move_window ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD sector /* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */ +) /* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */ +{ + DWORD wsect; + + + wsect = fs->winsect; + if (wsect != sector) { /* Changed current window */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fs->wflag) { /* Write back dirty window if needed */ + if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + fs->wflag = 0; + if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) { /* In FAT area */ + BYTE nf; + for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) { /* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */ + wsect += fs->fsize; + disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1); + } + } + } +#endif + if (sector) { + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + fs->winsect = sector; + } + } + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Clean-up cached data */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT sync ( /* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */ + FATFS *fs /* File system object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + + res = move_window(fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + /* Update FSInfo sector if needed */ + if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) { + fs->winsect = 0; + /* Create FSInfo structure */ + mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512); + ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust); + /* Write it into the FSInfo sector */ + disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1); + fs->fsi_flag = 0; + } + /* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */ + if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK) + res = FR_DISK_ERR; + } + + return res; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get sector# from cluster# */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +DWORD clust2sect ( /* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to be converted */ +) +{ + clst -= 2; + if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0; /* Invalid cluster# */ + return clst * fs->csize + fs->database; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +DWORD get_fat ( /* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to get the link information */ +) +{ + UINT wc, bc; + BYTE *p; + + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) /* Check range */ + return 1; + + switch (fs->fs_type) { + case FS_FAT12 : + bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2; + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break; + wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++; + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break; + wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8; + return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF); + + case FS_FAT16 : + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)]; + return LD_WORD(p); + + case FS_FAT32 : + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)]; + return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF; + } + + return 0xFFFFFFFF; /* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY + +FRESULT put_fat ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst, /* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */ + DWORD val /* New value to mark the cluster */ +) +{ + UINT bc; + BYTE *p; + FRESULT res; + + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Check range */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + + } else { + switch (fs->fs_type) { + case FS_FAT12 : + bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2; + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; + *p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val; + bc++; + fs->wflag = 1; + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; + *p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F)); + break; + + case FS_FAT16 : + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)]; + ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val); + break; + + case FS_FAT32 : + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)]; + val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000; + ST_DWORD(p, val); + break; + + default : + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + fs->wflag = 1; + } + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT remove_chain ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to remove a chain from */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD nxt; +#if _USE_ERASE + DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2]; +#endif + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Check range */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + + } else { + res = FR_OK; + while (clst < fs->n_fatent) { /* Not a last link? */ + nxt = get_fat(fs, clst); /* Get cluster status */ + if (nxt == 0) break; /* Empty cluster? */ + if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; } /* Internal error? */ + if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; } /* Disk error? */ + res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0); /* Mark the cluster "empty" */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) { /* Update FSInfo */ + fs->free_clust++; + fs->fsi_flag = 1; + } +#if _USE_ERASE + if (ecl + 1 == nxt) { /* Is next cluster contiguous? */ + ecl = nxt; + } else { /* End of contiguous clusters */ + rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl); /* Start sector */ + rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1; /* End sector */ + disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt); /* Erase the block */ + scl = ecl = nxt; + } +#endif + clst = nxt; /* Next cluster */ + } + } + + return res; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +DWORD create_chain ( /* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */ +) +{ + DWORD cs, ncl, scl; + FRESULT res; + + + if (clst == 0) { /* Create a new chain */ + scl = fs->last_clust; /* Get suggested start point */ + if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1; + } + else { /* Stretch the current chain */ + cs = get_fat(fs, clst); /* Check the cluster status */ + if (cs < 2) return 1; /* It is an invalid cluster */ + if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs; /* It is already followed by next cluster */ + scl = clst; + } + + ncl = scl; /* Start cluster */ + for (;;) { + ncl++; /* Next cluster */ + if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Wrap around */ + ncl = 2; + if (ncl > scl) return 0; /* No free cluster */ + } + cs = get_fat(fs, ncl); /* Get the cluster status */ + if (cs == 0) break; /* Found a free cluster */ + if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */ + return cs; + if (ncl == scl) return 0; /* No free cluster */ + } + + res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF); /* Mark the new cluster "last link" */ + if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) { + res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl); /* Link it to the previous one if needed */ + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + fs->last_clust = ncl; /* Update FSINFO */ + if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) { + fs->free_clust--; + fs->fsi_flag = 1; + } + } else { + ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1; + } + + return ncl; /* Return new cluster number or error code */ +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _USE_FASTSEEK +static +DWORD clmt_clust ( /* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */ + FIL* fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + DWORD ofs /* File offset to be converted to cluster# */ +) +{ + DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl; + + + tbl = fp->cltbl + 1; /* Top of CLMT */ + cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize; /* Cluster order from top of the file */ + for (;;) { + ncl = *tbl++; /* Number of cluters in the fragment */ + if (!ncl) return 0; /* End of table? (error) */ + if (cl < ncl) break; /* In this fragment? */ + cl -= ncl; tbl++; /* Next fragment */ + } + return cl + *tbl; /* Return the cluster number */ +} +#endif /* _USE_FASTSEEK */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Set directory index */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_sdi ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object */ + WORD idx /* Index of directory table */ +) +{ + DWORD clst; + WORD ic; + + + dj->index = idx; + clst = dj->sclust; + if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) /* Check start cluster range */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32) /* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */ + clst = dj->fs->dirbase; + + if (clst == 0) { /* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */ + dj->clust = clst; + if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir) /* Index is out of range */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR); /* Sector# */ + } + else { /* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */ + ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize; /* Entries per cluster */ + while (idx >= ic) { /* Follow cluster chain */ + clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst); /* Get next cluster */ + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; /* Disk error */ + if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) /* Reached to end of table or int error */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + idx -= ic; + } + dj->clust = clst; + dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR); /* Sector# */ + } + + dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR; /* Ptr to the entry in the sector */ + + return FR_OK; /* Seek succeeded */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_next ( /* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */ + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object */ + int stretch /* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */ +) +{ + DWORD clst; + WORD i; + + + stretch = stretch; /* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */ + i = dj->index + 1; + if (!i || !dj->sect) /* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */ + return FR_NO_FILE; + + if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) { /* Sector changed? */ + dj->sect++; /* Next sector */ + + if (dj->clust == 0) { /* Static table */ + if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir) /* Report EOT when end of table */ + return FR_NO_FILE; + } + else { /* Dynamic table */ + if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) { /* Cluster changed? */ + clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust); /* Get next cluster */ + if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR; + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) { /* When it reached end of dynamic table */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + BYTE c; + if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE; /* When do not stretch, report EOT */ + clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust); /* Stretch cluster chain */ + if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED; /* No free cluster */ + if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR; + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; + /* Clean-up stretched table */ + if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR; /* Flush active window */ + mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs)); /* Clear window buffer */ + dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst); /* Cluster start sector */ + for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) { /* Fill the new cluster with 0 */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR; + dj->fs->winsect++; + } + dj->fs->winsect -= c; /* Rewind window address */ +#else + return FR_NO_FILE; /* Report EOT */ +#endif + } + dj->clust = clst; /* Initialize data for new cluster */ + dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst); + } + } + } + + dj->index = i; + dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +DWORD ld_clust ( + FATFS *fs, /* Pointer to the fs object */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry */ +) +{ + DWORD cl; + + cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO); + if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32) + cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16; + + return cl; +} + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +void st_clust ( + BYTE *dir, /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + DWORD cl /* Value to be set */ +) +{ + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16); +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +static +const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30}; /* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */ + + +static +int cmp_lfn ( /* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */ + WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc, uc; + + + i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13; /* Get offset in the LFN buffer */ + s = 0; wc = 1; + do { + uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]); /* Pick an LFN character from the entry */ + if (wc) { /* Last char has not been processed */ + wc = ff_wtoupper(uc); /* Convert it to upper case */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++])) /* Compare it */ + return 0; /* Not matched */ + } else { + if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0; /* Check filler */ + } + } while (++s < 13); /* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */ + + if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i]) /* Last segment matched but different length */ + return 0; + + return 1; /* The part of LFN matched */ +} + + + +static +int pick_lfn ( /* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */ + WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc, uc; + + + i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13; /* Offset in the LFN buffer */ + + s = 0; wc = 1; + do { + uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]); /* Pick an LFN character from the entry */ + if (wc) { /* Last char has not been processed */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0; /* Buffer overflow? */ + lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc; /* Store it */ + } else { + if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0; /* Check filler */ + } + } while (++s < 13); /* Read all character in the entry */ + + if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) { /* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0; /* Buffer overflow? */ + lfnbuf[i] = 0; + } + + return 1; +} + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +void fit_lfn ( + const WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the LFN buffer */ + BYTE *dir, /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + BYTE ord, /* LFN order (1-20) */ + BYTE sum /* SFN sum */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc; + + + dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum; /* Set check sum */ + dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN; /* Set attribute. LFN entry */ + dir[LDIR_Type] = 0; + ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0); + + i = (ord - 1) * 13; /* Get offset in the LFN buffer */ + s = wc = 0; + do { + if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++]; /* Get an effective char */ + ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc); /* Put it */ + if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF; /* Padding chars following last char */ + } while (++s < 13); + if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE; /* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */ + dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord; /* Set the LFN order */ +} + +#endif +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create numbered name */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +void gen_numname ( + BYTE *dst, /* Pointer to generated SFN */ + const BYTE *src, /* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */ + const WCHAR *lfn, /* Pointer to LFN */ + WORD seq /* Sequence number */ +) +{ + BYTE ns[8], c; + UINT i, j; + + + mem_cpy(dst, src, 11); + + if (seq > 5) { /* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */ + do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn); + } + + /* itoa (hexdecimal) */ + i = 7; + do { + c = (seq % 16) + '0'; + if (c > '9') c += 7; + ns[i--] = c; + seq /= 16; + } while (seq); + ns[i] = '~'; + + /* Append the number */ + for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) { + if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) { + if (j == i - 1) break; + j++; + } + } + do { + dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' '; + } while (j < 8); +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Calculate sum of an SFN */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +static +BYTE sum_sfn ( + const BYTE *dir /* Ptr to directory entry */ +) +{ + BYTE sum = 0; + UINT n = 11; + + do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n); + return sum; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_find ( + DIR *dj /* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN + BYTE a, ord, sum; +#endif + + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind directory object */ + if (res != FR_OK) return res; + +#if _USE_LFN + ord = sum = 0xFF; +#endif + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dir = dj->dir; /* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */ + c = dir[DIR_Name]; + if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; } /* Reached to end of table */ +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK; + if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) { /* An entry without valid data */ + ord = 0xFF; + } else { + if (a == AM_LFN) { /* An LFN entry is found */ + if (dj->lfn) { + if (c & LLE) { /* Is it start of LFN sequence? */ + sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum]; + c &= ~LLE; ord = c; /* LFN start order */ + dj->lfn_idx = dj->index; + } + /* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */ + ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF; + } + } else { /* An SFN entry is found */ + if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break; /* LFN matched? */ + ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF; /* Reset LFN sequence */ + if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break; /* SFN matched? */ + } + } +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */ + break; +#endif + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + + return res; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read an object from the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +static +FRESULT dir_read ( + DIR *dj /* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN + BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF; +#endif + + res = FR_NO_FILE; + while (dj->sect) { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dir = dj->dir; /* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */ + c = dir[DIR_Name]; + if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; } /* Reached to end of table */ +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK; + if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) { /* An entry without valid data */ + ord = 0xFF; + } else { + if (a == AM_LFN) { /* An LFN entry is found */ + if (c & LLE) { /* Is it start of LFN sequence? */ + sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum]; + c &= ~LLE; ord = c; + dj->lfn_idx = dj->index; + } + /* Check LFN validity and capture it */ + ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF; + } else { /* An SFN entry is found */ + if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir)) /* Is there a valid LFN? */ + dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF; /* It has no LFN. */ + break; + } + } +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL)) /* Is it a valid entry? */ + break; +#endif + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + } + + if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0; + + return res; +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Register an object to the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT dir_register ( /* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */ + DIR *dj /* Target directory with object name to be created */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + WORD n, ne, is; + BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum; + WCHAR *lfn; + + + fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn; + mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12); + + if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) /* Cannot create dot entry */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + + if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) { /* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */ + fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0; /* Find only SFN */ + for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) { + gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n); /* Generate a numbered name */ + res = dir_find(dj); /* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + } + if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED; /* Abort if too many collisions */ + if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res; /* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */ + fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn; + } + + if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) { /* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */ + for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ; + ne = (ne + 25) / 13; + } else { /* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */ + ne = 1; + } + + /* Reserve contiguous entries */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) return res; + n = is = 0; + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + c = *dj->dir; /* Check the entry status */ + if (c == DDE || c == 0) { /* Is it a blank entry? */ + if (n == 0) is = dj->index; /* First index of the contiguous entry */ + if (++n == ne) break; /* A contiguous entry that required count is found */ + } else { + n = 0; /* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */ + } + res = dir_next(dj, 1); /* Next entry with table stretch */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + + if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) { /* Initialize LFN entry if needed */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, is); + if (res == FR_OK) { + sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn); /* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */ + ne--; + do { /* Store LFN entries in bottom first */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum); + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK && --ne); + } + } + +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + do { /* Find a blank entry for the SFN */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + c = *dj->dir; + if (c == DDE || c == 0) break; /* Is it a blank entry? */ + res = dir_next(dj, 1); /* Next entry with table stretch */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + } +#endif + + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Initialize the SFN entry */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj->dir; + mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR); /* Clean the entry */ + mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11); /* Put SFN */ +#if _USE_LFN + dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT); /* Put NT flag */ +#endif + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + } + } + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Remove an object from the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE +static +FRESULT dir_remove ( /* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */ + DIR *dj /* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + WORD i; + + i = dj->index; /* SFN index */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx)); /* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + *dj->dir = DDE; /* Mark the entry "deleted" */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + if (dj->index >= i) break; /* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */ + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index); + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + *dj->dir = DDE; /* Mark the entry "deleted" */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + } + } +#endif + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT create_name ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the directory object */ + const TCHAR **path /* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */ +) +{ +#ifdef _EXCVT + static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT; /* Upper conversion table for extended chars */ +#endif + +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + BYTE b, cf; + WCHAR w, *lfn; + UINT i, ni, si, di; + const TCHAR *p; + + /* Create LFN in Unicode */ + for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ; /* Strip duplicated separator */ + lfn = dj->lfn; + si = di = 0; + for (;;) { + w = p[si++]; /* Get a character */ + if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break; /* Break on end of segment */ + if (di >= _MAX_LFN) /* Reject too long name */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if !_LFN_UNICODE + w &= 0xFF; + if (IsDBCS1(w)) { /* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + b = (BYTE)p[si++]; /* Get 2nd byte */ + if (!IsDBCS2(b)) + return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject invalid sequence */ + w = (w << 8) + b; /* Create a DBC */ + } + w = ff_convert(w, 1); /* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */ + if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject invalid code */ +#endif + if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + lfn[di++] = w; /* Store the Unicode char */ + } + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ +#if _FS_RPATH + if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */ + (di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) { + lfn[di] = 0; + for (i = 0; i < 11; i++) + dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' '; + dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT; /* This is a dot entry */ + return FR_OK; + } +#endif + while (di) { /* Strip trailing spaces and dots */ + w = lfn[di-1]; + if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break; + di--; + } + if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject nul string */ + + lfn[di] = 0; /* LFN is created */ + + /* Create SFN in directory form */ + mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11); + for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ; /* Strip leading spaces and dots */ + if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; + while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--; /* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */ + + b = i = 0; ni = 8; + for (;;) { + w = lfn[si++]; /* Get an LFN char */ + if (!w) break; /* Break on end of the LFN */ + if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) { /* Remove spaces and dots */ + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue; + } + + if (i >= ni || si == di) { /* Extension or end of SFN */ + if (ni == 11) { /* Long extension */ + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break; + } + if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; /* Out of 8.3 format */ + if (si > di) break; /* No extension */ + si = di; i = 8; ni = 11; /* Enter extension section */ + b <<= 2; continue; + } + + if (w >= 0x80) { /* Non ASCII char */ +#ifdef _EXCVT + w = ff_convert(w, 0); /* Unicode -> OEM code */ + if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80]; /* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */ +#else + w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0); /* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */ +#endif + cf |= NS_LFN; /* Force create LFN entry */ + } + + if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) { /* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + if (i >= ni - 1) { + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue; + } + dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8); + } else { /* Single byte char */ + if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) { /* Replace illegal chars for SFN */ + w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */ + } else { + if (IsUpper(w)) { /* ASCII large capital */ + b |= 2; + } else { + if (IsLower(w)) { /* ASCII small capital */ + b |= 1; w -= 0x20; + } + } + } + } + dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w; + } + + if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE; /* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */ + + if (ni == 8) b <<= 2; + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03) /* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */ + cf |= NS_LFN; + if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) { /* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */ + if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT; /* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */ + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY; /* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */ + } + + dj->fn[NS] = cf; /* SFN is created */ + + return FR_OK; + + +#else /* Non-LFN configuration */ + BYTE b, c, d, *sfn; + UINT ni, si, i; + const char *p; + + /* Create file name in directory form */ + for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ; /* Strip duplicated separator */ + sfn = dj->fn; + mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11); + si = i = b = 0; ni = 8; +#if _FS_RPATH + if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */ + for (;;) { + c = (BYTE)p[si++]; + if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break; + sfn[i++] = c; + } + if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME; + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ + return FR_OK; + } +#endif + for (;;) { + c = (BYTE)p[si++]; + if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break; /* Break on end of segment */ + if (c == '.' || i >= ni) { + if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME; + i = 8; ni = 11; + b <<= 2; continue; + } + if (c >= 0x80) { /* Extended char? */ + b |= 3; /* Eliminate NT flag */ +#ifdef _EXCVT + c = excvt[c - 0x80]; /* Upper conversion (SBCS) */ +#else +#if !_DF1S /* ASCII only cfg */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; +#endif +#endif + } + if (IsDBCS1(c)) { /* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + d = (BYTE)p[si++]; /* Get 2nd byte */ + if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1) /* Reject invalid DBC */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + sfn[i++] = c; + sfn[i++] = d; + } else { /* Single byte code */ + if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c)) /* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (IsUpper(c)) { /* ASCII large capital? */ + b |= 2; + } else { + if (IsLower(c)) { /* ASCII small capital? */ + b |= 1; c -= 0x20; + } + } + sfn[i++] = c; + } + } + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ + + if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject nul string */ + if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE; /* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */ + + if (ni == 8) b <<= 2; + if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT; /* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */ + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY; /* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */ + + sfn[NS] = c; /* Store NT flag, File name is created */ + + return FR_OK; +#endif +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get file information from directory entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +static +void get_fileinfo ( /* No return code */ + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the directory object */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to the file information to be filled */ +) +{ + UINT i; + BYTE nt, *dir; + TCHAR *p, c; + + + p = fno->fname; + if (dj->sect) { + dir = dj->dir; + nt = dir[DIR_NTres]; /* NT flag */ + for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) { /* Copy name body */ + c = dir[i]; + if (c == ' ') break; + if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE; + if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20; +#if _LFN_UNICODE + if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1])) + c = (c << 8) | dir[++i]; + c = ff_convert(c, 1); + if (!c) c = '?'; +#endif + *p++ = c; + } + if (dir[8] != ' ') { /* Copy name extension */ + *p++ = '.'; + for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) { + c = dir[i]; + if (c == ' ') break; + if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20; +#if _LFN_UNICODE + if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1])) + c = (c << 8) | dir[++i]; + c = ff_convert(c, 1); + if (!c) c = '?'; +#endif + *p++ = c; + } + } + fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr]; /* Attribute */ + fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize); /* Size */ + fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate); /* Date */ + fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime); /* Time */ + } + *p = 0; /* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */ + +#if _USE_LFN + if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) { + TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname; + WCHAR w, *lfn; + + i = 0; + if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */ + lfn = dj->lfn; + while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) { /* Get an LFN char */ +#if !_LFN_UNICODE + w = ff_convert(w, 0); /* Unicode -> OEM conversion */ + if (!w) { i = 0; break; } /* Could not convert, no LFN */ + if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) /* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8); +#endif + if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; } /* Buffer overflow, no LFN */ + tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w; + } + } + tp[i] = 0; /* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */ + } +#endif +} +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Follow a file path */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT follow_path ( /* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */ + DIR *dj, /* Directory object to return last directory and found object */ + const TCHAR *path /* Full-path string to find a file or directory */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE *dir, ns; + + +#if _FS_RPATH + if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */ + path++; dj->sclust = 0; /* Strip it and start from the root dir */ + } else { /* No heading separator */ + dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir; /* Start from the current dir */ + } +#else + if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') /* Strip heading separator if exist */ + path++; + dj->sclust = 0; /* Start from the root dir */ +#endif + + if ((UINT)*path < ' ') { /* Nul path means the start directory itself */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + dj->dir = 0; + } else { /* Follow path */ + for (;;) { + res = create_name(dj, &path); /* Get a segment */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + res = dir_find(dj); /* Find it */ + ns = *(dj->fn+NS); + if (res != FR_OK) { /* Failed to find the object */ + if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break; /* Abort if any hard error occurred */ + /* Object not found */ + if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) { /* If dot entry is not exit */ + dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0; /* It is the root dir */ + res = FR_OK; + if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue; + } else { /* Could not find the object */ + if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + break; + } + if (ns & NS_LAST) break; /* Last segment match. Function completed. */ + dir = dj->dir; /* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */ + if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */ + res = FR_NO_PATH; break; + } + dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir); + } + } + + return res; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +BYTE check_fs ( /* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD sect /* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */ +) +{ + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Load boot record */ + return 3; + if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55) /* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */ + return 2; + + if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146) /* Check "FAT" string */ + return 0; + if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146) + return 0; + + return 1; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT chk_mounted ( /* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */ + const TCHAR **path, /* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */ + FATFS **rfs, /* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */ + BYTE wmode /* !=0: Check write protection for write access */ +) +{ + BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl; + UINT vol; + DSTATUS stat; + DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat; + WORD nrsv; + const TCHAR *p = *path; + FATFS *fs; + + + /* Get logical drive number from the path name */ + vol = p[0] - '0'; /* Is there a drive number? */ + if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') { /* Found a drive number, get and strip it */ + p += 2; *path = p; /* Return pointer to the path name */ + } else { /* No drive number is given */ +#if _FS_RPATH + vol = CurrVol; /* Use current drive */ +#else + vol = 0; /* Use drive 0 */ +#endif + } + + /* Check if the file system object is valid or not */ + *rfs = 0; + if (vol >= _VOLUMES) /* Is the drive number valid? */ + return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + fs = FatFs[vol]; /* Get corresponding file system object */ + if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED; /* Is the file system object available? */ + + ENTER_FF(fs); /* Lock file system */ + + *rfs = fs; /* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */ + if (fs->fs_type) { /* If the volume has been mounted */ + stat = disk_status(fs->drv); + if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) { /* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */ + if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT)) /* Check write protection if needed */ + return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; + return FR_OK; /* The file system object is valid */ + } + } + + /* The file system object is not valid. */ + /* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */ + + fs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear the file system object */ + fs->drv = LD2PD(vol); /* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */ + stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv); /* Initialize the physical drive */ + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) /* Check if the initialization succeeded */ + return FR_NOT_READY; /* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */ + if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT)) /* Check disk write protection if needed */ + return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; +#if _MAX_SS != 512 /* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */ + if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; +#endif + /* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */ + fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0); /* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */ + if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1; /* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */ + if (fmt == 1) { /* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */ + /* Check the partition listed in the partition table */ + pi = LD2PT(vol); + if (pi) pi--; + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */ + if (tbl[4]) { /* Is the partition existing? */ + bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]); /* Partition offset in LBA */ + fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect); /* Check the partition */ + } + } + if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* No FAT volume is found */ + + /* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */ + + if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs)) /* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */ + return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; + + fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32); + fs->fsize = fasize; + + fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs]; /* Number of FAT copies */ + if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Must be 1 or 2) */ + fasize *= b; /* Number of sectors for FAT area */ + + fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus]; /* Number of sectors per cluster */ + if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Must be power of 2) */ + + fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt); /* Number of root directory entries */ + if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */ + + tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16); /* Number of sectors on the volume */ + if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32); + + nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* Number of reserved sectors */ + if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */ + + /* Determine the FAT sub type */ + sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR); /* RSV+FAT+DIR */ + if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Invalid volume size) */ + nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize; /* Number of clusters */ + if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Invalid volume size) */ + fmt = FS_FAT12; + if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16; + if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32; + + /* Boundaries and Limits */ + fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2; /* Number of FAT entries */ + fs->database = bsect + sysect; /* Data start sector */ + fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; /* FAT start sector */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */ + fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus); /* Root directory start cluster */ + szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4; /* (Required FAT size) */ + } else { + if (!fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */ + fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize; /* Root directory start sector */ + szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ? /* (Required FAT size) */ + fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1); + } + if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs)) /* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */ + return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; + +#if !_FS_READONLY + /* Initialize cluster allocation information */ + fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF; + fs->last_clust = 0; + + /* Get fsinfo if available */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + fs->fsi_flag = 0; + fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo); + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK && + LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 && + LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 && + LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) { + fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free); + fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count); + } + } +#endif + fs->fs_type = fmt; /* FAT sub-type */ + fs->id = ++Fsid; /* File system mount ID */ + fs->winsect = 0; /* Invalidate sector cache */ + fs->wflag = 0; +#if _FS_RPATH + fs->cdir = 0; /* Current directory (root dir) */ +#endif +#if _FS_LOCK /* Clear file lock semaphores */ + clear_lock(fs); +#endif + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT validate ( /* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */ + void* obj /* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */ +) +{ + FIL *fil; + + + fil = (FIL*)obj; /* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */ + if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id) + return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + ENTER_FF(fil->fs); /* Lock file system */ + + if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT) + return FR_NOT_READY; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Public Functions + +--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_mount ( + BYTE vol, /* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */ + FATFS *fs /* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/ +) +{ + FATFS *rfs; + + + if (vol >= _VOLUMES) /* Check if the drive number is valid */ + return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + rfs = FatFs[vol]; /* Get current fs object */ + + if (rfs) { +#if _FS_LOCK + clear_lock(rfs); +#endif +#if _FS_REENTRANT /* Discard sync object of the current volume */ + if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + rfs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear old fs object */ + } + + if (fs) { + fs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear new fs object */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT /* Create sync object for the new volume */ + if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + } + FatFs[vol] = fs; /* Register new fs object */ + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Open or Create a File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_open ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the blank file object */ + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file name */ + BYTE mode /* Access mode and file open mode flags */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + fp->fs = 0; /* Clear file object */ + +#if !_FS_READONLY + mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW; + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ)); +#else + mode &= FA_READ; + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + dir = dj.dir; +#if !_FS_READONLY /* R/W configuration */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (!dir) /* Current dir itself */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if _FS_LOCK + else + res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0); +#endif + } + /* Create or Open a file */ + if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) { + DWORD dw, cl; + + if (res != FR_OK) { /* No file, create new */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) /* There is no file to open, create a new entry */ +#if _FS_LOCK + res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES; +#else + res = dir_register(&dj); +#endif + mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS; /* File is created */ + dir = dj.dir; /* New entry */ + } + else { /* Any object is already existing */ + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } else { + if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW) /* Cannot create as new file */ + res = FR_EXIST; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) { /* Truncate it if overwrite mode */ + dw = get_fattime(); /* Created time */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw); + dir[DIR_Attr] = 0; /* Reset attribute */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0); /* size = 0 */ + cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); /* Get start cluster */ + st_clust(dir, 0); /* cluster = 0 */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + if (cl) { /* Remove the cluster chain if exist */ + dw = dj.fs->winsect; + res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1; /* Reuse the cluster hole */ + res = move_window(dj.fs, dw); + } + } + } + } + else { /* Open an existing file */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow succeeded */ + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) { /* It is a directory */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } else { + if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) /* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */ + mode |= FA__WRITTEN; + fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect; /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + fp->dir_ptr = dir; +#if _FS_LOCK + fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0); + if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + } + +#else /* R/O configuration */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow succeeded */ + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Current dir itself */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) /* It is a directory */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } + } +#endif + FREE_BUF(); + + if (res == FR_OK) { + fp->flag = mode; /* File access mode */ + fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); /* File start cluster */ + fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize); /* File size */ + fp->fptr = 0; /* File pointer */ + fp->dsect = 0; +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + fp->cltbl = 0; /* Normal seek mode */ +#endif + fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id; /* Validate file object */ + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_read ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + void *buff, /* Pointer to data buffer */ + UINT btr, /* Number of bytes to read */ + UINT *br /* Pointer to number of bytes read */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD clst, sect, remain; + UINT rcnt, cc; + BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff; + + + *br = 0; /* Clear read byte counter */ + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Aborted file? */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr; + if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain; /* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */ + + for ( ; btr; /* Repeat until all data read */ + rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) { + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* On the top of the file? */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* Follow from the origin */ + } else { /* Middle or end of the file */ +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) + clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr); /* Get cluster# from the CLMT */ + else +#endif + clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */ + } + if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + cc = btr / SS(fp->fs); /* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */ + if (cc) { /* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */ + if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize) /* Clip at cluster boundary */ + cc = fp->fs->csize - csect; + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 /* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */ +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) + mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs)); +#else + if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc) + mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs)); +#endif +#endif + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc; /* Number of bytes transferred */ + continue; + } +#if !_FS_TINY + if (fp->dsect != sect) { /* Load data sector if not in cache */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Fill sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } +#endif + fp->dsect = sect; + } + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)); /* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */ + if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr; +#if _FS_TINY + if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); /* Pick partial sector */ +#else + mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); /* Pick partial sector */ +#endif + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} + + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Write File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_write ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + const void *buff, /* Pointer to the data to be written */ + UINT btw, /* Number of bytes to write */ + UINT *bw /* Pointer to number of bytes written */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD clst, sect; + UINT wcnt, cc; + const BYTE *wbuff = buff; + BYTE csect; + + + *bw = 0; /* Clear write byte counter */ + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Aborted file? */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0; /* File size cannot reach 4GB */ + + for ( ; btw; /* Repeat until all data written */ + wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) { + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* On the top of the file? */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* Follow from the origin */ + if (clst == 0) /* When no cluster is allocated, */ + fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0); /* Create a new cluster chain */ + } else { /* Middle or end of the file */ +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) + clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr); /* Get cluster# from the CLMT */ + else +#endif + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */ + } + if (clst == 0) break; /* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */ + if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0)) /* Write-back sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#else + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + cc = btw / SS(fp->fs); /* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */ + if (cc) { /* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */ + if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize) /* Clip at cluster boundary */ + cc = fp->fs->csize - csect; + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */ + mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs)); + fp->fs->wflag = 0; + } +#else + if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */ + mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs)); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc; /* Number of bytes transferred */ + continue; + } +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) { /* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */ + if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->fs->winsect = sect; + } +#else + if (fp->dsect != sect) { /* Fill sector cache with file data */ + if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize && + disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } +#endif + fp->dsect = sect; + } + wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */ + if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw; +#if _FS_TINY + if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt); /* Fit partial sector */ + fp->fs->wflag = 1; +#else + mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt); /* Fit partial sector */ + fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY; +#endif + } + + if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr; /* Update file size if needed */ + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; /* Set file change flag */ + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Synchronize the File Object */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_sync ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD tim; + BYTE *dir; + + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) { /* Has the file been written? */ +#if !_FS_TINY /* Write-back dirty buffer */ + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + /* Update the directory entry */ + res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = fp->dir_ptr; + dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC; /* Set archive bit */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize); /* Update file size */ + st_clust(dir, fp->sclust); /* Update start cluster */ + tim = get_fattime(); /* Update updated time */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0); + fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN; + fp->fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(fp->fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Close File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_close ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object to be closed */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + +#if _FS_READONLY + res = validate(fp); + { +#if _FS_REENTRANT + FATFS *fs = fp->fs; +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0; /* Discard file object */ + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); + } +#else + res = f_sync(fp); /* Flush cached data */ +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Decrement open counter */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT + FATFS *fs = fp->fs;; + res = validate(fp); + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dec_lock(fp->lockid); + unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK); + } +#else + res = dec_lock(fp->lockid); +#endif + } +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0; /* Discard file object */ + return res; +#endif +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _FS_RPATH >= 1 + +FRESULT f_chdrive ( + BYTE drv /* Drive number */ +) +{ + if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + + CurrVol = drv; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + +FRESULT f_chdir ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (!dj.dir) { + dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust; /* Start directory itself */ + } else { + if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) /* Reached to the directory */ + dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir); + else + res = FR_NO_PATH; /* Reached but a file */ + } + } + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + +#if _FS_RPATH >= 2 +FRESULT f_getcwd ( + TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the directory path */ + UINT sz_path /* Size of path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + UINT i, n; + DWORD ccl; + TCHAR *tp; + FILINFO fno; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + *path = 0; + res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0); /* Get current volume */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + i = sz_path; /* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */ + dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir; /* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */ + while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) { /* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */ + res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1); /* Get parent dir */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + res = dir_read(&dj); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir); /* Goto parent dir */ + res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + do { /* Find the entry links to the child dir */ + res = dir_read(&dj); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break; /* Found the entry */ + res = dir_next(&dj, 0); + } while (res == FR_OK); + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; +#if _USE_LFN + fno.lfname = path; + fno.lfsize = i; +#endif + get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno); /* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */ + tp = fno.fname; + if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path; + for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ; + if (i < n + 3) { + res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break; + } + while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n]; + path[--i] = '/'; + } + tp = path; + if (res == FR_OK) { + *tp++ = '0' + CurrVol; /* Put drive number */ + *tp++ = ':'; + if (i == sz_path) { /* Root-dir */ + *tp++ = '/'; + } else { /* Sub-dir */ + do /* Add stacked path str */ + *tp++ = path[i++]; + while (i < sz_path); + } + } + *tp = 0; + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} +#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */ +#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */ + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Seek File R/W Pointer */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_lseek ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + DWORD ofs /* File pointer from top of file */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Check abort flag */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) { /* Fast seek */ + DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl; + + if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) { /* Create CLMT */ + tbl = fp->cltbl; + tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2; /* Given table size and required table size */ + cl = fp->sclust; /* Top of the chain */ + if (cl) { + do { + /* Get a fragment */ + tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2; /* Top, length and used items */ + do { + pcl = cl; ncl++; + cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl); + if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } while (cl == pcl + 1); + if (ulen <= tlen) { /* Store the length and top of the fragment */ + *tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl; + } + } while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent); /* Repeat until end of chain */ + } + *fp->cltbl = ulen; /* Number of items used */ + if (ulen <= tlen) + *tbl = 0; /* Terminate table */ + else + res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; /* Given table size is smaller than required */ + + } else { /* Fast seek */ + if (ofs > fp->fsize) /* Clip offset at the file size */ + ofs = fp->fsize; + fp->fptr = ofs; /* Set file pointer */ + if (ofs) { + fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1); + dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); + if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1); + if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) { /* Refill sector cache if needed */ +#if !_FS_TINY +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK) /* Load current sector */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#endif + fp->dsect = dsc; + } + } + } + } else +#endif + + /* Normal Seek */ + { + DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr; + + if (ofs > fp->fsize /* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE) +#endif + ) ofs = fp->fsize; + + ifptr = fp->fptr; + fp->fptr = nsect = 0; + if (ofs) { + bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs); /* Cluster size (byte) */ + if (ifptr > 0 && + (ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) { /* When seek to same or following cluster, */ + fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1); /* start from the current cluster */ + ofs -= fp->fptr; + clst = fp->clust; + } else { /* When seek to back cluster, */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* start from the first cluster */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (clst == 0) { /* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */ + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0); + if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->sclust = clst; + } +#endif + fp->clust = clst; + } + if (clst != 0) { + while (ofs > bcs) { /* Cluster following loop */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) { /* Check if in write mode or not */ + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst); /* Force stretch if in write mode */ + if (clst == 0) { /* When disk gets full, clip file size */ + ofs = bcs; break; + } + } else +#endif + clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst); /* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */ + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; + fp->fptr += bcs; + ofs -= bcs; + } + fp->fptr += ofs; + if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) { + nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst); /* Current sector */ + if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs); + } + } + } + if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) { /* Fill sector cache if needed */ +#if !_FS_TINY +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Fill sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#endif + fp->dsect = nsect; + } +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) { /* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */ + fp->fsize = fp->fptr; + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; + } +#endif + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create a Directory Object */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_opendir ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object to create */ + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + FATFS *fs; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0); + fs = dj->fs; + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(*dj); + res = follow_path(dj, path); /* Follow the path to the directory */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (dj->dir) { /* It is not the root dir */ + if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) { /* The object is a directory */ + dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir); + } else { /* The object is not a directory */ + res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + dj->id = fs->id; + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind dir */ + } + } + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH; + if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0; /* Invalidate the dir object if function faild */ + } else { + dj->fs = 0; + } + + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_readdir ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the open directory object */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to file information to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = validate(dj); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (!fno) { + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind the directory object */ + } else { + INIT_BUF(*dj); + res = dir_read(dj); /* Read an directory item */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Reached end of dir */ + dj->sect = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } + if (res == FR_OK) { /* A valid entry is found */ + get_fileinfo(dj, fno); /* Get the object information */ + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Increment index for next */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { + dj->sect = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res); +} + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get File Status */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_stat ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file path */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to file information to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (dj.dir) /* Found an object */ + get_fileinfo(&dj, fno); + else /* It is root dir */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get Number of Free Clusters */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_getfree ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */ + DWORD *nclst, /* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */ + FATFS **fatfs /* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + FATFS *fs; + DWORD n, clst, sect, stat; + UINT i; + BYTE fat, *p; + + + /* Get drive number */ + res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0); + fs = *fatfs; + if (res == FR_OK) { + /* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */ + if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) { + *nclst = fs->free_clust; + } else { + /* Get number of free clusters */ + fat = fs->fs_type; + n = 0; + if (fat == FS_FAT12) { + clst = 2; + do { + stat = get_fat(fs, clst); + if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; } + if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; } + if (stat == 0) n++; + } while (++clst < fs->n_fatent); + } else { + clst = fs->n_fatent; + sect = fs->fatbase; + i = 0; p = 0; + do { + if (!i) { + res = move_window(fs, sect++); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = fs->win; + i = SS(fs); + } + if (fat == FS_FAT16) { + if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++; + p += 2; i -= 2; + } else { + if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++; + p += 4; i -= 4; + } + } while (--clst); + } + fs->free_clust = n; + if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1; + *nclst = n; + } + } + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Truncate File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_truncate ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD ncl; + + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) { /* Check abort flag */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)) /* Check access mode */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) { + fp->fsize = fp->fptr; /* Set file size to current R/W point */ + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */ + res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust); + fp->sclust = 0; + } else { /* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */ + ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); + res = FR_OK; + if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR; + if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR; + if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) { + res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF); + if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl); + } + } + } + if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Delete a File or Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_unlink ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the file or directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj, sdj; + BYTE *dir; + DWORD dclst; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Cannot remove dot entry */ +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2); /* Cannot remove open file */ +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { /* The object is accessible */ + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Cannot remove the start directory */ + } else { + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO) + res = FR_DENIED; /* Cannot remove R/O object */ + } + dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); + if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Is it a sub-dir? */ + if (dclst < 2) { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR)); /* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */ + sdj.sclust = dclst; + res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2); /* Exclude dot entries */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_read(&sdj); + if (res == FR_OK /* Not empty dir */ +#if _FS_RPATH + || dclst == dj.fs->cdir /* Current dir */ +#endif + ) res = FR_DENIED; + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK; /* Empty */ + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_remove(&dj); /* Remove the directory entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (dclst) /* Remove the cluster chain if exist */ + res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst); + if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create a Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_mkdir ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir, n; + DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime(); + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST; /* Any object with same name is already existing */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Can create a new directory */ + dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0); /* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */ + res = FR_OK; + if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED; /* No space to allocate a new cluster */ + if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR; + if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR; + if (res == FR_OK) /* Flush FAT */ + res = move_window(dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Initialize the new directory table */ + dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl); + dir = dj.fs->win; + mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs)); + mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3); /* Create "." entry */ + dir[DIR_Name] = '.'; + dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR; + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); + st_clust(dir, dcl); + mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); /* Create ".." entry */ + dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust; + if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase) + pcl = 0; + st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl); + for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) { /* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */ + dj.fs->winsect = dsc++; + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = move_window(dj.fs, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs)); + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj); /* Register the object to the directoy */ + if (res != FR_OK) { + remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl); /* Could not register, remove cluster chain */ + } else { + dir = dj.dir; + dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR; /* Attribute */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); /* Created time */ + st_clust(dir, dcl); /* Table start cluster */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change Attribute */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_chmod ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file path */ + BYTE value, /* Attribute bits */ + BYTE mask /* Attribute mask to change */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Is it a root directory? */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { /* File or sub directory */ + mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC; /* Valid attribute mask */ + dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask); /* Apply attribute change */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change Timestamp */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_utime ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file/directory name */ + const FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Root directory */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { /* File or sub-directory */ + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate); + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Rename File/Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_rename ( + const TCHAR *path_old, /* Pointer to the old name */ + const TCHAR *path_new /* Pointer to the new name */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR djo, djn; + BYTE buf[21], *dir; + DWORD dw; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + djn.fs = djo.fs; + INIT_BUF(djo); + res = follow_path(&djo, path_old); /* Check old object */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2); +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Old object is found */ + if (!djo.dir) { /* Is root dir? */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } else { + mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21); /* Save the object information except for name */ + mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR)); /* Check new object */ + res = follow_path(&djn, path_new); + if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST; /* The new object name is already existing */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */ +/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */ + res = dir_register(&djn); /* Register the new entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = djn.dir; /* Copy object information except for name */ + mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19); + dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC; + djo.fs->wflag = 1; + if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */ + dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir)); + if (!dw) { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + res = move_window(djo.fs, dw); + dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR; /* .. entry */ + if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') { + dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust; + st_clust(dir, dw); + djo.fs->wflag = 1; + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_remove(&djo); /* Remove old entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) + res = sync(djo.fs); + } + } +/* End critical section */ + } + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res); +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg) */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY + +FRESULT f_forward ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT), /* Pointer to the streaming function */ + UINT btr, /* Number of bytes to forward */ + UINT *bf /* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD remain, clst, sect; + UINT rcnt; + BYTE csect; + + + *bf = 0; /* Clear transfer byte counter */ + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Check error flag */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + + remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr; + if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain; /* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */ + + for ( ; btr && (*func)(0, 0); /* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */ + fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) { + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ? /* On the top of the file? */ + fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); + if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } + } + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current data sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + if (move_window(fp->fs, sect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->dsect = sect; + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)); /* Forward data from sector window */ + if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr; + rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); + if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} +#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */ + + + +#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create File System on the Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define N_ROOTDIR 512 /* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */ +#define N_FATS 1 /* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */ + + +FRESULT f_mkfs ( + BYTE drv, /* Logical drive number */ + BYTE sfd, /* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */ + UINT au /* Allocation unit size [bytes] */ +) +{ + static const WORD vst[] = { 1024, 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 0}; + static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512}; + BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part; + DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect; + UINT i; + DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data; /* LBA */ + DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir; /* Size */ + FATFS *fs; + DSTATUS stat; + + + /* Check mounted drive and clear work area */ + if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + fs = FatFs[drv]; + if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED; + fs->fs_type = 0; + pdrv = LD2PD(drv); /* Physical drive */ + part = LD2PT(drv); /* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/ + + /* Get disk statics */ + stat = disk_initialize(pdrv); + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY; + if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; +#if _MAX_SS != 512 /* Get disk sector size */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS) + return FR_DISK_ERR; +#endif + if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) { + /* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */ + if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE]; + if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; /* No partition? */ + b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8); /* Volume start sector */ + n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12); /* Volume size */ + } else { + /* Create a partition in this function */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63; /* Volume start sector */ + n_vol -= b_vol; /* Volume size */ + } + + if (!au) { /* AU auto selection */ + vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512)); + for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ; + au = cst[i]; + } + au /= SS(fs); /* Number of sectors per cluster */ + if (au == 0) au = 1; + if (au > 128) au = 128; + + /* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */ + n_clst = n_vol / au; + fmt = FS_FAT12; + if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16; + if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32; + + /* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs); + n_rsv = 32; + n_dir = 0; + } else { + n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4; + n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs); + n_rsv = 1; + n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs); + } + b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv; /* FAT area start sector */ + b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS; /* Directory area start sector */ + b_data = b_dir + n_dir; /* Data area start sector */ + if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; /* Too small volume */ + + /* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1; + n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1); /* Next nearest erase block from current data start */ + n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS; + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { /* FAT32: Move FAT offset */ + n_rsv += n; + b_fat += n; + } else { /* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */ + n_fat += n; + } + + /* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */ + n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au; + if ( (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16) + || (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32)) + return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; + + switch (fmt) { /* Determine system ID for partition table */ + case FS_FAT12: sys = 0x01; break; + case FS_FAT16: sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break; + default: sys = 0x0C; + } + + if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) { + /* Update system ID in the partition table */ + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE]; + tbl[4] = sys; + if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR; + md = 0xF8; + } else { + if (sfd) { /* No partition table (SFD) */ + md = 0xF0; + } else { /* Create partition table (FDISK) */ + mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs)); + tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table; /* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */ + tbl[1] = 1; /* Partition start head */ + tbl[2] = 1; /* Partition start sector */ + tbl[3] = 0; /* Partition start cylinder */ + tbl[4] = sys; /* System type */ + tbl[5] = 254; /* Partition end head */ + n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255; + tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63); /* Partition end sector */ + tbl[7] = (BYTE)n; /* End cylinder */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63); /* Partition start in LBA */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol); /* Partition size in LBA */ + ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); /* MBR signature */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) /* Write it to the MBR sector */ + return FR_DISK_ERR; + md = 0xF8; + } + } + + /* Create BPB in the VBR */ + tbl = fs->win; /* Clear sector */ + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); + mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */ + i = SS(fs); /* Sector size */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i); + tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au; /* Sectors per cluster */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv); /* Reserved sectors */ + tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS; /* Number of FATs */ + i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR; /* Number of rootdir entries */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i); + if (n_vol < 0x10000) { /* Number of total sectors */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol); + } else { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol); + } + tbl[BPB_Media] = md; /* Media descriptor */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63); /* Number of sectors per track */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255); /* Number of heads */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol); /* Hidden sectors */ + n = get_fattime(); /* Use current time as VSN */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n); /* VSN */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2); /* Root directory start cluster (2) */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1); /* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6); /* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */ + tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80; /* Drive number */ + tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29; /* Extended boot signature */ + mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME " "FAT32 ", 19); /* Volume label, FAT signature */ + } else { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n); /* VSN */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80; /* Drive number */ + tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29; /* Extended boot signature */ + mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME " "FAT ", 19); /* Volume label, FAT signature */ + } + ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); /* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK) /* Write it to the VBR sector */ + return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) /* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */ + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1); + + /* Initialize FAT area */ + wsect = b_fat; + for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) { /* Initialize each FAT copy */ + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); /* 1st sector of the FAT */ + n = md; /* Media descriptor byte */ + if (fmt != FS_FAT32) { + n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00; + ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n); /* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */ + } else { + n |= 0xFFFFFF00; + ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n); /* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF); + ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF); /* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */ + } + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); /* Fill following FAT entries with zero */ + for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) { /* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + } + } + + /* Initialize root directory */ + i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir; + do { + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + } while (--i); + +#if _USE_ERASE /* Erase data area if needed */ + { + DWORD eb[2]; + + eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1; + disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb); + } +#endif + + /* Create FSInfo if needed */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252); + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272); + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1); /* Number of free clusters */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2); /* Last allocated cluster# */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1); /* Write original (VBR+1) */ + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1); /* Write backup (VBR+7) */ + } + + return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR; +} + + +#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Divide Physical Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_fdisk ( + BYTE pdrv, /* Physical drive number */ + const DWORD szt[], /* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */ + void* work /* Pointer to the working buffer */ +) +{ + UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl; + BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work; + DSTATUS stat; + DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part; + + + stat = disk_initialize(pdrv); + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY; + if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR; + + /* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */ + for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ; + if (n == 256) n--; + e_hd = n - 1; + sz_cyl = 63 * n; + tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl; + + /* Create partition table */ + mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS); + p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0; + for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) { + p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl; + if (!p_cyl) continue; + s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl; + sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl; + if (i == 0) { /* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */ + s_hd = 1; + s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63; + } else { + s_hd = 0; + } + e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1; + if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + + /* Set partition table */ + p[1] = s_hd; /* Start head */ + p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1); /* Start sector */ + p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl; /* Start cylinder */ + p[4] = 0x06; /* System type (temporary setting) */ + p[5] = e_hd; /* End head */ + p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63); /* End sector */ + p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl; /* End cylinder */ + ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part); /* Start sector in LBA */ + ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part); /* Partition size */ + + /* Next partition */ + b_cyl += p_cyl; + } + ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55); + + /* Write it to the MBR */ + return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK; +} + + +#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */ +#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +#if _USE_STRFUNC +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get a string from the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +TCHAR* f_gets ( + TCHAR* buff, /* Pointer to the string buffer to read */ + int len, /* Size of string buffer (characters) */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + int n = 0; + TCHAR c, *p = buff; + BYTE s[2]; + UINT rc; + + + while (n < len - 1) { /* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */ + f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc); + if (rc != 1) break; /* Break on EOF or error */ + c = s[0]; +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */ + if (c >= 0x80) { + if (c < 0xC0) continue; /* Skip stray trailer */ + if (c < 0xE0) { /* Two-byte sequence */ + f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc); + if (rc != 1) break; + c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F); + if (c < 0x80) c = '?'; + } else { + if (c < 0xF0) { /* Three-byte sequence */ + f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc); + if (rc != 2) break; + c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F); + if (c < 0x800) c = '?'; + } else { /* Reject four-byte sequence */ + c = '?'; + } + } + } +#endif +#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2 + if (c == '\r') continue; /* Strip '\r' */ +#endif + *p++ = c; + n++; + if (c == '\n') break; /* Break on EOL */ + } + *p = 0; + return n ? buff : 0; /* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */ +} + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +#include <stdarg.h> +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a character to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_putc ( + TCHAR c, /* A character to be output */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + UINT bw, btw; + BYTE s[3]; + + +#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2 + if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil); /* LF -> CRLF conversion */ +#endif + +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */ + if (c < 0x80) { /* 7-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)c; + btw = 1; + } else { + if (c < 0x800) { /* 11-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6)); + s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F)); + btw = 2; + } else { /* 16-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12)); + s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F)); + s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F)); + btw = 3; + } + } +#else /* Write the character without conversion */ + s[0] = (BYTE)c; + btw = 1; +#endif + f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw); /* Write the char to the file */ + return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF; /* Return the result */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a string to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_puts ( + const TCHAR* str, /* Pointer to the string to be output */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + int n; + + + for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) { + if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF; + } + return n; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a formatted string to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_printf ( + FIL* fil, /* Pointer to the file object */ + const TCHAR* str, /* Pointer to the format string */ + ... /* Optional arguments... */ +) +{ + va_list arp; + BYTE f, r; + UINT i, j, w; + ULONG v; + TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p; + int res, chc, cc; + + + va_start(arp, str); + + for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) { + c = *str++; + if (c == 0) break; /* End of string */ + if (c != '%') { /* Non escape character */ + cc = f_putc(c, fil); + if (cc != EOF) cc = 1; + continue; + } + w = f = 0; + c = *str++; + if (c == '0') { /* Flag: '0' padding */ + f = 1; c = *str++; + } else { + if (c == '-') { /* Flag: left justified */ + f = 2; c = *str++; + } + } + while (IsDigit(c)) { /* Precision */ + w = w * 10 + c - '0'; + c = *str++; + } + if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') { /* Prefix: Size is long int */ + f |= 4; c = *str++; + } + if (!c) break; + d = c; + if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20; + switch (d) { /* Type is... */ + case 'S' : /* String */ + p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*); + for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ; + chc = 0; + if (!(f & 2)) { + while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + } + chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil)); + while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + if (cc != EOF) cc = chc; + continue; + case 'C' : /* Character */ + cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue; + case 'B' : /* Binary */ + r = 2; break; + case 'O' : /* Octal */ + r = 8; break; + case 'D' : /* Signed decimal */ + case 'U' : /* Unsigned decimal */ + r = 10; break; + case 'X' : /* Hexdecimal */ + r = 16; break; + default: /* Unknown type (pass-through) */ + cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue; + } + + /* Get an argument and put it in numeral */ + v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int)); + if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) { + v = 0 - v; + f |= 8; + } + i = 0; + do { + d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r; + if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07; + s[i++] = d + '0'; + } while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]); + if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-'; + j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' '; + res = 0; + while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil)); + do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i); + while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + if (cc != EOF) cc = res; + } + + va_end(arp); + return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res; +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ +#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..627cbaabe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h @@ -0,0 +1,337 @@ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module include file R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems. +/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial +/ developments under license policy of following terms. +/ +/ Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. +/ +/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. +/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for +/ personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. +/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. +/ +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _FATFS +#define _FATFS 4004 /* Revision ID */ + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +#include "integer.h" /* Basic integer types */ +#include "ffconf.h" /* FatFs configuration options */ + +#if _FATFS != _FFCONF +#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h). +#endif + + + +/* Definitions of volume management */ + +#if _MULTI_PARTITION /* Multiple partition configuration */ +typedef struct { + BYTE pd; /* Physical drive number */ + BYTE pt; /* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */ +} PARTITION; +extern PARTITION VolToPart[]; /* Volume - Partition resolution table */ +#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd) /* Get physical drive number */ +#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt) /* Get partition index */ + +#else /* Single partition configuration */ +#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol) /* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */ +#define LD2PT(vol) 0 /* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */ + +#endif + + + +/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */ + +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Unicode string */ +#if !_USE_LFN +#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg. +#endif +#ifndef _INC_TCHAR +typedef WCHAR TCHAR; +#define _T(x) L ## x +#define _TEXT(x) L ## x +#endif + +#else /* ANSI/OEM string */ +#ifndef _INC_TCHAR +typedef char TCHAR; +#define _T(x) x +#define _TEXT(x) x +#endif + +#endif + + + +/* File system object structure (FATFS) */ + +typedef struct { + BYTE fs_type; /* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */ + BYTE drv; /* Physical drive number */ + BYTE csize; /* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */ + BYTE n_fats; /* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */ + BYTE wflag; /* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */ + BYTE fsi_flag; /* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */ + WORD id; /* File system mount ID */ + WORD n_rootdir; /* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */ +#if _MAX_SS != 512 + WORD ssize; /* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */ +#endif +#if _FS_REENTRANT + _SYNC_t sobj; /* Identifier of sync object */ +#endif +#if !_FS_READONLY + DWORD last_clust; /* Last allocated cluster */ + DWORD free_clust; /* Number of free clusters */ + DWORD fsi_sector; /* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */ +#endif +#if _FS_RPATH + DWORD cdir; /* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */ +#endif + DWORD n_fatent; /* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */ + DWORD fsize; /* Sectors per FAT */ + DWORD fatbase; /* FAT start sector */ + DWORD dirbase; /* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */ + DWORD database; /* Data start sector */ + DWORD winsect; /* Current sector appearing in the win[] */ + BYTE win[_MAX_SS]; /* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */ +} FATFS; + + + +/* File object structure (FIL) */ + +typedef struct { + FATFS* fs; /* Pointer to the related file system object */ + WORD id; /* File system mount ID of the related file system object */ + BYTE flag; /* File status flags */ + BYTE pad1; + DWORD fptr; /* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */ + DWORD fsize; /* File size */ + DWORD sclust; /* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */ + DWORD clust; /* Current cluster of fpter */ + DWORD dsect; /* Current data sector of fpter */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + DWORD dir_sect; /* Sector containing the directory entry */ + BYTE* dir_ptr; /* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */ +#endif +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + DWORD* cltbl; /* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */ +#endif +#if _FS_LOCK + UINT lockid; /* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */ +#endif +#if !_FS_TINY + BYTE buf[_MAX_SS]; /* File data read/write buffer */ +#endif +} FIL; + + + +/* Directory object structure (DIR) */ + +typedef struct { + FATFS* fs; /* Pointer to the owner file system object */ + WORD id; /* Owner file system mount ID */ + WORD index; /* Current read/write index number */ + DWORD sclust; /* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */ + DWORD clust; /* Current cluster */ + DWORD sect; /* Current sector */ + BYTE* dir; /* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */ + BYTE* fn; /* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */ +#if _USE_LFN + WCHAR* lfn; /* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */ + WORD lfn_idx; /* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */ +#endif +} DIR; + + + +/* File status structure (FILINFO) */ + +typedef struct { + DWORD fsize; /* File size */ + WORD fdate; /* Last modified date */ + WORD ftime; /* Last modified time */ + BYTE fattrib; /* Attribute */ + TCHAR fname[13]; /* Short file name (8.3 format) */ +#if _USE_LFN + TCHAR* lfname; /* Pointer to the LFN buffer */ + UINT lfsize; /* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */ +#endif +} FILINFO; + + + +/* File function return code (FRESULT) */ + +typedef enum { + FR_OK = 0, /* (0) Succeeded */ + FR_DISK_ERR, /* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */ + FR_INT_ERR, /* (2) Assertion failed */ + FR_NOT_READY, /* (3) The physical drive cannot work */ + FR_NO_FILE, /* (4) Could not find the file */ + FR_NO_PATH, /* (5) Could not find the path */ + FR_INVALID_NAME, /* (6) The path name format is invalid */ + FR_DENIED, /* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */ + FR_EXIST, /* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */ + FR_INVALID_OBJECT, /* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */ + FR_WRITE_PROTECTED, /* (10) The physical drive is write protected */ + FR_INVALID_DRIVE, /* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */ + FR_NOT_ENABLED, /* (12) The volume has no work area */ + FR_NO_FILESYSTEM, /* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */ + FR_MKFS_ABORTED, /* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */ + FR_TIMEOUT, /* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */ + FR_LOCKED, /* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */ + FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE, /* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */ + FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES, /* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */ + FR_INVALID_PARAMETER /* (19) Given parameter is invalid */ +} FRESULT; + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FatFs module application interface */ + +FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*); /* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */ +FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE); /* Open or create a file */ +FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*); /* Read data from a file */ +FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD); /* Move file pointer of a file object */ +FRESULT f_close (FIL*); /* Close an open file object */ +FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*); /* Open an existing directory */ +FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*); /* Read a directory item */ +FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*); /* Get file status */ +FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*); /* Write data to a file */ +FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**); /* Get number of free clusters on the drive */ +FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*); /* Truncate file */ +FRESULT f_sync (FIL*); /* Flush cached data of a writing file */ +FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*); /* Delete an existing file or directory */ +FRESULT f_mkdir (const TCHAR*); /* Create a new directory */ +FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE); /* Change attribute of the file/dir */ +FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*); /* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */ +FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*); /* Rename/Move a file or directory */ +FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE); /* Change current drive */ +FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*); /* Change current directory */ +FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT); /* Get current directory */ +FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*); /* Forward data to the stream */ +FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT); /* Create a file system on the drive */ +FRESULT f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*); /* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */ +int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*); /* Put a character to the file */ +int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*); /* Put a string to the file */ +int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...); /* Put a formatted string to the file */ +TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*); /* Get a string from the file */ + +#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0) +#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0) +#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr) +#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize) + +#ifndef EOF +#define EOF (-1) +#endif + + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Additional user defined functions */ + +/* RTC function */ +#if !_FS_READONLY +DWORD get_fattime (void); +#endif + +/* Unicode support functions */ +#if _USE_LFN /* Unicode - OEM code conversion */ +WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT); /* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */ +WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR); /* Unicode upper-case conversion */ +#if _USE_LFN == 3 /* Memory functions */ +void* ff_memalloc (UINT); /* Allocate memory block */ +void ff_memfree (void*); /* Free memory block */ +#endif +#endif + +/* Sync functions */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT +int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */ +int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t); /* Lock sync object */ +void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t); /* Unlock sync object */ +int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t); /* Delete a sync object */ +#endif + + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Flags and offset address */ + + +/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */ + +#define FA_READ 0x01 +#define FA_OPEN_EXISTING 0x00 +#define FA__ERROR 0x80 + +#if !_FS_READONLY +#define FA_WRITE 0x02 +#define FA_CREATE_NEW 0x04 +#define FA_CREATE_ALWAYS 0x08 +#define FA_OPEN_ALWAYS 0x10 +#define FA__WRITTEN 0x20 +#define FA__DIRTY 0x40 +#endif + + +/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */ + +#define FS_FAT12 1 +#define FS_FAT16 2 +#define FS_FAT32 3 + + +/* File attribute bits for directory entry */ + +#define AM_RDO 0x01 /* Read only */ +#define AM_HID 0x02 /* Hidden */ +#define AM_SYS 0x04 /* System */ +#define AM_VOL 0x08 /* Volume label */ +#define AM_LFN 0x0F /* LFN entry */ +#define AM_DIR 0x10 /* Directory */ +#define AM_ARC 0x20 /* Archive */ +#define AM_MASK 0x3F /* Mask of defined bits */ + + +/* Fast seek feature */ +#define CREATE_LINKMAP 0xFFFFFFFF + + + +/*--------------------------------*/ +/* Multi-byte word access macros */ + +#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1 /* Enable word access to the FAT structure */ +#define LD_WORD(ptr) (WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define LD_DWORD(ptr) (DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define ST_WORD(ptr,val) *(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val) +#define ST_DWORD(ptr,val) *(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val) +#else /* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */ +#define LD_WORD(ptr) (WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define LD_DWORD(ptr) (DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define ST_WORD(ptr,val) *(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8) +#define ST_DWORD(ptr,val) *(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24) +#endif + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif /* _FATFS */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..63a4e78236 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ +/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to +/ the configuration options. +/ +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#ifndef _FFCONF +#define _FFCONF 4004 /* Revision ID */ + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Function and Buffer Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _FS_TINY 1 /* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */ +/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system +/ object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file +/ data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */ + + +#define _FS_READONLY 0 /* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */ +/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes +/ writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename, +/ f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */ + + +#define _FS_MINIMIZE 2 /* 0 to 3 */ +/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions. +/ +/ 0: Full function. +/ 1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename +/ are removed. +/ 2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1. +/ 3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */ + + +#define _USE_STRFUNC 0 /* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */ +/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */ + + +#define _USE_MKFS 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */ + + +#define _USE_FORWARD 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */ + + +#define _USE_FASTSEEK 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Locale and Namespace Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _CODE_PAGE 932 +/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system. +/ Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure. +/ +/ 932 - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 936 - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 949 - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 950 - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 1250 - Central Europe (Windows) +/ 1251 - Cyrillic (Windows) +/ 1252 - Latin 1 (Windows) +/ 1253 - Greek (Windows) +/ 1254 - Turkish (Windows) +/ 1255 - Hebrew (Windows) +/ 1256 - Arabic (Windows) +/ 1257 - Baltic (Windows) +/ 1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows) +/ 437 - U.S. (OEM) +/ 720 - Arabic (OEM) +/ 737 - Greek (OEM) +/ 775 - Baltic (OEM) +/ 850 - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) +/ 858 - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) +/ 852 - Latin 2 (OEM) +/ 855 - Cyrillic (OEM) +/ 866 - Russian (OEM) +/ 857 - Turkish (OEM) +/ 862 - Hebrew (OEM) +/ 874 - Thai (OEM, Windows) +/ 1 - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.) +*/ + + +#define _USE_LFN 0 /* 0 to 3 */ +#define _MAX_LFN 255 /* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */ +/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support. +/ +/ 0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect. +/ 1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant. +/ 2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK. +/ 3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP. +/ +/ The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN, +/ Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added +/ to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions +/ ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */ + + +#define _LFN_UNICODE 0 /* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */ +/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode, +/ enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */ + + +#define _FS_RPATH 0 /* 0 to 2 */ +/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature. +/ +/ 0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions. +/ 1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available. +/ 2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1. +/ +/ Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Physical Drive Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _VOLUMES 1 +/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */ + + +#define _MAX_SS 512 /* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */ +/* Maximum sector size to be handled. +/ Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be +/ required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk. +/ When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size +/ and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted to the disk_ioctl function. */ + + +#define _MULTI_PARTITION 0 /* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */ +/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and +/ it can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1, each volume +/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */ + + +#define _USE_ERASE 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command +/ should be added to the disk_ioctl functio. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ System Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _WORD_ACCESS 1 /* 0 or 1 */ +/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS +/ option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume. +/ +/ 0: Byte-by-byte access. +/ 1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met. +/ +/ When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word +/ access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0. +/ If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the +/ performance and code size. +*/ + + +/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as +/ windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */ + +#define _FS_REENTRANT 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +#define _FS_TIMEOUT 1000 /* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */ +#define _SYNC_t HANDLE /* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */ + +/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module. +/ +/ 0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect. +/ 1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers, +/ ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj +/ function must be added to the project. */ + + +#define _FS_LOCK 0 /* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */ +/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater. + The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */ + + +#endif /* _FFCONFIG */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5408fe6b3e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +/*-------------------------------------------*/ +/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */ +/*-------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _INTEGER +#define _INTEGER + +#ifdef _WIN32 /* FatFs development platform */ + +#include <windows.h> +#include <tchar.h> + +#else /* Embedded platform */ + +/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */ +typedef int INT; +typedef unsigned int UINT; + +/* These types must be 8-bit integer */ +typedef char CHAR; +typedef unsigned char UCHAR; +typedef unsigned char BYTE; + +/* These types must be 16-bit integer */ +typedef short SHORT; +typedef unsigned short USHORT; +typedef unsigned short WORD; +typedef unsigned short WCHAR; + +/* These types must be 32-bit integer */ +typedef long LONG; +typedef unsigned long ULONG; +typedef unsigned long DWORD; + +#endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5291eaf3c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +/* + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +#include "RTC.h" + +#if defined(DUMMY_RTC) + +/** Current dummy RTC time and date */ +static volatile TimeDate_t DummyRTC_Count; + +void RTC_Init(void) +{ + DummyRTC_Count.Hour = 0; + DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0; + DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0; + DummyRTC_Count.Day = 1; + DummyRTC_Count.Month = 1; + DummyRTC_Count.Year = 00; +} + +void RTC_Tick500ms(void) +{ + static bool HalfSecondElapsed = false; + + HalfSecondElapsed = !HalfSecondElapsed; + if (HalfSecondElapsed == false) + return; + + if (++DummyRTC_Count.Second < 60) + return; + + DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0; + + if (++DummyRTC_Count.Minute < 60) + return; + + DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0; + + if (++DummyRTC_Count.Hour < 24) + return; + + DummyRTC_Count.Hour = 0; + + static const char MonthLength[12] = {31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31}; + uint8_t DaysInMonth = MonthLength[DummyRTC_Count.Month - 1]; + + /* Check if we need to account for a leap year */ + if ((DummyRTC_Count.Month == 2) && + ((!(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 400)) || ((DummyRTC_Count.Year % 100) && !(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 4)))) + { + DaysInMonth++; + } + + if (++DummyRTC_Count.Day <= DaysInMonth) + return; + + DummyRTC_Count.Day = 1; + + if (++DummyRTC_Count.Month <= 12) + return; + + DummyRTC_Count.Month = 1; + DummyRTC_Count.Year++; +} + +bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate) +{ + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + DummyRTC_Count = *NewTimeDate; + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + return true; +} + +bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate) +{ + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + *TimeDate = DummyRTC_Count; + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + return true; +} + +#else + +void RTC_Init(void) +{ + /* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */ +} + +void RTC_Tick500ms(void) +{ + /* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */ +} + +bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate) +{ + DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t NewRegValues; + const uint8_t WriteAddress = 0; + + // Convert new time data to the DS1307's time register layout + NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec = (NewTimeDate->Second / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec = (NewTimeDate->Second % 10); + NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.CH = false; + NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin = (NewTimeDate->Minute / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min = (NewTimeDate->Minute % 10); + NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour = (NewTimeDate->Hour / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour = (NewTimeDate->Hour % 10); + NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TwelveHourMode = false; + + // Convert new date data to the DS1307's date register layout + NewRegValues.Byte4.Fields.DayOfWeek = 0; + NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay = (NewTimeDate->Day / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day = (NewTimeDate->Day % 10); + NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth = (NewTimeDate->Month / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month = (NewTimeDate->Month % 10); + NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear = (NewTimeDate->Year / 10); + NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year = (NewTimeDate->Year % 10); + + // Write the new Time and Date into the DS1307 + if (TWI_WritePacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &WriteAddress, sizeof(WriteAddress), + (uint8_t*)&NewRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError) + { + return false; + } + + return true; +} + +bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate) +{ + DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t CurrentRegValues; + const uint8_t ReadAddress = 0; + + // Read in the stored Time and Date from the DS1307 + if (TWI_ReadPacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &ReadAddress, sizeof(ReadAddress), + (uint8_t*)&CurrentRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError) + { + return false; + } + + // Convert stored time value into decimal + TimeDate->Second = (CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec; + TimeDate->Minute = (CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min; + TimeDate->Hour = (CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour; + + // Convert stored date value into decimal + TimeDate->Day = (CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day; + TimeDate->Month = (CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month; + TimeDate->Year = (CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year; + + return true; +} + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f35b8ff1ec --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +/* + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +#ifndef _RTC_H_ +#define _RTC_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Hour; + uint8_t Minute; + uint8_t Second; + uint8_t Day; + uint8_t Month; + uint8_t Year; + } TimeDate_t; + + typedef struct + { + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Sec : 4; + unsigned TenSec : 3; + unsigned CH : 1; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte1; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Min : 4; + unsigned TenMin : 3; + unsigned Reserved : 1; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte2; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Hour : 4; + unsigned TenHour : 2; + unsigned TwelveHourMode : 1; + unsigned Reserved : 1; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte3; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned DayOfWeek : 3; + unsigned Reserved : 5; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte4; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Day : 4; + unsigned TenDay : 2; + unsigned Reserved : 2; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte5; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Month : 4; + unsigned TenMonth : 1; + unsigned Reserved : 3; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte6; + + union + { + struct + { + unsigned Year : 4; + unsigned TenYear : 4; + } Fields; + + uint8_t IntVal; + } Byte7; + } DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** TWI address of the DS1307 device on the bus. */ + #define DS1307_ADDRESS 0xD0 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void RTC_Init(void); + void RTC_Tick500ms(void); + bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate); + bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4fbbfd60e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + .DeviceType = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK, + .PeripheralQualifier = 0, + + .Removable = true, + + .Version = 0, + + .ResponseDataFormat = 2, + .NormACA = false, + .TrmTsk = false, + .AERC = false, + + .AdditionalLength = 0x1F, + + .SoftReset = false, + .CmdQue = false, + .Linked = false, + .Sync = false, + .WideBus16Bit = false, + .WideBus32Bit = false, + .RelAddr = false, + + .VendorID = "LUFA", + .ProductID = "Dataflash Disk", + .RevisionID = {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + .ResponseCode = 0x70, + .AdditionalLength = 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise + */ +bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT: + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData)); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData)); + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1); + uint32_t MediaBlockSize = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE; + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the + * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is + * supported. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */ + if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2))) + { + /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */ + if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation())) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * \param[in] IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint32_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Check if the disk is write protected or not */ + if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT, + SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]); + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + TotalBlocks = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]); + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + else + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about + * the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */ + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4; + + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..494b31bf8c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../TempDataLogger.h" + #include "../Descriptors.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param[in] Key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param[in] Acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param[in] Aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual) do { SenseData.SenseKey = (Key); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (Acode); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0) + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK 0x00 + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM 0x05 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead); + static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1dc267a6fc --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c @@ -0,0 +1,331 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the TemperatureDataLogger project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "TempDataLogger.h" + +/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .TotalLUNs = 1, + }, + }; + +/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */ +static uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE]; + +/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_HID, + .ReportINEndpoint = + { + .Address = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = GENERIC_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .PrevReportINBuffer = PrevHIDReportBuffer, + .PrevReportINBufferSize = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer), + }, + }; + +/** Non-volatile Logging Interval value in EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */ +static uint8_t EEMEM LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL; + +/** SRAM Logging Interval value fetched from EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */ +static uint8_t LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM; + +/** Total number of 500ms logging ticks elapsed since the last log value was recorded */ +static uint16_t CurrentLoggingTicks; + +/** FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */ +static FATFS DiskFATState; + +/** FAT Fs structure to hold a FAT file handle for the log data write destination. */ +static FIL TempLogFile; + + +/** ISR to handle the 500ms ticks for sampling and data logging */ +ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Signal a 500ms tick has elapsed to the RTC */ + RTC_Tick500ms(); + + /* Check to see if the logging interval has expired */ + if (++CurrentLoggingTicks < LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM) + return; + + /* Reset log tick counter to prepare for next logging interval */ + CurrentLoggingTicks = 0; + + uint8_t LEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs(); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + /* Only log when not connected to a USB host */ + if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached) + { + TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate; + RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate); + + char LineBuffer[100]; + uint16_t BytesWritten; + + BytesWritten = sprintf(LineBuffer, "%02d/%02d/20%02d, %02d:%02d:%02d, %d Degrees\r\n", + CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year, + CurrentTimeDate.Hour, CurrentTimeDate.Minute, CurrentTimeDate.Second, + Temperature_GetTemperature()); + + f_write(&TempLogFile, LineBuffer, BytesWritten, &BytesWritten); + f_sync(&TempLogFile); + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask); +} + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + /* Fetch logging interval from EEPROM */ + LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = eeprom_read_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM); + + /* Check if the logging interval is invalid (0xFF) indicating that the EEPROM is blank */ + if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM == 0xFF) + LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL; + + /* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */ + OpenLogFile(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface); + HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Opens the log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition according to the current date */ +void OpenLogFile(void) +{ + char LogFileName[12]; + + /* Get the current date for the filename as "DDMMYY.csv" */ + TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate; + RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate); + sprintf(LogFileName, "%02d%02d%02d.csv", CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year); + + /* Mount the storage device, open the file */ + f_mount(0, &DiskFATState); + f_open(&TempLogFile, LogFileName, FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_WRITE); + f_lseek(&TempLogFile, TempLogFile.fsize); +} + +/** Closes the open data log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition */ +void CloseLogFile(void) +{ + /* Sync any data waiting to be written, unmount the storage device */ + f_sync(&TempLogFile); + f_close(&TempLogFile); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128); + Temperature_Init(); + Dataflash_Init(); + USB_Init(); + TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_4, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(4, 50000)); + RTC_Init(); + + /* 500ms logging interval timer configuration */ + OCR1A = (((F_CPU / 256) / 2) - 1); + TCCR1B = (1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12); + TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A); + + /* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */ + if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation())) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); + } + + /* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */ + DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + /* Close the log file so that the host has exclusive file system access */ + CloseLogFile(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + + /* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */ + OpenLogFile(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface); + ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface); + HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface); +} + +/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + return CommandSuccess; +} + +/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced + * \param[in,out] ReportID Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID + * \param[in] ReportType Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[out] ReportData Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored + * \param[out] ReportSize Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent) + * + * \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent + */ +bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize) +{ + Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData; + + RTC_GetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate); + + ReportParams->LogInterval500MS = LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM; + + *ReportSize = sizeof(Device_Report_t); + return true; +} + +/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host. + * + * \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced + * \param[in] ReportID Report ID of the received report from the host + * \param[in] ReportType The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature + * \param[in] ReportData Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored + * \param[in] ReportSize Size in bytes of the received HID report + */ +void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize) +{ + Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData; + + RTC_SetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate); + + /* If the logging interval has changed from its current value, write it to EEPROM */ + if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM != ReportParams->LogInterval500MS) + { + LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = ReportParams->LogInterval500MS; + eeprom_update_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM, LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM); + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..90b9b4ea63 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TempDataLogger.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_ +#define _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include "Lib/SCSI.h" + #include "Lib/DataflashManager.h" + #include "Lib/FATFs/ff.h" + #include "Lib/RTC.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY LEDS_LED2 + + /** Default log interval when the EEPROM is blank, in 500ms ticks. */ + #define DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL 10 + + /** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */ + #define DISK_READ_ONLY false + + /* Type Defines: */ + typedef struct + { + TimeDate_t TimeDate; + uint8_t LogInterval500MS; + } Device_Report_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void OpenLogFile(void); + void CloseLogFile(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + + bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + uint8_t* const ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + void* ReportData, + uint16_t* const ReportSize); + void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo, + const uint8_t ReportID, + const uint8_t ReportType, + const void* ReportData, + const uint16_t ReportSize); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bdf8db0eed --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + + Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + + This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates +the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public +License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below. + + 0. Additional Definitions. + + As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser +General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU +General Public License. + + "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License, +other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below. + + An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided +by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. +Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode +of using an interface provided by the Library. + + A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an +Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library +with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked +Version". + + The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the +Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code +for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are +based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version. + + The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the +object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data +and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the +Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work. + + 1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL. + + You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License +without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL. + + 2. Conveying Modified Versions. + + If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a +facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application +that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the +facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified +version: + + a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to + ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the + function or data, the facility still operates, and performs + whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or + + b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of + this License applicable to that copy. + + 3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files. + + The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from +a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object +code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated +material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure +layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates +(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following: + + a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the + Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are + covered by this License. + + b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license + document. + + 4. Combined Works. + + You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, +taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the +portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse +engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of +the following: + + a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that + the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are + covered by this License. + + b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license + document. + + c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during + execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among + these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the + copies of the GNU GPL and this license document. + + d) Do one of the following: + + 0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this + License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form + suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to + recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of + the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the + manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying + Corresponding Source. + + 1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the + Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time + a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer + system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version + of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked + Version. + + e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise + be required to provide such information under section 6 of the + GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is + necessary to install and execute a modified version of the + Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the + Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If + you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany + the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application + Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation + Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL + for conveying Corresponding Source.) + + 5. Combined Libraries. + + You may place library facilities that are a work based on the +Library side by side in a single library together with other library +facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this +License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your +choice, if you do both of the following: + + a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based + on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities, + conveyed under the terms of this License. + + b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it + is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the + accompanying uncombined form of the same work. + + 6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License. + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new +versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may +differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the +Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version +of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version" +applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and +conditions either of that published version or of any later version +published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you +received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser +General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser +General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide +whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall +apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is +permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the +Library. + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..10926e87f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt @@ -0,0 +1,675 @@ + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 3, 29 June 2007 + + Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for +software and other kinds of works. + + The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed +to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast, +the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to +share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free +software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the +GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to +any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you +want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new +free programs, and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you +these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have +certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if +you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same +freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive +or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they +know their rights. + + Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: +(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License +giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. + + For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains +that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and +authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as +changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to +authors of previous versions. + + Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run +modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer +can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of +protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic +pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to +use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we +have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those +products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we +stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions +of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users. + + Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. +States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of +software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to +avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could +make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that +patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + 0. Definitions. + + "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. + + "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of +works, such as semiconductor masks. + + "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this +License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and +"recipients" may be individuals or organizations. + + To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work +in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an +exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the +earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work. + + A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based +on the Program. + + To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without +permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for +infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a +computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, +distribution (with or without modification), making available to the +public, and in some countries other activities as well. + + To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other +parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through +a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. + + An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices" +to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible +feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) +tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the +extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the +work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If +the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a +menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion. + + 1. Source Code. + + The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work +for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source +form of a work. + + A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official +standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of +interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that +is widely used among developers working in that language. + + The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other +than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of +packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major +Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that +Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an +implementation is available to the public in source code form. A +"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component +(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system +(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to +produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. + + The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all +the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable +work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to +control those activities. However, it does not include the work's +System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free +programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but +which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source +includes interface definition files associated with source files for +the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically +linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, +such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those +subprograms and other parts of the work. + + The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users +can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding +Source. + + The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that +same work. + + 2. Basic Permissions. + + All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of +copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated +conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited +permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a +covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its +content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your +rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. + + You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not +convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains +in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose +of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you +with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with +the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do +not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works +for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction +and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of +your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you. + + Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under +the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 +makes it unnecessary. + + 3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law. + + No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological +measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article +11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or +similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such +measures. + + When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid +circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention +is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to +the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or +modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's +users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of +technological measures. + + 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies. + + You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you +receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and +appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; +keep intact all notices stating that this License and any +non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; +keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all +recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. + + You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, +and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. + + 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. + + You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to +produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the +terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified + it, and giving a relevant date. + + b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is + released under this License and any conditions added under section + 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to + "keep intact all notices". + + c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this + License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This + License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7 + additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts, + regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no + permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not + invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. + + d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display + Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive + interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your + work need not make them do so. + + A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent +works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work, +and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program, +in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an +"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not +used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users +beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work +in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other +parts of the aggregate. + + 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms. + + You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms +of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the +machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, +in one of these ways: + + a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the + Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium + customarily used for software interchange. + + b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product + (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a + written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as + long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product + model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a + copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the + product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical + medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no + more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this + conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the + Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge. + + c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the + written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This + alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and + only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord + with subsection 6b. + + d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated + place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the + Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no + further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the + Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to + copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source + may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party) + that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain + clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the + Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the + Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is + available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements. + + e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided + you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding + Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no + charge under subsection 6d. + + A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded +from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be +included in conveying the object code work. + + A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any +tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, +or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation +into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product, +doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular +product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a +typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status +of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user +actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product +is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial +commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent +the only significant mode of use of the product. + + "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods, +procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install +and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from +a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must +suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object +code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because +modification has been made. + + If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or +specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as +part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the +User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a +fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the +Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied +by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply +if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install +modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has +been installed in ROM). + + The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a +requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates +for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for +the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a +network may be denied when the modification itself materially and +adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and +protocols for communication across the network. + + Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided, +in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly +documented (and with an implementation available to the public in +source code form), and must require no special password or key for +unpacking, reading or copying. + + 7. Additional Terms. + + "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this +License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. +Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall +be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent +that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions +apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately +under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by +this License without regard to the additional permissions. + + When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option +remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of +it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own +removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place +additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work, +for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you +add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of +that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: + + a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the + terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or + + b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or + author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal + Notices displayed by works containing it; or + + c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or + requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in + reasonable ways as different from the original version; or + + d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or + authors of the material; or + + e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some + trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or + + f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that + material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of + it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for + any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on + those licensors and authors. + + All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further +restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you +received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is +governed by this License along with a term that is a further +restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains +a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this +License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms +of that license document, provided that the further restriction does +not survive such relicensing or conveying. + + If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you +must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the +additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating +where to find the applicable terms. + + Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the +form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; +the above requirements apply either way. + + 8. Termination. + + You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly +provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or +modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under +this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third +paragraph of section 11). + + However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your +license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) +provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and +finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright +holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means +prior to 60 days after the cessation. + + Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is +reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the +violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have +received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that +copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after +your receipt of the notice. + + Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the +licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under +this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently +reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same +material under section 10. + + 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies. + + You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or +run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work +occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission +to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, +nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or +modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do +not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a +covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. + + 10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients. + + Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically +receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and +propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible +for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. + + An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an +organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an +organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered +work results from an entity transaction, each party to that +transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever +licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could +give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the +Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if +the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts. + + You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the +rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may +not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of +rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation +(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that +any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for +sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it. + + 11. Patents. + + A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this +License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The +work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". + + A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims +owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or +hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted +by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, +but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a +consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For +purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant +patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of +this License. + + Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free +patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to +make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and +propagate the contents of its contributor version. + + In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express +agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent +(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to +sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a +party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a +patent against the party. + + If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license, +and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone +to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a +publicly available network server or other readily accessible means, +then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so +available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the +patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner +consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent +license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have +actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the +covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work +in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that +country that you have reason to believe are valid. + + If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or +arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a +covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties +receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify +or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license +you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered +work and works based on it. + + A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within +the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is +conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are +specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered +work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is +in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment +to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying +the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the +parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory +patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work +conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily +for and in connection with specific products or compilations that +contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement, +or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007. + + Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting +any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may +otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law. + + 12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom. + + If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a +covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may +not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you +to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey +the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this +License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program. + + 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License. + + Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have +permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed +under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single +combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this +License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, +but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, +section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the +combination as such. + + 14. Revised Versions of this License. + + The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of +the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + + Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the +Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General +Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the +option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered +version or of any later version published by the Free Software +Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the +GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published +by the Free Software Foundation. + + If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future +versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's +public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you +to choose that version for the Program. + + Later license versions may give you additional or different +permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any +author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a +later version. + + 15. Disclaimer of Warranty. + + THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY +APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT +HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY +OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, +THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR +PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM +IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF +ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 16. Limitation of Liability. + + IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS +THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY +GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE +USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF +DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD +PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), +EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF +SUCH DAMAGES. + + 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. + + If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided +above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, +reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates +an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the +Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a +copy of the Program in return for a fee. + + END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS + + How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs + + If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest +possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it +free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. + + To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest +to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively +state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least +the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. + + <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.> + Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + + This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify + it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by + the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or + (at your option) any later version. + + This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, + but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of + MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the + GNU General Public License for more details. + + You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License + along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + +Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. + + If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short +notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: + + <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> + This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. + This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it + under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. + +The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate +parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands +might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box". + + You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school, +if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. +For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see +<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. + + The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program +into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you +may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with +the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General +Public License instead of this License. But first, please read +<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>. + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..58fac51449 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +namespace Project1HostApp +{ + partial class frmDataloggerSettings + { + /// <summary> + /// Required designer variable. + /// </summary> + private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null; + + /// <summary> + /// Clean up any resources being used. + /// </summary> + /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param> + protected override void Dispose(bool disposing) + { + if (disposing && (components != null)) + { + components.Dispose(); + } + base.Dispose(disposing); + } + + #region Windows Form Designer generated code + + /// <summary> + /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify + /// the contents of this method with the code editor. + /// </summary> + private void InitializeComponent() + { + this.btnSetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button(); + this.dtpTime = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker(); + this.lblTime = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.lblLoggingInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.nudLogInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown(); + this.lblSeconds = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.btnGetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button(); + this.lblDate = new System.Windows.Forms.Label(); + this.dtpDate = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker(); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).BeginInit(); + this.SuspendLayout(); + // + // btnSetValues + // + this.btnSetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(168, 136); + this.btnSetValues.Name = "btnSetValues"; + this.btnSetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35); + this.btnSetValues.TabIndex = 0; + this.btnSetValues.Text = "Set Values"; + this.btnSetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true; + this.btnSetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnSetValues_Click); + // + // dtpTime + // + this.dtpTime.CustomFormat = ""; + this.dtpTime.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Time; + this.dtpTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 61); + this.dtpTime.Name = "dtpTime"; + this.dtpTime.ShowUpDown = true; + this.dtpTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20); + this.dtpTime.TabIndex = 1; + // + // lblTime + // + this.lblTime.AutoSize = true; + this.lblTime.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 67); + this.lblTime.Name = "lblTime"; + this.lblTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13); + this.lblTime.TabIndex = 2; + this.lblTime.Text = "Device Time:"; + // + // lblLoggingInterval + // + this.lblLoggingInterval.AutoSize = true; + this.lblLoggingInterval.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblLoggingInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 101); + this.lblLoggingInterval.Name = "lblLoggingInterval"; + this.lblLoggingInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(103, 13); + this.lblLoggingInterval.TabIndex = 3; + this.lblLoggingInterval.Text = "Logging Interval:"; + // + // nudLogInterval + // + this.nudLogInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 94); + this.nudLogInterval.Maximum = new decimal(new int[] { + 60, + 0, + 0, + 0}); + this.nudLogInterval.Minimum = new decimal(new int[] { + 1, + 0, + 0, + 0}); + this.nudLogInterval.Name = "nudLogInterval"; + this.nudLogInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(51, 20); + this.nudLogInterval.TabIndex = 5; + this.nudLogInterval.Value = new decimal(new int[] { + 5, + 0, + 0, + 0}); + // + // lblSeconds + // + this.lblSeconds.AutoSize = true; + this.lblSeconds.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(209, 101); + this.lblSeconds.Name = "lblSeconds"; + this.lblSeconds.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(49, 13); + this.lblSeconds.TabIndex = 6; + this.lblSeconds.Text = "Seconds"; + // + // btnGetValues + // + this.btnGetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 136); + this.btnGetValues.Name = "btnGetValues"; + this.btnGetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35); + this.btnGetValues.TabIndex = 7; + this.btnGetValues.Text = "Get Values"; + this.btnGetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true; + this.btnGetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnGetValues_Click); + // + // lblDate + // + this.lblDate.AutoSize = true; + this.lblDate.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0))); + this.lblDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 33); + this.lblDate.Name = "lblDate"; + this.lblDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13); + this.lblDate.TabIndex = 8; + this.lblDate.Text = "Device Date:"; + // + // dtpDate + // + this.dtpDate.CustomFormat = "dd/MM/yyyy"; + this.dtpDate.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Custom; + this.dtpDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 27); + this.dtpDate.Name = "dtpDate"; + this.dtpDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20); + this.dtpDate.TabIndex = 9; + // + // frmDataloggerSettings + // + this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F); + this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font; + this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(300, 197); + this.Controls.Add(this.dtpDate); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblDate); + this.Controls.Add(this.btnGetValues); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblSeconds); + this.Controls.Add(this.nudLogInterval); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblLoggingInterval); + this.Controls.Add(this.lblTime); + this.Controls.Add(this.dtpTime); + this.Controls.Add(this.btnSetValues); + this.MaximizeBox = false; + this.MinimizeBox = false; + this.Name = "frmDataloggerSettings"; + this.Text = "Datalogger"; + this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.frmDataloggerSettings_Load); + ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).EndInit(); + this.ResumeLayout(false); + this.PerformLayout(); + + } + + #endregion + + private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnSetValues; + private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpTime; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblTime; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblLoggingInterval; + private System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown nudLogInterval; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblSeconds; + private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnGetValues; + private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblDate; + private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpDate; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c3d1e15645 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs @@ -0,0 +1,179 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.ComponentModel; +using System.Data; +using System.Drawing; +using System.Linq; +using System.Text; +using System.Windows.Forms; +using Hid; + +namespace Project1HostApp +{ + public partial class frmDataloggerSettings : Form + { + private const int DEVICE_VID = 0x03EB; + private const int DEVICE_PID = 0x2063; + + private struct Device_Report_t + { + public Byte Day; + public Byte Month; + public Byte Year; + + public Byte Hour; + public Byte Minute; + public Byte Second; + + public Byte LogInterval500MS; + + public Byte[] ToReport() + { + Byte[] Report = new Byte[7]; + + Report[0] = this.Hour; + Report[1] = this.Minute; + Report[2] = this.Second; + Report[3] = this.Day; + Report[4] = this.Month; + Report[5] = this.Year; + Report[6] = this.LogInterval500MS; + + return Report; + } + + public void FromReport(Byte[] Report) + { + this.Hour = Report[0]; + this.Minute = Report[1]; + this.Second = Report[2]; + this.Day = Report[3]; + this.Month = Report[4]; + this.Year = Report[5]; + this.LogInterval500MS = Report[6]; + } + }; + + private IDevice GetDeviceConnection() + { + IDevice[] ConnectedDevices = DeviceFactory.Enumerate(DEVICE_VID, DEVICE_PID); + IDevice ConnectionHandle = null; + + if (ConnectedDevices.Count() > 0) + ConnectionHandle = ConnectedDevices[0]; + else + return null; + + // Fix report handle under Windows + if (ConnectionHandle is Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet) + { + ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).AddDevice(0x00, + ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).UnallocatedDevices[0]); + } + + return ConnectionHandle; + } + + public frmDataloggerSettings() + { + InitializeComponent(); + } + + private void btnSetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection(); + + if (ConnectionHandle == null) + { + MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device."); + return; + } + + Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t(); + DeviceReport.Day = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Day; + DeviceReport.Month = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Month; + DeviceReport.Year = (byte)((dtpDate.Value.Year < 2000) ? 0 : (dtpDate.Value.Year - 2000)); + DeviceReport.Hour = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Hour; + DeviceReport.Minute = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Minute; + DeviceReport.Second = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Second; + DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS = (byte)(nudLogInterval.Value * 2); + + try + { + ConnectionHandle.Write(0x00, DeviceReport.ToReport()); + MessageBox.Show("Device parameters updated successfully."); + } + catch (Exception ex) + { + MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message); + } + } + + private void btnGetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection(); + + if (ConnectionHandle == null) + { + MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device."); + return; + } + + Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t(); + + try + { + Byte[] Report = new Byte[7]; + + ConnectionHandle.Read(0x00, Report); + DeviceReport.FromReport(Report); + String msgText = "Device parameters retrieved successfully."; + + try + { + dtpDate.Value = new DateTime( + (2000 + DeviceReport.Year), + DeviceReport.Month, + DeviceReport.Day); + + dtpTime.Value = new DateTime( + DateTime.Now.Year, DateTime.Now.Month, DateTime.Now.Day, + DeviceReport.Hour, + DeviceReport.Minute, + DeviceReport.Second); + } + catch (Exception ex) + { + msgText = "Problem reading device:\n" + + ex.Message + + "\nY:" + DeviceReport.Year.ToString() + + " M:" + DeviceReport.Month.ToString() + + " D:" + DeviceReport.Day.ToString() + + "\n\nUsing current date and time."; + dtpDate.Value = DateTime.Now; + dtpTime.Value = DateTime.Now; + } + + try + { + nudLogInterval.Value = (DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS / 2); + } + catch (Exception ex) + { + nudLogInterval.Value = nudLogInterval.Minimum; + } + + MessageBox.Show(msgText); + } + catch (Exception ex) + { + MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message); + } + } + + private void frmDataloggerSettings_Load(object sender, EventArgs e) + { + + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..19dc0dd8b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" /> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4c19edd212 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2a7112fc09 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3693c6ca04 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2588e60c14 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ +using System; +using System.Collections.Generic; +using System.Linq; +using System.Windows.Forms; + +namespace Project1HostApp +{ + static class Program + { + /// <summary> + /// The main entry point for the application. + /// </summary> + [STAThread] + static void Main() + { + Application.EnableVisualStyles(); + Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false); + Application.Run(new frmDataloggerSettings()); + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a4d0ab1d5f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +using System.Reflection; +using System.Runtime.CompilerServices; +using System.Runtime.InteropServices; + +// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following +// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information +// associated with an assembly. +[assembly: AssemblyTitle("TempDataLoggerHostApp")] +[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")] +[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Dean Camera")] +[assembly: AssemblyProduct("Temp Datalogger HostApp")] +[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Dean Camera 2011")] +[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")] +[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")] + +// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible +// to COM components. If you need to access a type in this assembly from +// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type. +[assembly: ComVisible(false)] + +// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM +[assembly: Guid("f41d67c7-13b2-4710-9e0f-f78e7f2bf2e9")] + +// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values: +// +// Major Version +// Minor Version +// Build Number +// Revision +// +// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers +// by using the '*' as shown below: +// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")] +[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")] +[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")] diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..63b1af40d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties { + using System; + + + /// <summary> + /// A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc. + /// </summary> + // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder + // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio. + // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen + // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project. + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")] + [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()] + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + internal class Resources { + + private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan; + + private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture; + + [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")] + internal Resources() { + } + + /// <summary> + /// Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager { + get { + if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) { + global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly); + resourceMan = temp; + } + return resourceMan; + } + } + + /// <summary> + /// Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all + /// resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class. + /// </summary> + [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)] + internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture { + get { + return resourceCulture; + } + set { + resourceCulture = value; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..af7dbebbac --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<root> + <!-- + Microsoft ResX Schema + + Version 2.0 + + The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format + that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the + various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes + associated with the data types. + + Example: + + ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ... + <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader> + <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader> + <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader> + <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data> + <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data> + <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value> + </data> + <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64"> + <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value> + <comment>This is a comment</comment> + </data> + + There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple + name/value pairs. + + Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a + type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support + text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. + Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the + mimetype set. + + The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the + ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not + extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly: + + Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format + that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can + read any of the formats listed below. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64 + value : The object must be serialized with + : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + + mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64 + value : The object must be serialized into a byte array + : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter + : and then encoded with base64 encoding. + --> + <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata"> + <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded"> + <xsd:element name="metadata"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="assembly"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" /> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="data"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" /> + <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + <xsd:element name="resheader"> + <xsd:complexType> + <xsd:sequence> + <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" /> + </xsd:sequence> + <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" /> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:choice> + </xsd:complexType> + </xsd:element> + </xsd:schema> + <resheader name="resmimetype"> + <value>text/microsoft-resx</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="version"> + <value>2.0</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="reader"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> + <resheader name="writer"> + <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value> + </resheader> +</root>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..95fc3ad588 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +// <auto-generated> +// This code was generated by a tool. +// Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239 +// +// Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if +// the code is regenerated. +// </auto-generated> +//------------------------------------------------------------------------------ + +namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties { + + + [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()] + [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")] + internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase { + + private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings()))); + + public static Settings Default { + get { + return defaultInstance; + } + } + } +} diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..39645652af --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?> +<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)"> + <Profiles> + <Profile Name="(Default)" /> + </Profiles> + <Settings /> +</SettingsFile> diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ab6b9a83a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +http://en.sourceforge.jp/projects/sfnet_libhidnet/ + +This library has been tested on Windows Vista 32bit, Windows Vista 64bit, +Windows XP 32bit and Debian (Lenny) AMD64 but should work on any version of +Windows that can run the .NET framework 2.0 and any other operating system +that has both hiddev and Mono. + +Any additions must be tested and work on Windows and Linux, on both 32 and +64 bit. Windows 64 bit testing is particularly important as it is often +neglected. + + +Hid.Linux.dll was compiled under Linux with Mono (mcs) and uses no generics. + +Hid.Win32.dll and Hid.Net.dll were compiled under Windows with the .NET +Framework v2.0.50727 but are also tested to compile with Mono (gmcs). + + +A good starting point when using this library is Hid.DeviceFactory's Enumerate +methods. + +LogitechMX5000.cs is a simple example of how the library can be used. Other +examples on common devices are welcomed. + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8517d6f42a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003"> + <PropertyGroup> + <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration> + <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform> + <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion> + <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion> + <ProjectGuid>{A2D66069-8CF9-4104-828C-49A73D7DB5D1}</ProjectGuid> + <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType> + <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder> + <RootNamespace>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</RootNamespace> + <AssemblyName>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</AssemblyName> + <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion> + <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment> + <FileUpgradeFlags> + </FileUpgradeFlags> + <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion> + <UpgradeBackupLocation /> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols> + <DebugType>full</DebugType> + <Optimize>false</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' "> + <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType> + <Optimize>true</Optimize> + <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath> + <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants> + <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport> + <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel> + </PropertyGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Reference Include="Hid.Net, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, processorArchitecture=MSIL"> + <SpecificVersion>False</SpecificVersion> + <HintPath>.\Hid.Net.dll</HintPath> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System" /> + <Reference Include="System.Core"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions"> + <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework> + </Reference> + <Reference Include="System.Data" /> + <Reference Include="System.Deployment" /> + <Reference Include="System.Drawing" /> + <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" /> + <Reference Include="System.Xml" /> + </ItemGroup> + <ItemGroup> + <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.cs"> + <SubType>Form</SubType> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs"> + <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon> + </Compile> + <Compile Include="Program.cs" /> + <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" /> + <EmbeddedResource Include="DataLoggerSettings.resx"> + <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx"> + <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + <SubType>Designer</SubType> + </EmbeddedResource> + <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon> + <DesignTime>True</DesignTime> + </Compile> + <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings"> + <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator> + <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput> + </None> + <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs"> + <AutoGen>True</AutoGen> + <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon> + <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput> + </Compile> + </ItemGroup> + <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" /> + <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. + Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets. + <Target Name="BeforeBuild"> + </Target> + <Target Name="AfterBuild"> + </Target> + --> +</Project>
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fdb4ad9b69 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ +""" + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +""" + +""" + Front-end configuration app for the TempDataLogger project. This script + configures the logger to the current system time and date, with a user + defined logging interval. + + The logging interval should be specified in milliseconds and is rounded to + a multiple of 500ms. + + Usage: + python temp_log_config.py <Log_Interval> + + Example: + python temp_log_config.py 500 + + Requires the pywinusb library (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/). +""" + +import sys +from datetime import datetime +import pywinusb.hid as hid + +# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased +# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended) +device_vid = 0x03EB +device_pid = 0x2063 +report_length = 1 + 7 + + +def get_hid_device_handle(): + hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=device_vid, + product_id=device_pid) + + valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices() + + if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0: + return None + else: + return valid_hid_devices[0] + + +def configure_temp_log_device(device, time_date, log_interval_500ms): + # Report data for the demo is the report ID (always zero) + report_data = [0] + + # Followed by the time/date data + report_data.extend([time_date.hour, time_date.minute, + time_date.second, time_date.day, + time_date.month, time_date.year - 2000]) + + # Lastly the log interval in 500ms units of time + report_data.extend([log_interval_500ms]) + + # Zero-extend the array to the length the report should be + report_data.extend([0] * (report_length - len(report_data))) + + # Send the generated report to the device + device.send_output_report(report_data) + + +def main(time_date, log_interval_500ms): + hid_device = get_hid_device_handle() + + if hid_device is None: + print("No valid HID device found.") + sys.exit(1) + + try: + hid_device.open() + + print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" % + (hid_device.vendor_id, hid_device.product_id, + hid_device.product_name, hid_device.vendor_name)) + + configure_temp_log_device(hid_device, time_date, log_interval_500ms) + + print("Time/Date is now set to %s" % time_date) + print("Log interval is now set to every %0.1fs" % (log_interval_500ms * (500.0 / 1000.0))) + + finally: + hid_device.close() + + +if __name__ == '__main__': + time_date = datetime.now() + log_interval_500ms = (int(sys.argv[1]) / 500) if len(sys.argv) > 1 else 2 + + # Clamp the log interval to the allowable range + log_interval_500ms = max(log_interval_500ms, 0x01) + log_interval_500ms = min(log_interval_500ms, 0xFF) + + main(time_date, log_interval_500ms) diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d4e0b5e84 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage Temperature Datalogger Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>those with >16KB of FLASH memory only</i> + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td> + * <td>Mass Storage Device \n + * Human Interface Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td> + * <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n + * Keyboard Subclass</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n + * USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n + * SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n + * SCSI Block Commands Specification \n + * USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Temperature Data Logger project. This project is a very basic USB data logger for the current temperature as reported by + * the board's temperature sensor, writing the temperature to a file stored on the board's Dataflash in a FAT filesystem + * each time a specified interval elapses. When inserted into a PC, the datalogger will appear as a standard USB Mass Storage + * device with a single text file, which contains the logged data. Files are named according to the current date when the + * logging commences. + * + * A DS1307 or compatible RTC IC is designed to be attached to the AVR's TWI bus, for the management of timestamps on the + * sampled data. This project will not function correctly if the RTC chip is omitted unless the DUMMY_RTC compile time token + * is specified - see \ref Sec_Options. + * + * Due to the host's need for exclusive access to the file system, the device will not log samples while connected to a host. + * For the logger to store data, the Dataflash must first be formatted by the host so that it contains a valid FAT file system. + * + * This project uses the FatFS library from ELM Chan (http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html) and the .NET HID device library + * LibHIDNet (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhidnet/). + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>DUMMY_RTC</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>When a DS1307 RTC chip is not fitted, this token can be defined to make the demo use a dummy software RTC using the system + * clock. This is less accurate and does not store the set time and date into non-volatile memory.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bf7ee2c3f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="Temperature Datalogger" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger" caption="Temperature Datalogger">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Temperature Datalogger project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="HID Class"/>
+ <keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="TemperatureDataLogger.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp_Python"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="TempDataLogger.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="TempDataLogger.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/RTC.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/RTC.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.temperature"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3959841744 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2397 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "Temperature Datalogger Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ \ + TempLogHostApp/ \ + TempLogHostApp_Python/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fea6fea91d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = TempDataLogger +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/RTC.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c \ + $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL) $(LUFA_SRC_TWI) $(LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f7d7e62708 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..982703707f --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x204B, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED), + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA USB-RS232 Adapter"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b19682a2b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Command Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b00fab6a44 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB to Serial"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..47a84a4ada --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c @@ -0,0 +1,254 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the USBtoSerial project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "USBtoSerial.h" + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */ +static RingBuffer_t USBtoUSART_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUSART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data[128]; + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */ +static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128]; + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data)); + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data)); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + /* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */ + if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUSART_Buffer))) + { + int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + /* Store received byte into the USART transmit buffer */ + if (!(ReceivedByte < 0)) + RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, ReceivedByte); + } + + uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer); + if (BufferCount) + { + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.Config.DataINEndpoint.Address); + + /* Check if a packet is already enqueued to the host - if so, we shouldn't try to send more data + * until it completes as there is a chance nothing is listening and a lengthy timeout could occur */ + if (Endpoint_IsINReady()) + { + /* Never send more than one bank size less one byte to the host at a time, so that we don't block + * while a Zero Length Packet (ZLP) to terminate the transfer is sent if the host isn't listening */ + uint8_t BytesToSend = MIN(BufferCount, (CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE - 1)); + + /* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */ + while (BytesToSend--) + { + /* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */ + if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, + RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError) + { + break; + } + + /* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */ + RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer); + } + } + } + + /* Load the next byte from the USART transmit buffer into the USART if transmit buffer space is available */ + if (Serial_IsSendReady() && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUSART_Buffer))) + Serial_SendByte(RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUSART_Buffer)); + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer + * for later transmission to the host. + */ +ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1; + + if ((USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured) && !(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer))) + RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte); +} + +/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event. + * + * \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t ConfigMask = 0; + + switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType) + { + case CDC_PARITY_Odd: + ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10)); + break; + case CDC_PARITY_Even: + ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11); + break; + } + + if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits) + ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1); + + switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits) + { + case 6: + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10); + break; + case 7: + ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11); + break; + case 8: + ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10)); + break; + } + + /* Keep the TX line held high (idle) while the USART is reconfigured */ + PORTD |= (1 << 3); + + /* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */ + UCSR1B = 0; + UCSR1A = 0; + UCSR1C = 0; + + /* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */ + UBRR1 = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS); + + /* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */ + UCSR1C = ConfigMask; + UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1); + UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1)); + + /* Release the TX line after the USART has been reconfigured */ + PORTD &= ~(1 << 3); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ed6880baf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBtoSerial.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_ +#define _USB_SERIAL_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + + #include "Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + + void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0620f93938 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6) + * \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) + * \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * USB to Serial bridge project. This project allows a USB AVR to serve + * as a USB to USART bridge between a USB host and a device lacking a + * USB port. When programmed into a USB AVR, the AVR will enumerate as a + * virtual COM port. + * + * The AVR's hardware USART's settings will change to mirror as closely as + * possible the serial settings set on the host. However, due to hardware + * limitations, some options may not be supported (baud rates with unacceptable + * error rates at the AVR's clock speed, data lengths other than 6, 7 or 8 bits, + * 1.5 stop bits, parity other than none, even or odd). + * + * After running this project for the first time on a new computer, + * you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project + * project's directory as the device's driver when running under + * Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers, + * negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other + * Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt + * CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td> + * None + * </td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5afcafe7c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="USB to Serial Converter" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial" caption="USB to Serial Converter">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ USB to Serial USART converter project.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="CDC Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="USBtoSerial.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="USBtoSerial.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="USBtoSerial.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4f79dc6bc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b39042ff31 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = USBtoSerial +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..30a265767c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT + #define ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER + #define ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER + #define MAX_URI_LENGTH 50 + + #define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS (uint8_t[]){ 10, 0, 0, 2} + #define DEVICE_NETMASK (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255, 0} + #define DEVICE_GATEWAY (uint8_t[]){ 10, 0, 0, 1} + #define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS (uint8_t[]){ 1, 0, 1, 0, 1, 0} + + #define UIP_CONF_UDP (defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)) + #define UIP_CONF_BROADCAST 1 + #define UIP_CONF_TCP 1 + #define UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS 1 + #define UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS 3 + #define UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS 5 + #define UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE 1514 + #define UIP_CONF_LL_802154 0 + #define UIP_CONF_LL_80211 0 + #define UIP_CONF_ROUTER 0 + #define UIP_CONF_ICMP6 0 + #define UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH 1 + #define UIP_URGDATA 0 + #define UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM 0 + #define UIP_ARCH_ADD32 0 + #define UIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE 0 + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ba602dbad6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) +// #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT +// #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 8 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE + #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT +// #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP +// #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..72dda9f124 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "Descriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass, + .SubClass = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass, + .Protocol = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x2069, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 3, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_IAD = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation}, + + .FirstInterfaceIndex = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol, + + .IADStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x00, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .RNDIS_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .MS_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass, + .SubClass = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass, + .Protocol = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .MS_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .MS_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Webserver"); + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66da1b654c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Descriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */ + #define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE 64 + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 5) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 64 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // RNDIS CDC Command Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD; + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // RNDIS CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t RNDIS_DataInEndpoint; + + // Mass Storage Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t MS_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataInEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t MS_DataOutEndpoint; + } USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 2, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum StringDescriptors_t + { + STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c77de8f6bb --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +; Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Net +ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[ControlFlags] +ExcludeFromSelect=* + +[DriverInstall] +Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI +BusType=15 +include=netrndis.inf +needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi +AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista + +[DriverInstall.Services] +include=netrndis.inf +needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069 + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069 + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069 + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069 + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo" diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..760718127e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the + * DHCP server on the network. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C +#include "DHCPClientApp.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */ +void DHCPClientApp_Init(void) +{ + /* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */ + struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */ + if (Connection != NULL) + { + uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate; + uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT)); + + /* Set the initial client state */ + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover; + + /* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */ + timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2); + } +} + +/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack + * needs a UDP packet to be processed. + */ +void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void) +{ + uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_udp_conn->appstate; + DHCP_Header_t* const AppData = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata; + uint16_t AppDataSize = 0; + + switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState) + { + case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover: + /* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */ + memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data)); + uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP); + + /* Fill out the DHCP response header */ + AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState); + + /* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */ + uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER}; + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList), + RequiredOptionList); + + /* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */ + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + /* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */ + timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout); + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer; + + break; + case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer: + if (!(uip_newdata())) + { + /* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */ + if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout)) + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover; + + break; + } + + uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType; + if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) && + DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) && + (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER)) + { + /* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */ + memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask); + DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP); + DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP); + + timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout); + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest; + } + + break; + case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest: + /* Fill out the DHCP response header */ + AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState); + + /* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), + &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP); + + /* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), + &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP); + + /* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */ + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + /* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */ + timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout); + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK; + + break; + case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK: + if (!(uip_newdata())) + { + /* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */ + if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout)) + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover; + + break; + } + + uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType; + if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) && + DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) && + (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK)) + { + /* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */ + uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP); + uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask); + uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP); + + AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased; + } + + break; + } +} + +/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required + * fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server. + * + * \param[out] DHCPHeader Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to + * \param[in] DHCPMessageType DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER + * \param[in] AppState Application state of the current UDP connection + * + * \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet + */ +static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState) +{ + /* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */ + memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + /* Fill out the DHCP packet header */ + DHCPHeader->Operation = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST; + DHCPHeader->HardwareType = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET; + DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress); + DHCPHeader->Hops = 0; + DHCPHeader->TransactionID = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID; + DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds = 0; + DHCPHeader->Flags = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr)); + DHCPHeader->Cookie = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE; + + /* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */ + DHCPHeader->Options[0] = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE; + DHCPHeader->Options[1] = 1; + DHCPHeader->Options[2] = DHCPMessageType; + DHCPHeader->Options[3] = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + /* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */ + return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0aec00331c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DHCPClientApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_ +#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <uip.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + #include "../Webserver.h" + #include "DHCPCommon.h" + + /* Enums: */ + /** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */ + enum DHCP_Client_States_t + { + DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover, /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */ + DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer, /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */ + DHCP_STATE_SendRequest, /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */ + DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK, /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */ + DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DHCPClientApp_Init(void); + void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C) + static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState); + #endif +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6d80f65cae --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Common DHCP routines to manage DHCP packet data. + */ + +#include "DHCPCommon.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the + * end of options terminator past the new option in the options list. + * + * \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list + * \param[in] Option DHCP option to add to the list + * \param[in] DataLen Size in bytes of the option data to add + * \param[in] OptionData Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from + * + * \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet + */ +uint8_t DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, + const uint8_t Option, + const uint8_t DataLen, + void* const OptionData) +{ + /* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */ + while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END) + DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2); + + /* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */ + DHCPOptionList[0] = Option; + DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen; + memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen); + DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + /* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */ + return (2 + DataLen); +} + +/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list. + * + * \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list + * \param[in] Option DHCP option to retrieve to the list + * \param[out] Destination Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, \c false otherwise + */ +bool DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, + const uint8_t Option, + void* const Destination) +{ + /* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */ + while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END) + { + /* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */ + if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option) + { + /* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */ + memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]); + + /* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */ + return true; + } + + /* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */ + DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2); + } + + /* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */ + return false; +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f54c16717 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for common DHCP defines. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCP_COMMON_H_ +#define _DHCP_COMMON_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <stdint.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + #include <string.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <uip.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server. */ + #define DHCP_SERVER_PORT 67 + + /** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client. */ + #define DHCP_CLIENT_PORT 68 + + /** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message. */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST 0x01 + + /** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message. */ + #define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY 0x02 + + /** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message. */ + #define BOOTP_BROADCAST 0x8000 + + /** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message. */ + #define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE 0x63538263 + + /** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client. */ + #define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID 0x13245466 + + /** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message. */ + #define DHCP_DISCOVER 1 + + /** DHCP message type for an OFFER message. */ + #define DHCP_OFFER 2 + + /** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message. */ + #define DHCP_REQUEST 3 + + /** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message. */ + #define DHCP_DECLINE 4 + + /** DHCP message type for an ACK message. */ + #define DHCP_ACK 5 + + /** DHCP message type for a NAK message. */ + #define DHCP_NAK 6 + + /** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message. */ + #define DHCP_RELEASE 7 + + /** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet. */ + #define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET 1 + + /** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK 1 + + /** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER 3 + + /** DHCP message option for the network DNS server. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER 6 + + /** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR 50 + + /** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME 51 + + /** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE 53 + + /** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID 54 + + /** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST 55 + + /** DHCP message option for the options list terminator. */ + #define DHCP_OPTION_END 255 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */ + typedef struct + { + uint8_t Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */ + uint8_t HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */ + uint8_t HardwareAddressLength; /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */ + uint8_t Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */ + + uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */ + + uint16_t ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */ + uint16_t Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */ + + uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */ + uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */ + uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint8_t ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */ + uint8_t ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + uint8_t BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */ + + uint32_t Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */ + + uint8_t Options[]; /**< DHCP message options */ + } DHCP_Header_t; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint8_t DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, + const uint8_t Option, + const uint8_t DataLen, + void* const OptionData); + bool DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList, + const uint8_t Option, + void* const Destination); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fea54ddb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,265 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a + * DHCP client on the network. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C +#include "DHCPServerApp.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection; + +uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8]; + +/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */ +void DHCPServerApp_Init(void) +{ + /* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */ + uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */ + struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT)); + + /* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */ + if (BroadcastConnection != NULL) + uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* Set all IP addresses as unleased */ + memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs)); +} + +/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack + * needs a UDP packet to be processed. + */ +void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void) +{ + DHCP_Header_t* const AppData = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata; + uint16_t AppDataSize = 0; + + /* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */ + if (uip_newdata()) + { + /* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */ + uint8_t DHCPMessageType; + if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType))) + return; + + uip_ipaddr_t Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP; + struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress; + uint32_t TransactionID; + + /* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */ + uip_getnetmask(&Netmask); + uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress); + memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr)); + TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID; + + /* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */ + if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP))) + memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + + switch (DHCPMessageType) + { + case DHCP_DISCOVER: + /* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */ + if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)) + DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP); + + /* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID); + + /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask); + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress); + + /* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */ + uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection); + memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + break; + case DHCP_REQUEST: + /* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */ + if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))) + { + /* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID); + + /* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */ + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask); + AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, + sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress); + + /* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */ + DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP); + } + else + { + /* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */ + AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID); + } + + /* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */ + uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection); + memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + uip_udp_send(AppDataSize); + + break; + case DHCP_RELEASE: + /* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */ + DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr); + break; + } + } +} + +/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required + * fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client. + * + * \param[out] DHCPHeader Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to + * \param[in] DHCPMessageType DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER + * \param[in] ClientHardwareAddress Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to + * \param[in] PreferredClientIP Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated + * \param[in] TransactionID Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with + * + * \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet + */ +static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress, + const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP, + const uint32_t TransactionID) +{ + /* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */ + memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t)); + + DHCPHeader->Operation = DHCPMessageType; + DHCPHeader->HardwareType = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET; + DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress); + DHCPHeader->Hops = 0; + DHCPHeader->TransactionID = TransactionID; + DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds = 0; + DHCPHeader->Flags = 0; + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr)); + DHCPHeader->Cookie = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE; + + /* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */ + DHCPHeader->Options[0] = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE; + DHCPHeader->Options[1] = 1; + DHCPHeader->Options[2] = DHCPMessageType; + DHCPHeader->Options[3] = DHCP_OPTION_END; + + /* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */ + return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4); +} + +/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address whose lease status should be checked + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the IP has already been leased to a client, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */ + if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask)) + return false; + else + return true; +} + +/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool. + * + * \param[out] NewIPAddress Location where the generated IP Address should be stored + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress) +{ + uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr); + + /** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */ + for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++) + { + /* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */ + NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP; + + /* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */ + if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress))) + return; + } +} + +/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be + * allocated to another client unless it is first released. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as leased + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */ + LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask; +} + +/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be + * allocated to another client upon request. + * + * \param[in] IPAddress IP Address to mark as not leased + * + * \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver. + */ +static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress) +{ + uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8); + uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8)); + + /* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */ + LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask; +} +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a9dae7bf3a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DHCPServerApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_ +#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <uip.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + #include "../Webserver.h" + #include "DHCPCommon.h" + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DHCPServerApp_Init(void); + void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C) + static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader, + const uint8_t DHCPMessageType, + const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress, + const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP, + const uint32_t TransactionID); + static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress); + #endif +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b1111ce39b --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c @@ -0,0 +1,534 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of + * blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored + * or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such + * as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C +#include "DataflashManager.h" + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes + * them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the current endpoint bank */ + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Wait until the host has sent another packet */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearOUT(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + /* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if the endpoint is currently full */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + { + /* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */ + if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady()) + return; + } + + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte()); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + + /* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */ + if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset) + return; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */ + if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed())) + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from + * the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the + * Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the + * Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the write sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to write + * \param[in] BufferPtr Pointer to the data source RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + const uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + bool UsingSecondBuffer = false; + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */ + if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)) + UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer); + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + +#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + /* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */ + if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + } +#endif + + /* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */ + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0); + } + + /* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++)); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */ + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00); + Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy(); + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into + * the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash + * and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read + * the files stored on the Dataflash. + * + * \param[in] BlockAddress Data block starting address for the read sequence + * \param[in] TotalBlocks Number of blocks of data to read + * \param[out] BufferPtr Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer + */ +void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) +{ + uint16_t CurrDFPage = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint16_t CurrDFPageByte = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE); + uint8_t CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4); + + /* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + + while (TotalBlocks) + { + uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0; + + /* Read an endpoint packet sized data block from the Dataflash */ + while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */ + if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4)) + { + /* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0; + CurrDFPage++; + + /* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */ + Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage); + + /* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD); + Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + Dataflash_SendByte(0x00); + } + + /* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */ + for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++) + *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + + /* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */ + CurrDFPageByteDiv16++; + + /* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */ + BytesInBlockDiv16++; + } + + /* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */ + TotalBlocks--; + } + + /* Deselect all Dataflash chips */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */ +void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void) +{ + /* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + + /* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */ + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS); + + /* Check if sector protection is enabled */ + if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON) + { + Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS(); + + /* Send the commands to disable sector protection */ + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]); + } + #endif + + /* Deselect current Dataflash chip */ + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); +} + +/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working. + * + * \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise + */ +bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void) +{ + uint8_t ReturnByte; + + /* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + + #if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2) + /* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */ + Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2); + Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO); + ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte(); + Dataflash_DeselectChip(); + + /* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */ + if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL) + return false; + #endif + + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..367fbac8c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for DataflashManager.c. + */ + +#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ +#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + + #include "../Descriptors.h" + + #include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> + + /* Preprocessor Checks: */ + #if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16) + #error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes. + #endif + + /* Defines: */ + /** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS) + + /** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying + * storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE 512 + + /** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not + * change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size. + */ + #define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) + + /** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */ + #define DISK_READ_ONLY false + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks); + void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress, + uint16_t TotalBlocks, + uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void); + bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..80d8843d13 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 + + +FILES + + ffconf.h Configuration file for FatFs module. + ff.h Common include file for FatFs and application module. + ff.c FatFs module. + diskio.h Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module. + diskio.c An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs. + integer.h Integer type definitions for FatFs. + option Optional external functions. + + Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs + module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific + storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written + to control your storage device. + + + +AGREEMENTS + + FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to + small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education, + research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems. + + Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. + + * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. + * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for + personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. + * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. + + + +REVISION HISTORY + + Feb 26, 2006 R0.00 Prototype + + Apr 29, 2006 R0.01 First release. + + Jun 01, 2006 R0.02 Added FAT12. + Removed unbuffered mode. + Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition. + + Jun 10, 2006 R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM. + + Sep 22, 2006 R0.03 Added f_rename. + Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE. + + Dec 11, 2006 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast. + Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32. + + Feb 04, 2007 R0.04 Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs) + Changed some APIs for multiple drive system. + Added f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs) + + Apr 01, 2007 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs) + Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek. + Added minimization level 3. + Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an + existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs) + + May 05, 2007 R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option. + Added FSInfo support. + Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs) + Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME. + Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object. + + Aug 25, 2007 R0.05 Changed arguments of f_read, f_write. + Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs) + Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs) + Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs) + + Feb 03, 2008 R0.05a Added f_truncate(). + Added f_utime(). + Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination. + Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated. + Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write. + + Apr 01, 2008 R0.06 Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs) + Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets(). + Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster. + + Apr 01, 2009, R0.07 Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option. + Added long file name support. + Added multiple code page support. + Added re-entrancy for multitask operation. + Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs(). + Added rewind option to f_readdir(). + Changed result code of critical errors. + Renamed string functions to avoid name collision. + + Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg. + Added multiple sector size support. + + Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error. + Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek(). + Added relative path feature. + Added f_chdir(). + Added f_chdrive(). + Added proper case conversion for extended characters. + + Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h. + Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE. + Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH. + Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary. + Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg. + + May 15, 2010, R0.08 Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN) + Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE) + Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK) + Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR. + Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg. + String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg. + + Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2) + Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE) + Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss. + Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'. + Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume. + + Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write(). + f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP. + Extended format syntax of f_printf function. + Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names. + + Sep 06,'11 R0.09 f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature. + Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2) + + Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16. + Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash. + Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK. diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b119b1a402 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs (C)ChaN, 2007 */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */ +/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#include "diskio.h" + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Initialize a Drive */ + +DSTATUS disk_initialize ( + BYTE drv /* Physical drive number (0..) */ +) +{ + return FR_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Return Disk Status */ + +DSTATUS disk_status ( + BYTE drv /* Physical drive number (0..) */ +) +{ + return FR_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read Sector(s) */ + +DRESULT disk_read ( + BYTE drv, /* Physical drive number (0..) */ + BYTE *buff, /* Data buffer to store read data */ + DWORD sector, /* Sector address (LBA) */ + BYTE count /* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */ +) +{ + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff); + return RES_OK; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Write Sector(s) */ + +#if _READONLY == 0 +DRESULT disk_write ( + BYTE drv, /* Physical drive number (0..) */ + const BYTE *buff, /* Data to be written */ + DWORD sector, /* Sector address (LBA) */ + BYTE count /* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */ +) +{ + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff); + return RES_OK; +} +#endif /* _READONLY */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..65e3048a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +/*----------------------------------------------------------------------- +/ Low level disk interface module include file +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED +#define _DISKIO_DEFINED + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +#include "integer.h" +#include "ff.h" + +#include "../DataflashManager.h" + + +/* Status of Disk Functions */ +typedef BYTE DSTATUS; + +/* Results of Disk Functions */ +typedef enum { + RES_OK = 0, /* 0: Successful */ + RES_ERROR, /* 1: R/W Error */ + RES_WRPRT, /* 2: Write Protected */ + RES_NOTRDY, /* 3: Not Ready */ + RES_PARERR /* 4: Invalid Parameter */ +} DRESULT; + + +/*---------------------------------------*/ +/* Prototypes for disk control functions */ + +DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE); +DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE); +DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE); +DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE); +DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*); + + +/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */ + +#define STA_NOINIT 0x01 /* Drive not initialized */ +#define STA_NODISK 0x02 /* No medium in the drive */ +#define STA_PROTECT 0x04 /* Write protected */ + + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2f58adf837 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c @@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@ +/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems. +/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial +/ developments under license policy of following terms. +/ +/ Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. +/ +/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. +/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for +/ personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. +/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. +/ +/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00 Prototype. +/ +/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01 First stable version. +/ +/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02 Added FAT12 support. +/ Removed unbuffered mode. +/ Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition. +/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM). +/ +/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03 Added f_rename(). +/ Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE. +/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast. +/ Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32. +/ +/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04 Supported multiple drive system. +/ Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system. +/ Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount(). +/ Added f_mkfs(). +/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive. +/ Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek(). +/ Added minimization level 3. +/ Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs(). +/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG. +/ Added FSInfo support. +/ Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME. +/ Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object. +/ +/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05 Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs(). +/ Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. +/ Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. +/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime(). +/ Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination. +/ Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated. +/ Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write. +/ +/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06 Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets(). +/ Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster. +/ +/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07 Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY) +/ Added long file name feature. +/ Added multiple code page feature. +/ Added re-entrancy for multitask operation. +/ Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs(). +/ Added rewind option to f_readdir(). +/ Changed result code of critical errors. +/ Renamed string functions to avoid name collision. +/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg. +/ Added multiple sector size feature. +/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error. +/ Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek(). +/ Added relative path feature. +/ Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive(). +/ Added proper case conversion to extended char. +/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h. +/ Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH. +/ Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary. +/ Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE. +/ Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg. +/ +/ May 15,'10 R0.08 Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3) +/ Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE) +/ Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK) +/ Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR. +/ Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg. +/ String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg. +/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2) +/ Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE) +/ Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss. +/ Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'. +/ Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume. +/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write(). +/ f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP. +/ Extended format syntax of f_printf function. +/ Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name. +/ +/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09 f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature. +/ Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2) +/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume. +/ Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash. +/ Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK. +/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#include "ff.h" /* FatFs configurations and declarations */ +#include "diskio.h" /* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */ + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Module Private Definitions + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _FATFS != 4004 /* Revision ID */ +#error Wrong include file (ff.h). +#endif + + +/* Definitions on sector size */ +#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096 +#error Wrong sector size. +#endif +#if _MAX_SS != 512 +#define SS(fs) ((fs)->ssize) /* Variable sector size */ +#else +#define SS(fs) 512U /* Fixed sector size */ +#endif + + +/* Reentrancy related */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT +#if _USE_LFN == 1 +#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration. +#endif +#define ENTER_FF(fs) { if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; } +#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res) { unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; } +#else +#define ENTER_FF(fs) +#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res) return res +#endif + +#define ABORT(fs, res) { fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); } + + +/* File access control feature */ +#if _FS_LOCK +#if _FS_READONLY +#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg. +#endif +typedef struct { + FATFS *fs; /* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */ + DWORD clu; /* File ID 2, directory */ + WORD idx; /* File ID 3, directory index */ + WORD ctr; /* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */ +} FILESEM; +#endif + + + +/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */ + +#if _CODE_PAGE == 932 /* Japanese Shift-JIS */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 /* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */ +#define _DF1E 0x9F /* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */ +#define _DF2S 0xE0 /* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */ +#define _DF2E 0xFC /* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */ +#define _DS1S 0x40 /* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */ +#define _DS1E 0x7E /* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */ +#define _DS2S 0x80 /* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */ +#define _DS2E 0xFC /* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */ + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936 /* Simplified Chinese GBK */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x40 +#define _DS1E 0x7E +#define _DS2S 0x80 +#define _DS2E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949 /* Korean */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x41 +#define _DS1E 0x5A +#define _DS2S 0x61 +#define _DS2E 0x7A +#define _DS3S 0x81 +#define _DS3E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950 /* Traditional Chinese Big5 */ +#define _DF1S 0x81 +#define _DF1E 0xFE +#define _DS1S 0x40 +#define _DS1E 0x7E +#define _DS2S 0xA1 +#define _DS2E 0xFE + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437 /* U.S. (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720 /* Arabic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737 /* Greek (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \ + 0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775 /* Baltic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850 /* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852 /* Latin 2 (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855 /* Cyrillic (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \ + 0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857 /* Turkish (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858 /* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862 /* Hebrew (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866 /* Russian (OEM) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874 /* Thai (OEM, Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \ + 0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \ + 0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */ +#define _DF1S 0 +#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \ + 0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \ + 0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F} + +#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1 /* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */ +#if _USE_LFN +#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page. +#endif +#define _DF1S 0 + +#else +#error Unknown code page + +#endif + + +/* Character code support macros */ +#define IsUpper(c) (((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z')) +#define IsLower(c) (((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z')) +#define IsDigit(c) (((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9')) + +#if _DF1S /* Code page is DBCS */ + +#ifdef _DF2S /* Two 1st byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS1(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E)) +#else /* One 1st byte area */ +#define IsDBCS1(c) ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) +#endif + +#ifdef _DS3S /* Three 2nd byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS2(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E)) +#else /* Two 2nd byte areas */ +#define IsDBCS2(c) (((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E)) +#endif + +#else /* Code page is SBCS */ + +#define IsDBCS1(c) 0 +#define IsDBCS2(c) 0 + +#endif /* _DF1S */ + + +/* Name status flags */ +#define NS 11 /* Index of name status byte in fn[] */ +#define NS_LOSS 0x01 /* Out of 8.3 format */ +#define NS_LFN 0x02 /* Force to create LFN entry */ +#define NS_LAST 0x04 /* Last segment */ +#define NS_BODY 0x08 /* Lower case flag (body) */ +#define NS_EXT 0x10 /* Lower case flag (ext) */ +#define NS_DOT 0x20 /* Dot entry */ + + +/* FAT sub-type boundaries */ +/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */ +#define MIN_FAT16 4086 /* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */ +#define MIN_FAT32 65526 /* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */ + + +/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of +/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between +/ different platforms */ + +#define BS_jmpBoot 0 /* Jump instruction (3) */ +#define BS_OEMName 3 /* OEM name (8) */ +#define BPB_BytsPerSec 11 /* Sector size [byte] (2) */ +#define BPB_SecPerClus 13 /* Cluster size [sector] (1) */ +#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt 14 /* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_NumFATs 16 /* Number of FAT copies (1) */ +#define BPB_RootEntCnt 17 /* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */ +#define BPB_TotSec16 19 /* Volume size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_Media 21 /* Media descriptor (1) */ +#define BPB_FATSz16 22 /* FAT size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_SecPerTrk 24 /* Track size [sector] (2) */ +#define BPB_NumHeads 26 /* Number of heads (2) */ +#define BPB_HiddSec 28 /* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */ +#define BPB_TotSec32 32 /* Volume size [sector] (4) */ +#define BS_DrvNum 36 /* Physical drive number (2) */ +#define BS_BootSig 38 /* Extended boot signature (1) */ +#define BS_VolID 39 /* Volume serial number (4) */ +#define BS_VolLab 43 /* Volume label (8) */ +#define BS_FilSysType 54 /* File system type (1) */ +#define BPB_FATSz32 36 /* FAT size [sector] (4) */ +#define BPB_ExtFlags 40 /* Extended flags (2) */ +#define BPB_FSVer 42 /* File system version (2) */ +#define BPB_RootClus 44 /* Root dir first cluster (4) */ +#define BPB_FSInfo 48 /* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */ +#define BPB_BkBootSec 50 /* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */ +#define BS_DrvNum32 64 /* Physical drive number (2) */ +#define BS_BootSig32 66 /* Extended boot signature (1) */ +#define BS_VolID32 67 /* Volume serial number (4) */ +#define BS_VolLab32 71 /* Volume label (8) */ +#define BS_FilSysType32 82 /* File system type (1) */ +#define FSI_LeadSig 0 /* FSI: Leading signature (4) */ +#define FSI_StrucSig 484 /* FSI: Structure signature (4) */ +#define FSI_Free_Count 488 /* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */ +#define FSI_Nxt_Free 492 /* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */ +#define MBR_Table 446 /* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */ +#define SZ_PTE 16 /* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */ +#define BS_55AA 510 /* Boot sector signature (2) */ + +#define DIR_Name 0 /* Short file name (11) */ +#define DIR_Attr 11 /* Attribute (1) */ +#define DIR_NTres 12 /* NT flag (1) */ +#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth 13 /* Created time sub-second (1) */ +#define DIR_CrtTime 14 /* Created time (2) */ +#define DIR_CrtDate 16 /* Created date (2) */ +#define DIR_LstAccDate 18 /* Last accessed date (2) */ +#define DIR_FstClusHI 20 /* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */ +#define DIR_WrtTime 22 /* Modified time (2) */ +#define DIR_WrtDate 24 /* Modified date (2) */ +#define DIR_FstClusLO 26 /* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */ +#define DIR_FileSize 28 /* File size (4) */ +#define LDIR_Ord 0 /* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */ +#define LDIR_Attr 11 /* LFN attribute (1) */ +#define LDIR_Type 12 /* LFN type (1) */ +#define LDIR_Chksum 13 /* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */ +#define LDIR_FstClusLO 26 /* Filled by zero (0) */ +#define SZ_DIR 32 /* Size of a directory entry */ +#define LLE 0x40 /* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */ +#define DDE 0xE5 /* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */ +#define NDDE 0x05 /* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */ + + +/*------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Module private work area */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are +/ zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up +/ routine is out of ANSI-C standard. +*/ + +#if _VOLUMES +static +FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES]; /* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */ +#else +#error Number of volumes must not be 0. +#endif + +static +WORD Fsid; /* File system mount ID */ + +#if _FS_RPATH +static +BYTE CurrVol; /* Current drive */ +#endif + +#if _FS_LOCK +static +FILESEM Files[_FS_LOCK]; /* File lock semaphores */ +#endif + +#if _USE_LFN == 0 /* No LFN feature */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) (dobj).fn = sfn +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 1 /* LFN feature with static working buffer */ +static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1]; +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; } +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 2 /* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1] +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; } +#define FREE_BUF() + +#elif _USE_LFN == 3 /* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */ +#define DEF_NAMEBUF BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn +#define INIT_BUF(dobj) { lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \ + if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \ + (dobj).lfn = lfn; (dobj).fn = sfn; } +#define FREE_BUF() ff_memfree(lfn) + +#else +#error Wrong LFN configuration. +#endif + + + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Module Private Functions + +---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* String functions */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/* Copy memory to memory */ +static +void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) { + BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst; + const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src; + +#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1 + while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) { + *(int*)d = *(int*)s; + d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int); + cnt -= sizeof (int); + } +#endif + while (cnt--) + *d++ = *s++; +} + +/* Fill memory */ +static +void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) { + BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst; + + while (cnt--) + *d++ = (BYTE)val; +} + +/* Compare memory to memory */ +static +int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) { + const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src; + int r = 0; + + while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ; + return r; +} + +/* Check if chr is contained in the string */ +static +int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) { + while (*str && *str != chr) str++; + return *str; +} + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Request/Release grant to access the volume */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_REENTRANT + +static +int lock_fs ( + FATFS *fs /* File system object */ +) +{ + return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj); +} + + +static +void unlock_fs ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + FRESULT res /* Result code to be returned */ +) +{ + if (fs && + res != FR_NOT_ENABLED && + res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE && + res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT && + res != FR_TIMEOUT) { + ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj); + } +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* File lock control functions */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_LOCK + +static +FRESULT chk_lock ( /* Check if the file can be accessed */ + DIR* dj, /* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */ + int acc /* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */ +) +{ + UINT i, be; + + /* Search file semaphore table */ + for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { + if (Files[i].fs) { /* Existing entry */ + if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs && /* Check if the file matched with an open file */ + Files[i].clu == dj->sclust && + Files[i].idx == dj->index) break; + } else { /* Blank entry */ + be++; + } + } + if (i == _FS_LOCK) /* The file is not opened */ + return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES; /* Is there a blank entry for new file? */ + + /* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */ + return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK; +} + + +static +int enq_lock (void) /* Check if an entry is available for a new file */ +{ + UINT i; + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ; + return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1; +} + + +static +UINT inc_lock ( /* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */ + DIR* dj, /* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */ + int acc /* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */ +) +{ + UINT i; + + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { /* Find the file */ + if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs && + Files[i].clu == dj->sclust && + Files[i].idx == dj->index) break; + } + + if (i == _FS_LOCK) { /* Not opened. Register it as new. */ + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ; + if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0; /* No space to register (int err) */ + Files[i].fs = dj->fs; + Files[i].clu = dj->sclust; + Files[i].idx = dj->index; + Files[i].ctr = 0; + } + + if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0; /* Access violation (int err) */ + + Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1; /* Set semaphore value */ + + return i + 1; +} + + +static +FRESULT dec_lock ( /* Decrement file open counter */ + UINT i /* Semaphore index */ +) +{ + WORD n; + FRESULT res; + + + if (--i < _FS_LOCK) { + n = Files[i].ctr; + if (n == 0x100) n = 0; + if (n) n--; + Files[i].ctr = n; + if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } else { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + return res; +} + + +static +void clear_lock ( /* Clear lock entries of the volume */ + FATFS *fs +) +{ + UINT i; + + for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) { + if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0; + } +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change window offset */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT move_window ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD sector /* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */ +) /* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */ +{ + DWORD wsect; + + + wsect = fs->winsect; + if (wsect != sector) { /* Changed current window */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fs->wflag) { /* Write back dirty window if needed */ + if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + fs->wflag = 0; + if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) { /* In FAT area */ + BYTE nf; + for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) { /* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */ + wsect += fs->fsize; + disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1); + } + } + } +#endif + if (sector) { + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + fs->winsect = sector; + } + } + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Clean-up cached data */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT sync ( /* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */ + FATFS *fs /* File system object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + + res = move_window(fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + /* Update FSInfo sector if needed */ + if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) { + fs->winsect = 0; + /* Create FSInfo structure */ + mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512); + ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust); + ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust); + /* Write it into the FSInfo sector */ + disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1); + fs->fsi_flag = 0; + } + /* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */ + if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK) + res = FR_DISK_ERR; + } + + return res; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get sector# from cluster# */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +DWORD clust2sect ( /* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to be converted */ +) +{ + clst -= 2; + if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0; /* Invalid cluster# */ + return clst * fs->csize + fs->database; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + +DWORD get_fat ( /* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to get the link information */ +) +{ + UINT wc, bc; + BYTE *p; + + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) /* Check range */ + return 1; + + switch (fs->fs_type) { + case FS_FAT12 : + bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2; + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break; + wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++; + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break; + wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8; + return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF); + + case FS_FAT16 : + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)]; + return LD_WORD(p); + + case FS_FAT32 : + if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)]; + return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF; + } + + return 0xFFFFFFFF; /* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY + +FRESULT put_fat ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst, /* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */ + DWORD val /* New value to mark the cluster */ +) +{ + UINT bc; + BYTE *p; + FRESULT res; + + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Check range */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + + } else { + switch (fs->fs_type) { + case FS_FAT12 : + bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2; + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; + *p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val; + bc++; + fs->wflag = 1; + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; + *p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F)); + break; + + case FS_FAT16 : + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)]; + ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val); + break; + + case FS_FAT32 : + res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4))); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)]; + val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000; + ST_DWORD(p, val); + break; + + default : + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + fs->wflag = 1; + } + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT remove_chain ( + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to remove a chain from */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD nxt; +#if _USE_ERASE + DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2]; +#endif + + if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Check range */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + + } else { + res = FR_OK; + while (clst < fs->n_fatent) { /* Not a last link? */ + nxt = get_fat(fs, clst); /* Get cluster status */ + if (nxt == 0) break; /* Empty cluster? */ + if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; } /* Internal error? */ + if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; } /* Disk error? */ + res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0); /* Mark the cluster "empty" */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) { /* Update FSInfo */ + fs->free_clust++; + fs->fsi_flag = 1; + } +#if _USE_ERASE + if (ecl + 1 == nxt) { /* Is next cluster contiguous? */ + ecl = nxt; + } else { /* End of contiguous clusters */ + rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl); /* Start sector */ + rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1; /* End sector */ + disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt); /* Erase the block */ + scl = ecl = nxt; + } +#endif + clst = nxt; /* Next cluster */ + } + } + + return res; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +DWORD create_chain ( /* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD clst /* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */ +) +{ + DWORD cs, ncl, scl; + FRESULT res; + + + if (clst == 0) { /* Create a new chain */ + scl = fs->last_clust; /* Get suggested start point */ + if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1; + } + else { /* Stretch the current chain */ + cs = get_fat(fs, clst); /* Check the cluster status */ + if (cs < 2) return 1; /* It is an invalid cluster */ + if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs; /* It is already followed by next cluster */ + scl = clst; + } + + ncl = scl; /* Start cluster */ + for (;;) { + ncl++; /* Next cluster */ + if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) { /* Wrap around */ + ncl = 2; + if (ncl > scl) return 0; /* No free cluster */ + } + cs = get_fat(fs, ncl); /* Get the cluster status */ + if (cs == 0) break; /* Found a free cluster */ + if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */ + return cs; + if (ncl == scl) return 0; /* No free cluster */ + } + + res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF); /* Mark the new cluster "last link" */ + if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) { + res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl); /* Link it to the previous one if needed */ + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + fs->last_clust = ncl; /* Update FSINFO */ + if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) { + fs->free_clust--; + fs->fsi_flag = 1; + } + } else { + ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1; + } + + return ncl; /* Return new cluster number or error code */ +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _USE_FASTSEEK +static +DWORD clmt_clust ( /* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */ + FIL* fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + DWORD ofs /* File offset to be converted to cluster# */ +) +{ + DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl; + + + tbl = fp->cltbl + 1; /* Top of CLMT */ + cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize; /* Cluster order from top of the file */ + for (;;) { + ncl = *tbl++; /* Number of cluters in the fragment */ + if (!ncl) return 0; /* End of table? (error) */ + if (cl < ncl) break; /* In this fragment? */ + cl -= ncl; tbl++; /* Next fragment */ + } + return cl + *tbl; /* Return the cluster number */ +} +#endif /* _USE_FASTSEEK */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Set directory index */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_sdi ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object */ + WORD idx /* Index of directory table */ +) +{ + DWORD clst; + WORD ic; + + + dj->index = idx; + clst = dj->sclust; + if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) /* Check start cluster range */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32) /* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */ + clst = dj->fs->dirbase; + + if (clst == 0) { /* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */ + dj->clust = clst; + if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir) /* Index is out of range */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR); /* Sector# */ + } + else { /* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */ + ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize; /* Entries per cluster */ + while (idx >= ic) { /* Follow cluster chain */ + clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst); /* Get next cluster */ + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; /* Disk error */ + if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) /* Reached to end of table or int error */ + return FR_INT_ERR; + idx -= ic; + } + dj->clust = clst; + dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR); /* Sector# */ + } + + dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR; /* Ptr to the entry in the sector */ + + return FR_OK; /* Seek succeeded */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_next ( /* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */ + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object */ + int stretch /* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */ +) +{ + DWORD clst; + WORD i; + + + stretch = stretch; /* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */ + i = dj->index + 1; + if (!i || !dj->sect) /* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */ + return FR_NO_FILE; + + if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) { /* Sector changed? */ + dj->sect++; /* Next sector */ + + if (dj->clust == 0) { /* Static table */ + if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir) /* Report EOT when end of table */ + return FR_NO_FILE; + } + else { /* Dynamic table */ + if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) { /* Cluster changed? */ + clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust); /* Get next cluster */ + if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR; + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) { /* When it reached end of dynamic table */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + BYTE c; + if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE; /* When do not stretch, report EOT */ + clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust); /* Stretch cluster chain */ + if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED; /* No free cluster */ + if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR; + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR; + /* Clean-up stretched table */ + if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR; /* Flush active window */ + mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs)); /* Clear window buffer */ + dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst); /* Cluster start sector */ + for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) { /* Fill the new cluster with 0 */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR; + dj->fs->winsect++; + } + dj->fs->winsect -= c; /* Rewind window address */ +#else + return FR_NO_FILE; /* Report EOT */ +#endif + } + dj->clust = clst; /* Initialize data for new cluster */ + dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst); + } + } + } + + dj->index = i; + dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +DWORD ld_clust ( + FATFS *fs, /* Pointer to the fs object */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry */ +) +{ + DWORD cl; + + cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO); + if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32) + cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16; + + return cl; +} + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +void st_clust ( + BYTE *dir, /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + DWORD cl /* Value to be set */ +) +{ + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16); +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +static +const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30}; /* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */ + + +static +int cmp_lfn ( /* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */ + WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc, uc; + + + i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13; /* Get offset in the LFN buffer */ + s = 0; wc = 1; + do { + uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]); /* Pick an LFN character from the entry */ + if (wc) { /* Last char has not been processed */ + wc = ff_wtoupper(uc); /* Convert it to upper case */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++])) /* Compare it */ + return 0; /* Not matched */ + } else { + if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0; /* Check filler */ + } + } while (++s < 13); /* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */ + + if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i]) /* Last segment matched but different length */ + return 0; + + return 1; /* The part of LFN matched */ +} + + + +static +int pick_lfn ( /* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */ + WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */ + BYTE *dir /* Pointer to the directory entry */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc, uc; + + + i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13; /* Offset in the LFN buffer */ + + s = 0; wc = 1; + do { + uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]); /* Pick an LFN character from the entry */ + if (wc) { /* Last char has not been processed */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0; /* Buffer overflow? */ + lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc; /* Store it */ + } else { + if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0; /* Check filler */ + } + } while (++s < 13); /* Read all character in the entry */ + + if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) { /* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */ + if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0; /* Buffer overflow? */ + lfnbuf[i] = 0; + } + + return 1; +} + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +void fit_lfn ( + const WCHAR *lfnbuf, /* Pointer to the LFN buffer */ + BYTE *dir, /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + BYTE ord, /* LFN order (1-20) */ + BYTE sum /* SFN sum */ +) +{ + UINT i, s; + WCHAR wc; + + + dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum; /* Set check sum */ + dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN; /* Set attribute. LFN entry */ + dir[LDIR_Type] = 0; + ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0); + + i = (ord - 1) * 13; /* Get offset in the LFN buffer */ + s = wc = 0; + do { + if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++]; /* Get an effective char */ + ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc); /* Put it */ + if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF; /* Padding chars following last char */ + } while (++s < 13); + if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE; /* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */ + dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord; /* Set the LFN order */ +} + +#endif +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create numbered name */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +void gen_numname ( + BYTE *dst, /* Pointer to generated SFN */ + const BYTE *src, /* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */ + const WCHAR *lfn, /* Pointer to LFN */ + WORD seq /* Sequence number */ +) +{ + BYTE ns[8], c; + UINT i, j; + + + mem_cpy(dst, src, 11); + + if (seq > 5) { /* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */ + do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn); + } + + /* itoa (hexdecimal) */ + i = 7; + do { + c = (seq % 16) + '0'; + if (c > '9') c += 7; + ns[i--] = c; + seq /= 16; + } while (seq); + ns[i] = '~'; + + /* Append the number */ + for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) { + if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) { + if (j == i - 1) break; + j++; + } + } + do { + dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' '; + } while (j < 8); +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Calculate sum of an SFN */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_LFN +static +BYTE sum_sfn ( + const BYTE *dir /* Ptr to directory entry */ +) +{ + BYTE sum = 0; + UINT n = 11; + + do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n); + return sum; +} +#endif + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT dir_find ( + DIR *dj /* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN + BYTE a, ord, sum; +#endif + + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind directory object */ + if (res != FR_OK) return res; + +#if _USE_LFN + ord = sum = 0xFF; +#endif + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dir = dj->dir; /* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */ + c = dir[DIR_Name]; + if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; } /* Reached to end of table */ +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK; + if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) { /* An entry without valid data */ + ord = 0xFF; + } else { + if (a == AM_LFN) { /* An LFN entry is found */ + if (dj->lfn) { + if (c & LLE) { /* Is it start of LFN sequence? */ + sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum]; + c &= ~LLE; ord = c; /* LFN start order */ + dj->lfn_idx = dj->index; + } + /* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */ + ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF; + } + } else { /* An SFN entry is found */ + if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break; /* LFN matched? */ + ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF; /* Reset LFN sequence */ + if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break; /* SFN matched? */ + } + } +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */ + break; +#endif + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + + return res; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read an object from the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +static +FRESULT dir_read ( + DIR *dj /* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN + BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF; +#endif + + res = FR_NO_FILE; + while (dj->sect) { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dir = dj->dir; /* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */ + c = dir[DIR_Name]; + if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; } /* Reached to end of table */ +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK; + if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) { /* An entry without valid data */ + ord = 0xFF; + } else { + if (a == AM_LFN) { /* An LFN entry is found */ + if (c & LLE) { /* Is it start of LFN sequence? */ + sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum]; + c &= ~LLE; ord = c; + dj->lfn_idx = dj->index; + } + /* Check LFN validity and capture it */ + ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF; + } else { /* An SFN entry is found */ + if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir)) /* Is there a valid LFN? */ + dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF; /* It has no LFN. */ + break; + } + } +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL)) /* Is it a valid entry? */ + break; +#endif + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + } + + if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0; + + return res; +} +#endif + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Register an object to the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY +static +FRESULT dir_register ( /* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */ + DIR *dj /* Target directory with object name to be created */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE c, *dir; +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + WORD n, ne, is; + BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum; + WCHAR *lfn; + + + fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn; + mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12); + + if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT)) /* Cannot create dot entry */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + + if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) { /* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */ + fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0; /* Find only SFN */ + for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) { + gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n); /* Generate a numbered name */ + res = dir_find(dj); /* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + } + if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED; /* Abort if too many collisions */ + if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res; /* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */ + fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn; + } + + if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) { /* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */ + for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ; + ne = (ne + 25) / 13; + } else { /* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */ + ne = 1; + } + + /* Reserve contiguous entries */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) return res; + n = is = 0; + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + c = *dj->dir; /* Check the entry status */ + if (c == DDE || c == 0) { /* Is it a blank entry? */ + if (n == 0) is = dj->index; /* First index of the contiguous entry */ + if (++n == ne) break; /* A contiguous entry that required count is found */ + } else { + n = 0; /* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */ + } + res = dir_next(dj, 1); /* Next entry with table stretch */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + + if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) { /* Initialize LFN entry if needed */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, is); + if (res == FR_OK) { + sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn); /* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */ + ne--; + do { /* Store LFN entries in bottom first */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum); + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK && --ne); + } + } + +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + do { /* Find a blank entry for the SFN */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + c = *dj->dir; + if (c == DDE || c == 0) break; /* Is it a blank entry? */ + res = dir_next(dj, 1); /* Next entry with table stretch */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + } +#endif + + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Initialize the SFN entry */ + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj->dir; + mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR); /* Clean the entry */ + mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11); /* Put SFN */ +#if _USE_LFN + dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT); /* Put NT flag */ +#endif + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + } + } + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Remove an object from the directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE +static +FRESULT dir_remove ( /* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */ + DIR *dj /* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + WORD i; + + i = dj->index; /* SFN index */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx)); /* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + do { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + *dj->dir = DDE; /* Mark the entry "deleted" */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + if (dj->index >= i) break; /* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */ + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Next entry */ + } while (res == FR_OK); + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR; + } + +#else /* Non LFN configuration */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index); + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + *dj->dir = DDE; /* Mark the entry "deleted" */ + dj->fs->wflag = 1; + } + } +#endif + + return res; +} +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT create_name ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the directory object */ + const TCHAR **path /* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */ +) +{ +#ifdef _EXCVT + static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT; /* Upper conversion table for extended chars */ +#endif + +#if _USE_LFN /* LFN configuration */ + BYTE b, cf; + WCHAR w, *lfn; + UINT i, ni, si, di; + const TCHAR *p; + + /* Create LFN in Unicode */ + for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ; /* Strip duplicated separator */ + lfn = dj->lfn; + si = di = 0; + for (;;) { + w = p[si++]; /* Get a character */ + if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break; /* Break on end of segment */ + if (di >= _MAX_LFN) /* Reject too long name */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if !_LFN_UNICODE + w &= 0xFF; + if (IsDBCS1(w)) { /* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + b = (BYTE)p[si++]; /* Get 2nd byte */ + if (!IsDBCS2(b)) + return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject invalid sequence */ + w = (w << 8) + b; /* Create a DBC */ + } + w = ff_convert(w, 1); /* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */ + if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject invalid code */ +#endif + if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + lfn[di++] = w; /* Store the Unicode char */ + } + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ +#if _FS_RPATH + if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */ + (di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) { + lfn[di] = 0; + for (i = 0; i < 11; i++) + dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' '; + dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT; /* This is a dot entry */ + return FR_OK; + } +#endif + while (di) { /* Strip trailing spaces and dots */ + w = lfn[di-1]; + if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break; + di--; + } + if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject nul string */ + + lfn[di] = 0; /* LFN is created */ + + /* Create SFN in directory form */ + mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11); + for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ; /* Strip leading spaces and dots */ + if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; + while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--; /* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */ + + b = i = 0; ni = 8; + for (;;) { + w = lfn[si++]; /* Get an LFN char */ + if (!w) break; /* Break on end of the LFN */ + if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) { /* Remove spaces and dots */ + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue; + } + + if (i >= ni || si == di) { /* Extension or end of SFN */ + if (ni == 11) { /* Long extension */ + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break; + } + if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; /* Out of 8.3 format */ + if (si > di) break; /* No extension */ + si = di; i = 8; ni = 11; /* Enter extension section */ + b <<= 2; continue; + } + + if (w >= 0x80) { /* Non ASCII char */ +#ifdef _EXCVT + w = ff_convert(w, 0); /* Unicode -> OEM code */ + if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80]; /* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */ +#else + w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0); /* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */ +#endif + cf |= NS_LFN; /* Force create LFN entry */ + } + + if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) { /* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + if (i >= ni - 1) { + cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue; + } + dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8); + } else { /* Single byte char */ + if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) { /* Replace illegal chars for SFN */ + w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */ + } else { + if (IsUpper(w)) { /* ASCII large capital */ + b |= 2; + } else { + if (IsLower(w)) { /* ASCII small capital */ + b |= 1; w -= 0x20; + } + } + } + } + dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w; + } + + if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE; /* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */ + + if (ni == 8) b <<= 2; + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03) /* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */ + cf |= NS_LFN; + if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) { /* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */ + if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT; /* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */ + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY; /* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */ + } + + dj->fn[NS] = cf; /* SFN is created */ + + return FR_OK; + + +#else /* Non-LFN configuration */ + BYTE b, c, d, *sfn; + UINT ni, si, i; + const char *p; + + /* Create file name in directory form */ + for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ; /* Strip duplicated separator */ + sfn = dj->fn; + mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11); + si = i = b = 0; ni = 8; +#if _FS_RPATH + if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */ + for (;;) { + c = (BYTE)p[si++]; + if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break; + sfn[i++] = c; + } + if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME; + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ + return FR_OK; + } +#endif + for (;;) { + c = (BYTE)p[si++]; + if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break; /* Break on end of segment */ + if (c == '.' || i >= ni) { + if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME; + i = 8; ni = 11; + b <<= 2; continue; + } + if (c >= 0x80) { /* Extended char? */ + b |= 3; /* Eliminate NT flag */ +#ifdef _EXCVT + c = excvt[c - 0x80]; /* Upper conversion (SBCS) */ +#else +#if !_DF1S /* ASCII only cfg */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; +#endif +#endif + } + if (IsDBCS1(c)) { /* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + d = (BYTE)p[si++]; /* Get 2nd byte */ + if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1) /* Reject invalid DBC */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + sfn[i++] = c; + sfn[i++] = d; + } else { /* Single byte code */ + if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c)) /* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */ + return FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (IsUpper(c)) { /* ASCII large capital? */ + b |= 2; + } else { + if (IsLower(c)) { /* ASCII small capital? */ + b |= 1; c -= 0x20; + } + } + sfn[i++] = c; + } + } + *path = &p[si]; /* Return pointer to the next segment */ + c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0; /* Set last segment flag if end of path */ + + if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Reject nul string */ + if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE; /* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */ + + if (ni == 8) b <<= 2; + if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT; /* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */ + if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY; /* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */ + + sfn[NS] = c; /* Store NT flag, File name is created */ + + return FR_OK; +#endif +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get file information from directory entry */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +static +void get_fileinfo ( /* No return code */ + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the directory object */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to the file information to be filled */ +) +{ + UINT i; + BYTE nt, *dir; + TCHAR *p, c; + + + p = fno->fname; + if (dj->sect) { + dir = dj->dir; + nt = dir[DIR_NTres]; /* NT flag */ + for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) { /* Copy name body */ + c = dir[i]; + if (c == ' ') break; + if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE; + if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20; +#if _LFN_UNICODE + if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1])) + c = (c << 8) | dir[++i]; + c = ff_convert(c, 1); + if (!c) c = '?'; +#endif + *p++ = c; + } + if (dir[8] != ' ') { /* Copy name extension */ + *p++ = '.'; + for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) { + c = dir[i]; + if (c == ' ') break; + if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20; +#if _LFN_UNICODE + if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1])) + c = (c << 8) | dir[++i]; + c = ff_convert(c, 1); + if (!c) c = '?'; +#endif + *p++ = c; + } + } + fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr]; /* Attribute */ + fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize); /* Size */ + fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate); /* Date */ + fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime); /* Time */ + } + *p = 0; /* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */ + +#if _USE_LFN + if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) { + TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname; + WCHAR w, *lfn; + + i = 0; + if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */ + lfn = dj->lfn; + while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) { /* Get an LFN char */ +#if !_LFN_UNICODE + w = ff_convert(w, 0); /* Unicode -> OEM conversion */ + if (!w) { i = 0; break; } /* Could not convert, no LFN */ + if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) /* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */ + tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8); +#endif + if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; } /* Buffer overflow, no LFN */ + tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w; + } + } + tp[i] = 0; /* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */ + } +#endif +} +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Follow a file path */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT follow_path ( /* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */ + DIR *dj, /* Directory object to return last directory and found object */ + const TCHAR *path /* Full-path string to find a file or directory */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + BYTE *dir, ns; + + +#if _FS_RPATH + if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */ + path++; dj->sclust = 0; /* Strip it and start from the root dir */ + } else { /* No heading separator */ + dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir; /* Start from the current dir */ + } +#else + if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') /* Strip heading separator if exist */ + path++; + dj->sclust = 0; /* Start from the root dir */ +#endif + + if ((UINT)*path < ' ') { /* Nul path means the start directory itself */ + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); + dj->dir = 0; + } else { /* Follow path */ + for (;;) { + res = create_name(dj, &path); /* Get a segment */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + res = dir_find(dj); /* Find it */ + ns = *(dj->fn+NS); + if (res != FR_OK) { /* Failed to find the object */ + if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break; /* Abort if any hard error occurred */ + /* Object not found */ + if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) { /* If dot entry is not exit */ + dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0; /* It is the root dir */ + res = FR_OK; + if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue; + } else { /* Could not find the object */ + if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + break; + } + if (ns & NS_LAST) break; /* Last segment match. Function completed. */ + dir = dj->dir; /* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */ + if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot follow because it is a file */ + res = FR_NO_PATH; break; + } + dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir); + } + } + + return res; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +BYTE check_fs ( /* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */ + FATFS *fs, /* File system object */ + DWORD sect /* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */ +) +{ + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Load boot record */ + return 3; + if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55) /* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */ + return 2; + + if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146) /* Check "FAT" string */ + return 0; + if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146) + return 0; + + return 1; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT chk_mounted ( /* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */ + const TCHAR **path, /* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */ + FATFS **rfs, /* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */ + BYTE wmode /* !=0: Check write protection for write access */ +) +{ + BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl; + UINT vol; + DSTATUS stat; + DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat; + WORD nrsv; + const TCHAR *p = *path; + FATFS *fs; + + + /* Get logical drive number from the path name */ + vol = p[0] - '0'; /* Is there a drive number? */ + if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') { /* Found a drive number, get and strip it */ + p += 2; *path = p; /* Return pointer to the path name */ + } else { /* No drive number is given */ +#if _FS_RPATH + vol = CurrVol; /* Use current drive */ +#else + vol = 0; /* Use drive 0 */ +#endif + } + + /* Check if the file system object is valid or not */ + *rfs = 0; + if (vol >= _VOLUMES) /* Is the drive number valid? */ + return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + fs = FatFs[vol]; /* Get corresponding file system object */ + if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED; /* Is the file system object available? */ + + ENTER_FF(fs); /* Lock file system */ + + *rfs = fs; /* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */ + if (fs->fs_type) { /* If the volume has been mounted */ + stat = disk_status(fs->drv); + if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) { /* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */ + if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT)) /* Check write protection if needed */ + return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; + return FR_OK; /* The file system object is valid */ + } + } + + /* The file system object is not valid. */ + /* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */ + + fs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear the file system object */ + fs->drv = LD2PD(vol); /* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */ + stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv); /* Initialize the physical drive */ + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) /* Check if the initialization succeeded */ + return FR_NOT_READY; /* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */ + if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT)) /* Check disk write protection if needed */ + return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; +#if _MAX_SS != 512 /* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */ + if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; +#endif + /* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */ + fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0); /* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */ + if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1; /* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */ + if (fmt == 1) { /* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */ + /* Check the partition listed in the partition table */ + pi = LD2PT(vol); + if (pi) pi--; + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */ + if (tbl[4]) { /* Is the partition existing? */ + bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]); /* Partition offset in LBA */ + fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect); /* Check the partition */ + } + } + if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* No FAT volume is found */ + + /* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */ + + if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs)) /* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */ + return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; + + fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32); + fs->fsize = fasize; + + fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs]; /* Number of FAT copies */ + if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Must be 1 or 2) */ + fasize *= b; /* Number of sectors for FAT area */ + + fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus]; /* Number of sectors per cluster */ + if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Must be power of 2) */ + + fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt); /* Number of root directory entries */ + if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */ + + tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16); /* Number of sectors on the volume */ + if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32); + + nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt); /* Number of reserved sectors */ + if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */ + + /* Determine the FAT sub type */ + sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR); /* RSV+FAT+DIR */ + if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Invalid volume size) */ + nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize; /* Number of clusters */ + if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (Invalid volume size) */ + fmt = FS_FAT12; + if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16; + if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32; + + /* Boundaries and Limits */ + fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2; /* Number of FAT entries */ + fs->database = bsect + sysect; /* Data start sector */ + fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; /* FAT start sector */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */ + fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus); /* Root directory start cluster */ + szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4; /* (Required FAT size) */ + } else { + if (!fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; /* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */ + fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize; /* Root directory start sector */ + szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ? /* (Required FAT size) */ + fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1); + } + if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs)) /* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */ + return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM; + +#if !_FS_READONLY + /* Initialize cluster allocation information */ + fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF; + fs->last_clust = 0; + + /* Get fsinfo if available */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + fs->fsi_flag = 0; + fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo); + if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK && + LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 && + LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 && + LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) { + fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free); + fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count); + } + } +#endif + fs->fs_type = fmt; /* FAT sub-type */ + fs->id = ++Fsid; /* File system mount ID */ + fs->winsect = 0; /* Invalidate sector cache */ + fs->wflag = 0; +#if _FS_RPATH + fs->cdir = 0; /* Current directory (root dir) */ +#endif +#if _FS_LOCK /* Clear file lock semaphores */ + clear_lock(fs); +#endif + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +static +FRESULT validate ( /* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */ + void* obj /* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */ +) +{ + FIL *fil; + + + fil = (FIL*)obj; /* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */ + if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id) + return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + ENTER_FF(fil->fs); /* Lock file system */ + + if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT) + return FR_NOT_READY; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------- + + Public Functions + +--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_mount ( + BYTE vol, /* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */ + FATFS *fs /* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/ +) +{ + FATFS *rfs; + + + if (vol >= _VOLUMES) /* Check if the drive number is valid */ + return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + rfs = FatFs[vol]; /* Get current fs object */ + + if (rfs) { +#if _FS_LOCK + clear_lock(rfs); +#endif +#if _FS_REENTRANT /* Discard sync object of the current volume */ + if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + rfs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear old fs object */ + } + + if (fs) { + fs->fs_type = 0; /* Clear new fs object */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT /* Create sync object for the new volume */ + if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + } + FatFs[vol] = fs; /* Register new fs object */ + + return FR_OK; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Open or Create a File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_open ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the blank file object */ + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file name */ + BYTE mode /* Access mode and file open mode flags */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + fp->fs = 0; /* Clear file object */ + +#if !_FS_READONLY + mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW; + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ)); +#else + mode &= FA_READ; + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + dir = dj.dir; +#if !_FS_READONLY /* R/W configuration */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (!dir) /* Current dir itself */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if _FS_LOCK + else + res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0); +#endif + } + /* Create or Open a file */ + if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) { + DWORD dw, cl; + + if (res != FR_OK) { /* No file, create new */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) /* There is no file to open, create a new entry */ +#if _FS_LOCK + res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES; +#else + res = dir_register(&dj); +#endif + mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS; /* File is created */ + dir = dj.dir; /* New entry */ + } + else { /* Any object is already existing */ + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) { /* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } else { + if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW) /* Cannot create as new file */ + res = FR_EXIST; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) { /* Truncate it if overwrite mode */ + dw = get_fattime(); /* Created time */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw); + dir[DIR_Attr] = 0; /* Reset attribute */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0); /* size = 0 */ + cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); /* Get start cluster */ + st_clust(dir, 0); /* cluster = 0 */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + if (cl) { /* Remove the cluster chain if exist */ + dw = dj.fs->winsect; + res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1; /* Reuse the cluster hole */ + res = move_window(dj.fs, dw); + } + } + } + } + else { /* Open an existing file */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow succeeded */ + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) { /* It is a directory */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } else { + if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS) /* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */ + mode |= FA__WRITTEN; + fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect; /* Pointer to the directory entry */ + fp->dir_ptr = dir; +#if _FS_LOCK + fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0); + if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR; +#endif + } + +#else /* R/O configuration */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow succeeded */ + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Current dir itself */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) /* It is a directory */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } + } +#endif + FREE_BUF(); + + if (res == FR_OK) { + fp->flag = mode; /* File access mode */ + fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); /* File start cluster */ + fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize); /* File size */ + fp->fptr = 0; /* File pointer */ + fp->dsect = 0; +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + fp->cltbl = 0; /* Normal seek mode */ +#endif + fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id; /* Validate file object */ + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_read ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + void *buff, /* Pointer to data buffer */ + UINT btr, /* Number of bytes to read */ + UINT *br /* Pointer to number of bytes read */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD clst, sect, remain; + UINT rcnt, cc; + BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff; + + + *br = 0; /* Clear read byte counter */ + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Aborted file? */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr; + if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain; /* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */ + + for ( ; btr; /* Repeat until all data read */ + rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) { + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* On the top of the file? */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* Follow from the origin */ + } else { /* Middle or end of the file */ +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) + clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr); /* Get cluster# from the CLMT */ + else +#endif + clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */ + } + if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + cc = btr / SS(fp->fs); /* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */ + if (cc) { /* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */ + if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize) /* Clip at cluster boundary */ + cc = fp->fs->csize - csect; + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 /* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */ +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) + mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs)); +#else + if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc) + mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs)); +#endif +#endif + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc; /* Number of bytes transferred */ + continue; + } +#if !_FS_TINY + if (fp->dsect != sect) { /* Load data sector if not in cache */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Fill sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } +#endif + fp->dsect = sect; + } + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)); /* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */ + if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr; +#if _FS_TINY + if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); /* Pick partial sector */ +#else + mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); /* Pick partial sector */ +#endif + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} + + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Write File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_write ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + const void *buff, /* Pointer to the data to be written */ + UINT btw, /* Number of bytes to write */ + UINT *bw /* Pointer to number of bytes written */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD clst, sect; + UINT wcnt, cc; + const BYTE *wbuff = buff; + BYTE csect; + + + *bw = 0; /* Clear write byte counter */ + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Aborted file? */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0; /* File size cannot reach 4GB */ + + for ( ; btw; /* Repeat until all data written */ + wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) { + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* On the top of the file? */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* Follow from the origin */ + if (clst == 0) /* When no cluster is allocated, */ + fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0); /* Create a new cluster chain */ + } else { /* Middle or end of the file */ +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) + clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr); /* Get cluster# from the CLMT */ + else +#endif + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */ + } + if (clst == 0) break; /* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */ + if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0)) /* Write-back sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#else + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + cc = btw / SS(fp->fs); /* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */ + if (cc) { /* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */ + if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize) /* Clip at cluster boundary */ + cc = fp->fs->csize - csect; + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */ + mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs)); + fp->fs->wflag = 0; + } +#else + if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */ + mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs)); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc; /* Number of bytes transferred */ + continue; + } +#if _FS_TINY + if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) { /* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */ + if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->fs->winsect = sect; + } +#else + if (fp->dsect != sect) { /* Fill sector cache with file data */ + if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize && + disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } +#endif + fp->dsect = sect; + } + wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */ + if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw; +#if _FS_TINY + if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt); /* Fit partial sector */ + fp->fs->wflag = 1; +#else + mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt); /* Fit partial sector */ + fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY; +#endif + } + + if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr; /* Update file size if needed */ + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; /* Set file change flag */ + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Synchronize the File Object */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_sync ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD tim; + BYTE *dir; + + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) { /* Has the file been written? */ +#if !_FS_TINY /* Write-back dirty buffer */ + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + /* Update the directory entry */ + res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect); + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = fp->dir_ptr; + dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC; /* Set archive bit */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize); /* Update file size */ + st_clust(dir, fp->sclust); /* Update start cluster */ + tim = get_fattime(); /* Update updated time */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0); + fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN; + fp->fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(fp->fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Close File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_close ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object to be closed */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + +#if _FS_READONLY + res = validate(fp); + { +#if _FS_REENTRANT + FATFS *fs = fp->fs; +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0; /* Discard file object */ + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); + } +#else + res = f_sync(fp); /* Flush cached data */ +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Decrement open counter */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT + FATFS *fs = fp->fs;; + res = validate(fp); + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dec_lock(fp->lockid); + unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK); + } +#else + res = dec_lock(fp->lockid); +#endif + } +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0; /* Discard file object */ + return res; +#endif +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#if _FS_RPATH >= 1 + +FRESULT f_chdrive ( + BYTE drv /* Drive number */ +) +{ + if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + + CurrVol = drv; + + return FR_OK; +} + + + +FRESULT f_chdir ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (!dj.dir) { + dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust; /* Start directory itself */ + } else { + if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) /* Reached to the directory */ + dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir); + else + res = FR_NO_PATH; /* Reached but a file */ + } + } + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + +#if _FS_RPATH >= 2 +FRESULT f_getcwd ( + TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the directory path */ + UINT sz_path /* Size of path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + UINT i, n; + DWORD ccl; + TCHAR *tp; + FILINFO fno; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + *path = 0; + res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0); /* Get current volume */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + i = sz_path; /* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */ + dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir; /* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */ + while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) { /* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */ + res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1); /* Get parent dir */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; + res = dir_read(&dj); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir); /* Goto parent dir */ + res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + do { /* Find the entry links to the child dir */ + res = dir_read(&dj); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break; /* Found the entry */ + res = dir_next(&dj, 0); + } while (res == FR_OK); + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */ + if (res != FR_OK) break; +#if _USE_LFN + fno.lfname = path; + fno.lfsize = i; +#endif + get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno); /* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */ + tp = fno.fname; + if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path; + for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ; + if (i < n + 3) { + res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break; + } + while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n]; + path[--i] = '/'; + } + tp = path; + if (res == FR_OK) { + *tp++ = '0' + CurrVol; /* Put drive number */ + *tp++ = ':'; + if (i == sz_path) { /* Root-dir */ + *tp++ = '/'; + } else { /* Sub-dir */ + do /* Add stacked path str */ + *tp++ = path[i++]; + while (i < sz_path); + } + } + *tp = 0; + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} +#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */ +#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */ + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Seek File R/W Pointer */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_lseek ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + DWORD ofs /* File pointer from top of file */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Check abort flag */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + if (fp->cltbl) { /* Fast seek */ + DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl; + + if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) { /* Create CLMT */ + tbl = fp->cltbl; + tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2; /* Given table size and required table size */ + cl = fp->sclust; /* Top of the chain */ + if (cl) { + do { + /* Get a fragment */ + tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2; /* Top, length and used items */ + do { + pcl = cl; ncl++; + cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl); + if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + } while (cl == pcl + 1); + if (ulen <= tlen) { /* Store the length and top of the fragment */ + *tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl; + } + } while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent); /* Repeat until end of chain */ + } + *fp->cltbl = ulen; /* Number of items used */ + if (ulen <= tlen) + *tbl = 0; /* Terminate table */ + else + res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; /* Given table size is smaller than required */ + + } else { /* Fast seek */ + if (ofs > fp->fsize) /* Clip offset at the file size */ + ofs = fp->fsize; + fp->fptr = ofs; /* Set file pointer */ + if (ofs) { + fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1); + dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); + if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1); + if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) { /* Refill sector cache if needed */ +#if !_FS_TINY +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK) /* Load current sector */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#endif + fp->dsect = dsc; + } + } + } + } else +#endif + + /* Normal Seek */ + { + DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr; + + if (ofs > fp->fsize /* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE) +#endif + ) ofs = fp->fsize; + + ifptr = fp->fptr; + fp->fptr = nsect = 0; + if (ofs) { + bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs); /* Cluster size (byte) */ + if (ifptr > 0 && + (ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) { /* When seek to same or following cluster, */ + fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1); /* start from the current cluster */ + ofs -= fp->fptr; + clst = fp->clust; + } else { /* When seek to back cluster, */ + clst = fp->sclust; /* start from the first cluster */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (clst == 0) { /* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */ + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0); + if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->sclust = clst; + } +#endif + fp->clust = clst; + } + if (clst != 0) { + while (ofs > bcs) { /* Cluster following loop */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) { /* Check if in write mode or not */ + clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst); /* Force stretch if in write mode */ + if (clst == 0) { /* When disk gets full, clip file size */ + ofs = bcs; break; + } + } else +#endif + clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst); /* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */ + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; + fp->fptr += bcs; + ofs -= bcs; + } + fp->fptr += ofs; + if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) { + nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst); /* Current sector */ + if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs); + } + } + } + if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) { /* Fill sector cache if needed */ +#if !_FS_TINY +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) { /* Write-back dirty sector cache */ + if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK) + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY; + } +#endif + if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK) /* Fill sector cache */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); +#endif + fp->dsect = nsect; + } +#if !_FS_READONLY + if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) { /* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */ + fp->fsize = fp->fptr; + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; + } +#endif + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create a Directory Object */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_opendir ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to directory object to create */ + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + FATFS *fs; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0); + fs = dj->fs; + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(*dj); + res = follow_path(dj, path); /* Follow the path to the directory */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (dj->dir) { /* It is not the root dir */ + if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) { /* The object is a directory */ + dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir); + } else { /* The object is not a directory */ + res = FR_NO_PATH; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + dj->id = fs->id; + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind dir */ + } + } + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH; + if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0; /* Invalidate the dir object if function failed */ + } else { + dj->fs = 0; + } + + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_readdir ( + DIR *dj, /* Pointer to the open directory object */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to file information to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = validate(dj); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (!fno) { + res = dir_sdi(dj, 0); /* Rewind the directory object */ + } else { + INIT_BUF(*dj); + res = dir_read(dj); /* Read an directory item */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Reached end of dir */ + dj->sect = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } + if (res == FR_OK) { /* A valid entry is found */ + get_fileinfo(dj, fno); /* Get the object information */ + res = dir_next(dj, 0); /* Increment index for next */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { + dj->sect = 0; + res = FR_OK; + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res); +} + + + +#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get File Status */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_stat ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file path */ + FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to file information to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Follow completed */ + if (dj.dir) /* Found an object */ + get_fileinfo(&dj, fno); + else /* It is root dir */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get Number of Free Clusters */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_getfree ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */ + DWORD *nclst, /* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */ + FATFS **fatfs /* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + FATFS *fs; + DWORD n, clst, sect, stat; + UINT i; + BYTE fat, *p; + + + /* Get drive number */ + res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0); + fs = *fatfs; + if (res == FR_OK) { + /* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */ + if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) { + *nclst = fs->free_clust; + } else { + /* Get number of free clusters */ + fat = fs->fs_type; + n = 0; + if (fat == FS_FAT12) { + clst = 2; + do { + stat = get_fat(fs, clst); + if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; } + if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; } + if (stat == 0) n++; + } while (++clst < fs->n_fatent); + } else { + clst = fs->n_fatent; + sect = fs->fatbase; + i = 0; p = 0; + do { + if (!i) { + res = move_window(fs, sect++); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + p = fs->win; + i = SS(fs); + } + if (fat == FS_FAT16) { + if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++; + p += 2; i -= 2; + } else { + if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++; + p += 4; i -= 4; + } + } while (--clst); + } + fs->free_clust = n; + if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1; + *nclst = n; + } + } + LEAVE_FF(fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Truncate File */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_truncate ( + FIL *fp /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD ncl; + + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) { /* Check abort flag */ + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)) /* Check access mode */ + res = FR_DENIED; + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) { + fp->fsize = fp->fptr; /* Set file size to current R/W point */ + fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN; + if (fp->fptr == 0) { /* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */ + res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust); + fp->sclust = 0; + } else { /* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */ + ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); + res = FR_OK; + if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR; + if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR; + if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) { + res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF); + if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl); + } + } + } + if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Delete a File or Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_unlink ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the file or directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj, sdj; + BYTE *dir; + DWORD dclst; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Cannot remove dot entry */ +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2); /* Cannot remove open file */ +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { /* The object is accessible */ + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; /* Cannot remove the start directory */ + } else { + if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO) + res = FR_DENIED; /* Cannot remove R/O object */ + } + dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir); + if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Is it a sub-dir? */ + if (dclst < 2) { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR)); /* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */ + sdj.sclust = dclst; + res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2); /* Exclude dot entries */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_read(&sdj); + if (res == FR_OK /* Not empty dir */ +#if _FS_RPATH + || dclst == dj.fs->cdir /* Current dir */ +#endif + ) res = FR_DENIED; + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK; /* Empty */ + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_remove(&dj); /* Remove the directory entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + if (dclst) /* Remove the cluster chain if exist */ + res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst); + if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create a Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_mkdir ( + const TCHAR *path /* Pointer to the directory path */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir, n; + DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime(); + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST; /* Any object with same name is already existing */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Can create a new directory */ + dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0); /* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */ + res = FR_OK; + if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED; /* No space to allocate a new cluster */ + if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR; + if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR; + if (res == FR_OK) /* Flush FAT */ + res = move_window(dj.fs, 0); + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Initialize the new directory table */ + dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl); + dir = dj.fs->win; + mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs)); + mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3); /* Create "." entry */ + dir[DIR_Name] = '.'; + dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR; + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); + st_clust(dir, dcl); + mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); /* Create ".." entry */ + dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust; + if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase) + pcl = 0; + st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl); + for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) { /* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */ + dj.fs->winsect = dsc++; + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = move_window(dj.fs, 0); + if (res != FR_OK) break; + mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs)); + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj); /* Register the object to the directory */ + if (res != FR_OK) { + remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl); /* Could not register, remove cluster chain */ + } else { + dir = dj.dir; + dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR; /* Attribute */ + ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim); /* Created time */ + st_clust(dir, dcl); /* Table start cluster */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change Attribute */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_chmod ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file path */ + BYTE value, /* Attribute bits */ + BYTE mask /* Attribute mask to change */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Is it a root directory? */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { /* File or sub directory */ + mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC; /* Valid attribute mask */ + dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask); /* Apply attribute change */ + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Change Timestamp */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_utime ( + const TCHAR *path, /* Pointer to the file/directory name */ + const FILINFO *fno /* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR dj; + BYTE *dir; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + INIT_BUF(dj); + res = follow_path(&dj, path); /* Follow the file path */ + FREE_BUF(); + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = dj.dir; + if (!dir) { /* Root directory */ + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; + } else { /* File or sub-directory */ + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime); + ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate); + dj.fs->wflag = 1; + res = sync(dj.fs); + } + } + } + + LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res); +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Rename File/Directory */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_rename ( + const TCHAR *path_old, /* Pointer to the old name */ + const TCHAR *path_new /* Pointer to the new name */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DIR djo, djn; + BYTE buf[21], *dir; + DWORD dw; + DEF_NAMEBUF; + + + res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1); + if (res == FR_OK) { + djn.fs = djo.fs; + INIT_BUF(djo); + res = follow_path(&djo, path_old); /* Check old object */ + if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT)) + res = FR_INVALID_NAME; +#if _FS_LOCK + if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2); +#endif + if (res == FR_OK) { /* Old object is found */ + if (!djo.dir) { /* Is root dir? */ + res = FR_NO_FILE; + } else { + mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21); /* Save the object information except for name */ + mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR)); /* Check new object */ + res = follow_path(&djn, path_new); + if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST; /* The new object name is already existing */ + if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { /* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */ +/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */ + res = dir_register(&djn); /* Register the new entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) { + dir = djn.dir; /* Copy object information except for name */ + mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19); + dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC; + djo.fs->wflag = 1; + if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) { /* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */ + dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir)); + if (!dw) { + res = FR_INT_ERR; + } else { + res = move_window(djo.fs, dw); + dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR; /* .. entry */ + if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') { + dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust; + st_clust(dir, dw); + djo.fs->wflag = 1; + } + } + } + if (res == FR_OK) { + res = dir_remove(&djo); /* Remove old entry */ + if (res == FR_OK) + res = sync(djo.fs); + } + } +/* End critical section */ + } + } + } + FREE_BUF(); + } + LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res); +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */ +#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */ + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg) */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY + +FRESULT f_forward ( + FIL *fp, /* Pointer to the file object */ + UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT), /* Pointer to the streaming function */ + UINT btr, /* Number of bytes to forward */ + UINT *bf /* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */ +) +{ + FRESULT res; + DWORD remain, clst, sect; + UINT rcnt; + BYTE csect; + + + *bf = 0; /* Clear transfer byte counter */ + + if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT; + + res = validate(fp); /* Check validity of the object */ + if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res); + if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) /* Check error flag */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) /* Check access mode */ + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED); + + remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr; + if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain; /* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */ + + for ( ; btr && (*func)(0, 0); /* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */ + fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) { + csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1)); /* Sector offset in the cluster */ + if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) { /* On the sector boundary? */ + if (!csect) { /* On the cluster boundary? */ + clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ? /* On the top of the file? */ + fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust); + if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->clust = clst; /* Update current cluster */ + } + } + sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust); /* Get current data sector */ + if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + sect += csect; + if (move_window(fp->fs, sect)) /* Move sector window */ + ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR); + fp->dsect = sect; + rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)); /* Forward data from sector window */ + if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr; + rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt); + if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR); + } + + LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK); +} +#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */ + + + +#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Create File System on the Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#define N_ROOTDIR 512 /* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */ +#define N_FATS 1 /* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */ + + +FRESULT f_mkfs ( + BYTE drv, /* Logical drive number */ + BYTE sfd, /* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */ + UINT au /* Allocation unit size [bytes] */ +) +{ + static const WORD vst[] = { 1024, 512, 256, 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 0}; + static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512}; + BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part; + DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect; + UINT i; + DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data; /* LBA */ + DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir; /* Size */ + FATFS *fs; + DSTATUS stat; + + + /* Check mounted drive and clear work area */ + if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE; + if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + fs = FatFs[drv]; + if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED; + fs->fs_type = 0; + pdrv = LD2PD(drv); /* Physical drive */ + part = LD2PT(drv); /* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/ + + /* Get disk statics */ + stat = disk_initialize(pdrv); + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY; + if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; +#if _MAX_SS != 512 /* Get disk sector size */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS) + return FR_DISK_ERR; +#endif + if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) { + /* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */ + if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE]; + if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; /* No partition? */ + b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8); /* Volume start sector */ + n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12); /* Volume size */ + } else { + /* Create a partition in this function */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63; /* Volume start sector */ + n_vol -= b_vol; /* Volume size */ + } + + if (!au) { /* AU auto selection */ + vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512)); + for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ; + au = cst[i]; + } + au /= SS(fs); /* Number of sectors per cluster */ + if (au == 0) au = 1; + if (au > 128) au = 128; + + /* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */ + n_clst = n_vol / au; + fmt = FS_FAT12; + if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16; + if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32; + + /* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs); + n_rsv = 32; + n_dir = 0; + } else { + n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4; + n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs); + n_rsv = 1; + n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs); + } + b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv; /* FAT area start sector */ + b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS; /* Directory area start sector */ + b_data = b_dir + n_dir; /* Data area start sector */ + if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; /* Too small volume */ + + /* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */ + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1; + n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1); /* Next nearest erase block from current data start */ + n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS; + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { /* FAT32: Move FAT offset */ + n_rsv += n; + b_fat += n; + } else { /* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */ + n_fat += n; + } + + /* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */ + n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au; + if ( (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16) + || (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32)) + return FR_MKFS_ABORTED; + + switch (fmt) { /* Determine system ID for partition table */ + case FS_FAT12: sys = 0x01; break; + case FS_FAT16: sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break; + default: sys = 0x0C; + } + + if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) { + /* Update system ID in the partition table */ + tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE]; + tbl[4] = sys; + if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR; + md = 0xF8; + } else { + if (sfd) { /* No partition table (SFD) */ + md = 0xF0; + } else { /* Create partition table (FDISK) */ + mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs)); + tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table; /* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */ + tbl[1] = 1; /* Partition start head */ + tbl[2] = 1; /* Partition start sector */ + tbl[3] = 0; /* Partition start cylinder */ + tbl[4] = sys; /* System type */ + tbl[5] = 254; /* Partition end head */ + n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255; + tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63); /* Partition end sector */ + tbl[7] = (BYTE)n; /* End cylinder */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63); /* Partition start in LBA */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol); /* Partition size in LBA */ + ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); /* MBR signature */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) /* Write it to the MBR sector */ + return FR_DISK_ERR; + md = 0xF8; + } + } + + /* Create BPB in the VBR */ + tbl = fs->win; /* Clear sector */ + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); + mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */ + i = SS(fs); /* Sector size */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i); + tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au; /* Sectors per cluster */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv); /* Reserved sectors */ + tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS; /* Number of FATs */ + i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR; /* Number of rootdir entries */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i); + if (n_vol < 0x10000) { /* Number of total sectors */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol); + } else { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol); + } + tbl[BPB_Media] = md; /* Media descriptor */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63); /* Number of sectors per track */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255); /* Number of heads */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol); /* Hidden sectors */ + n = get_fattime(); /* Use current time as VSN */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n); /* VSN */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2); /* Root directory start cluster (2) */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1); /* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6); /* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */ + tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80; /* Drive number */ + tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29; /* Extended boot signature */ + mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME " "FAT32 ", 19); /* Volume label, FAT signature */ + } else { + ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n); /* VSN */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat); /* Number of sectors per FAT */ + tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80; /* Drive number */ + tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29; /* Extended boot signature */ + mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME " "FAT ", 19); /* Volume label, FAT signature */ + } + ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); /* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK) /* Write it to the VBR sector */ + return FR_DISK_ERR; + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) /* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */ + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1); + + /* Initialize FAT area */ + wsect = b_fat; + for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) { /* Initialize each FAT copy */ + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); /* 1st sector of the FAT */ + n = md; /* Media descriptor byte */ + if (fmt != FS_FAT32) { + n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00; + ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n); /* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */ + } else { + n |= 0xFFFFFF00; + ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n); /* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF); + ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF); /* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */ + } + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs)); /* Fill following FAT entries with zero */ + for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) { /* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */ + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + } + } + + /* Initialize root directory */ + i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir; + do { + if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK) + return FR_DISK_ERR; + } while (--i); + +#if _USE_ERASE /* Erase data area if needed */ + { + DWORD eb[2]; + + eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1; + disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb); + } +#endif + + /* Create FSInfo if needed */ + if (fmt == FS_FAT32) { + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252); + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272); + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1); /* Number of free clusters */ + ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2); /* Last allocated cluster# */ + ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55); + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1); /* Write original (VBR+1) */ + disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1); /* Write backup (VBR+7) */ + } + + return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR; +} + + +#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Divide Physical Drive */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +FRESULT f_fdisk ( + BYTE pdrv, /* Physical drive number */ + const DWORD szt[], /* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */ + void* work /* Pointer to the working buffer */ +) +{ + UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl; + BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work; + DSTATUS stat; + DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part; + + + stat = disk_initialize(pdrv); + if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY; + if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED; + if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR; + + /* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */ + for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ; + if (n == 256) n--; + e_hd = n - 1; + sz_cyl = 63 * n; + tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl; + + /* Create partition table */ + mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS); + p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0; + for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) { + p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl; + if (!p_cyl) continue; + s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl; + sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl; + if (i == 0) { /* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */ + s_hd = 1; + s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63; + } else { + s_hd = 0; + } + e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1; + if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER; + + /* Set partition table */ + p[1] = s_hd; /* Start head */ + p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1); /* Start sector */ + p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl; /* Start cylinder */ + p[4] = 0x06; /* System type (temporary setting) */ + p[5] = e_hd; /* End head */ + p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63); /* End sector */ + p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl; /* End cylinder */ + ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part); /* Start sector in LBA */ + ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part); /* Partition size */ + + /* Next partition */ + b_cyl += p_cyl; + } + ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55); + + /* Write it to the MBR */ + return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK; +} + + +#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */ +#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */ + + + + +#if _USE_STRFUNC +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Get a string from the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +TCHAR* f_gets ( + TCHAR* buff, /* Pointer to the string buffer to read */ + int len, /* Size of string buffer (characters) */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + int n = 0; + TCHAR c, *p = buff; + BYTE s[2]; + UINT rc; + + + while (n < len - 1) { /* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */ + f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc); + if (rc != 1) break; /* Break on EOF or error */ + c = s[0]; +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */ + if (c >= 0x80) { + if (c < 0xC0) continue; /* Skip stray trailer */ + if (c < 0xE0) { /* Two-byte sequence */ + f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc); + if (rc != 1) break; + c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F); + if (c < 0x80) c = '?'; + } else { + if (c < 0xF0) { /* Three-byte sequence */ + f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc); + if (rc != 2) break; + c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F); + if (c < 0x800) c = '?'; + } else { /* Reject four-byte sequence */ + c = '?'; + } + } + } +#endif +#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2 + if (c == '\r') continue; /* Strip '\r' */ +#endif + *p++ = c; + n++; + if (c == '\n') break; /* Break on EOL */ + } + *p = 0; + return n ? buff : 0; /* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */ +} + + + +#if !_FS_READONLY +#include <stdarg.h> +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a character to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_putc ( + TCHAR c, /* A character to be output */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + UINT bw, btw; + BYTE s[3]; + + +#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2 + if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil); /* LF -> CRLF conversion */ +#endif + +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */ + if (c < 0x80) { /* 7-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)c; + btw = 1; + } else { + if (c < 0x800) { /* 11-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6)); + s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F)); + btw = 2; + } else { /* 16-bit */ + s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12)); + s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F)); + s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F)); + btw = 3; + } + } +#else /* Write the character without conversion */ + s[0] = (BYTE)c; + btw = 1; +#endif + f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw); /* Write the char to the file */ + return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF; /* Return the result */ +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a string to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_puts ( + const TCHAR* str, /* Pointer to the string to be output */ + FIL* fil /* Pointer to the file object */ +) +{ + int n; + + + for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) { + if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF; + } + return n; +} + + + + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Put a formatted string to the file */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +int f_printf ( + FIL* fil, /* Pointer to the file object */ + const TCHAR* str, /* Pointer to the format string */ + ... /* Optional arguments... */ +) +{ + va_list arp; + BYTE f, r; + UINT i, j, w; + ULONG v; + TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p; + int res, chc, cc; + + + va_start(arp, str); + + for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) { + c = *str++; + if (c == 0) break; /* End of string */ + if (c != '%') { /* Non escape character */ + cc = f_putc(c, fil); + if (cc != EOF) cc = 1; + continue; + } + w = f = 0; + c = *str++; + if (c == '0') { /* Flag: '0' padding */ + f = 1; c = *str++; + } else { + if (c == '-') { /* Flag: left justified */ + f = 2; c = *str++; + } + } + while (IsDigit(c)) { /* Precision */ + w = w * 10 + c - '0'; + c = *str++; + } + if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') { /* Prefix: Size is long int */ + f |= 4; c = *str++; + } + if (!c) break; + d = c; + if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20; + switch (d) { /* Type is... */ + case 'S' : /* String */ + p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*); + for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ; + chc = 0; + if (!(f & 2)) { + while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + } + chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil)); + while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + if (cc != EOF) cc = chc; + continue; + case 'C' : /* Character */ + cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue; + case 'B' : /* Binary */ + r = 2; break; + case 'O' : /* Octal */ + r = 8; break; + case 'D' : /* Signed decimal */ + case 'U' : /* Unsigned decimal */ + r = 10; break; + case 'X' : /* Hexdecimal */ + r = 16; break; + default: /* Unknown type (pass-through) */ + cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue; + } + + /* Get an argument and put it in numeral */ + v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int)); + if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) { + v = 0 - v; + f |= 8; + } + i = 0; + do { + d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r; + if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07; + s[i++] = d + '0'; + } while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]); + if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-'; + j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' '; + res = 0; + while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil)); + do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i); + while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil)); + if (cc != EOF) cc = res; + } + + va_end(arp); + return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res; +} + +#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */ +#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..627cbaabe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h @@ -0,0 +1,337 @@ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module include file R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems. +/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial +/ developments under license policy of following terms. +/ +/ Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved. +/ +/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY. +/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for +/ personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. +/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. +/ +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _FATFS +#define _FATFS 4004 /* Revision ID */ + +#ifdef __cplusplus +extern "C" { +#endif + +#include "integer.h" /* Basic integer types */ +#include "ffconf.h" /* FatFs configuration options */ + +#if _FATFS != _FFCONF +#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h). +#endif + + + +/* Definitions of volume management */ + +#if _MULTI_PARTITION /* Multiple partition configuration */ +typedef struct { + BYTE pd; /* Physical drive number */ + BYTE pt; /* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */ +} PARTITION; +extern PARTITION VolToPart[]; /* Volume - Partition resolution table */ +#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd) /* Get physical drive number */ +#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt) /* Get partition index */ + +#else /* Single partition configuration */ +#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol) /* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */ +#define LD2PT(vol) 0 /* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */ + +#endif + + + +/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */ + +#if _LFN_UNICODE /* Unicode string */ +#if !_USE_LFN +#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg. +#endif +#ifndef _INC_TCHAR +typedef WCHAR TCHAR; +#define _T(x) L ## x +#define _TEXT(x) L ## x +#endif + +#else /* ANSI/OEM string */ +#ifndef _INC_TCHAR +typedef char TCHAR; +#define _T(x) x +#define _TEXT(x) x +#endif + +#endif + + + +/* File system object structure (FATFS) */ + +typedef struct { + BYTE fs_type; /* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */ + BYTE drv; /* Physical drive number */ + BYTE csize; /* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */ + BYTE n_fats; /* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */ + BYTE wflag; /* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */ + BYTE fsi_flag; /* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */ + WORD id; /* File system mount ID */ + WORD n_rootdir; /* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */ +#if _MAX_SS != 512 + WORD ssize; /* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */ +#endif +#if _FS_REENTRANT + _SYNC_t sobj; /* Identifier of sync object */ +#endif +#if !_FS_READONLY + DWORD last_clust; /* Last allocated cluster */ + DWORD free_clust; /* Number of free clusters */ + DWORD fsi_sector; /* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */ +#endif +#if _FS_RPATH + DWORD cdir; /* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */ +#endif + DWORD n_fatent; /* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */ + DWORD fsize; /* Sectors per FAT */ + DWORD fatbase; /* FAT start sector */ + DWORD dirbase; /* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */ + DWORD database; /* Data start sector */ + DWORD winsect; /* Current sector appearing in the win[] */ + BYTE win[_MAX_SS]; /* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */ +} FATFS; + + + +/* File object structure (FIL) */ + +typedef struct { + FATFS* fs; /* Pointer to the related file system object */ + WORD id; /* File system mount ID of the related file system object */ + BYTE flag; /* File status flags */ + BYTE pad1; + DWORD fptr; /* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */ + DWORD fsize; /* File size */ + DWORD sclust; /* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */ + DWORD clust; /* Current cluster of fpter */ + DWORD dsect; /* Current data sector of fpter */ +#if !_FS_READONLY + DWORD dir_sect; /* Sector containing the directory entry */ + BYTE* dir_ptr; /* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */ +#endif +#if _USE_FASTSEEK + DWORD* cltbl; /* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */ +#endif +#if _FS_LOCK + UINT lockid; /* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */ +#endif +#if !_FS_TINY + BYTE buf[_MAX_SS]; /* File data read/write buffer */ +#endif +} FIL; + + + +/* Directory object structure (DIR) */ + +typedef struct { + FATFS* fs; /* Pointer to the owner file system object */ + WORD id; /* Owner file system mount ID */ + WORD index; /* Current read/write index number */ + DWORD sclust; /* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */ + DWORD clust; /* Current cluster */ + DWORD sect; /* Current sector */ + BYTE* dir; /* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */ + BYTE* fn; /* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */ +#if _USE_LFN + WCHAR* lfn; /* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */ + WORD lfn_idx; /* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */ +#endif +} DIR; + + + +/* File status structure (FILINFO) */ + +typedef struct { + DWORD fsize; /* File size */ + WORD fdate; /* Last modified date */ + WORD ftime; /* Last modified time */ + BYTE fattrib; /* Attribute */ + TCHAR fname[13]; /* Short file name (8.3 format) */ +#if _USE_LFN + TCHAR* lfname; /* Pointer to the LFN buffer */ + UINT lfsize; /* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */ +#endif +} FILINFO; + + + +/* File function return code (FRESULT) */ + +typedef enum { + FR_OK = 0, /* (0) Succeeded */ + FR_DISK_ERR, /* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */ + FR_INT_ERR, /* (2) Assertion failed */ + FR_NOT_READY, /* (3) The physical drive cannot work */ + FR_NO_FILE, /* (4) Could not find the file */ + FR_NO_PATH, /* (5) Could not find the path */ + FR_INVALID_NAME, /* (6) The path name format is invalid */ + FR_DENIED, /* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */ + FR_EXIST, /* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */ + FR_INVALID_OBJECT, /* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */ + FR_WRITE_PROTECTED, /* (10) The physical drive is write protected */ + FR_INVALID_DRIVE, /* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */ + FR_NOT_ENABLED, /* (12) The volume has no work area */ + FR_NO_FILESYSTEM, /* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */ + FR_MKFS_ABORTED, /* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */ + FR_TIMEOUT, /* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */ + FR_LOCKED, /* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */ + FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE, /* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */ + FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES, /* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */ + FR_INVALID_PARAMETER /* (19) Given parameter is invalid */ +} FRESULT; + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* FatFs module application interface */ + +FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*); /* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */ +FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE); /* Open or create a file */ +FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*); /* Read data from a file */ +FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD); /* Move file pointer of a file object */ +FRESULT f_close (FIL*); /* Close an open file object */ +FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*); /* Open an existing directory */ +FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*); /* Read a directory item */ +FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*); /* Get file status */ +FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*); /* Write data to a file */ +FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**); /* Get number of free clusters on the drive */ +FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*); /* Truncate file */ +FRESULT f_sync (FIL*); /* Flush cached data of a writing file */ +FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*); /* Delete an existing file or directory */ +FRESULT f_mkdir (const TCHAR*); /* Create a new directory */ +FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE); /* Change attribute of the file/dir */ +FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*); /* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */ +FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*); /* Rename/Move a file or directory */ +FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE); /* Change current drive */ +FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*); /* Change current directory */ +FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT); /* Get current directory */ +FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*); /* Forward data to the stream */ +FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT); /* Create a file system on the drive */ +FRESULT f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*); /* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */ +int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*); /* Put a character to the file */ +int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*); /* Put a string to the file */ +int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...); /* Put a formatted string to the file */ +TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*); /* Get a string from the file */ + +#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0) +#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0) +#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr) +#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize) + +#ifndef EOF +#define EOF (-1) +#endif + + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Additional user defined functions */ + +/* RTC function */ +#if !_FS_READONLY +DWORD get_fattime (void); +#endif + +/* Unicode support functions */ +#if _USE_LFN /* Unicode - OEM code conversion */ +WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT); /* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */ +WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR); /* Unicode upper-case conversion */ +#if _USE_LFN == 3 /* Memory functions */ +void* ff_memalloc (UINT); /* Allocate memory block */ +void ff_memfree (void*); /* Free memory block */ +#endif +#endif + +/* Sync functions */ +#if _FS_REENTRANT +int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */ +int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t); /* Lock sync object */ +void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t); /* Unlock sync object */ +int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t); /* Delete a sync object */ +#endif + + + + +/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Flags and offset address */ + + +/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */ + +#define FA_READ 0x01 +#define FA_OPEN_EXISTING 0x00 +#define FA__ERROR 0x80 + +#if !_FS_READONLY +#define FA_WRITE 0x02 +#define FA_CREATE_NEW 0x04 +#define FA_CREATE_ALWAYS 0x08 +#define FA_OPEN_ALWAYS 0x10 +#define FA__WRITTEN 0x20 +#define FA__DIRTY 0x40 +#endif + + +/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */ + +#define FS_FAT12 1 +#define FS_FAT16 2 +#define FS_FAT32 3 + + +/* File attribute bits for directory entry */ + +#define AM_RDO 0x01 /* Read only */ +#define AM_HID 0x02 /* Hidden */ +#define AM_SYS 0x04 /* System */ +#define AM_VOL 0x08 /* Volume label */ +#define AM_LFN 0x0F /* LFN entry */ +#define AM_DIR 0x10 /* Directory */ +#define AM_ARC 0x20 /* Archive */ +#define AM_MASK 0x3F /* Mask of defined bits */ + + +/* Fast seek feature */ +#define CREATE_LINKMAP 0xFFFFFFFF + + + +/*--------------------------------*/ +/* Multi-byte word access macros */ + +#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1 /* Enable word access to the FAT structure */ +#define LD_WORD(ptr) (WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define LD_DWORD(ptr) (DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define ST_WORD(ptr,val) *(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val) +#define ST_DWORD(ptr,val) *(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val) +#else /* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */ +#define LD_WORD(ptr) (WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define LD_DWORD(ptr) (DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr)) +#define ST_WORD(ptr,val) *(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8) +#define ST_DWORD(ptr,val) *(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24) +#endif + +#ifdef __cplusplus +} +#endif + +#endif /* _FATFS */ diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..243a20fa22 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012 +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ +/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to +/ the configuration options. +/ +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#ifndef _FFCONF +#define _FFCONF 4004 /* Revision ID */ + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Function and Buffer Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _FS_TINY 1 /* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */ +/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system +/ object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file +/ data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */ + + +#define _FS_READONLY 1 /* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */ +/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes +/ writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename, +/ f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */ + + +#define _FS_MINIMIZE 2 /* 0 to 3 */ +/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions. +/ +/ 0: Full function. +/ 1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename +/ are removed. +/ 2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1. +/ 3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */ + + +#define _USE_STRFUNC 0 /* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */ +/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */ + + +#define _USE_MKFS 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */ + + +#define _USE_FORWARD 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */ + + +#define _USE_FASTSEEK 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Locale and Namespace Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _CODE_PAGE 932 +/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system. +/ Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure. +/ +/ 932 - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 936 - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 949 - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 950 - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows) +/ 1250 - Central Europe (Windows) +/ 1251 - Cyrillic (Windows) +/ 1252 - Latin 1 (Windows) +/ 1253 - Greek (Windows) +/ 1254 - Turkish (Windows) +/ 1255 - Hebrew (Windows) +/ 1256 - Arabic (Windows) +/ 1257 - Baltic (Windows) +/ 1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows) +/ 437 - U.S. (OEM) +/ 720 - Arabic (OEM) +/ 737 - Greek (OEM) +/ 775 - Baltic (OEM) +/ 850 - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) +/ 858 - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) +/ 852 - Latin 2 (OEM) +/ 855 - Cyrillic (OEM) +/ 866 - Russian (OEM) +/ 857 - Turkish (OEM) +/ 862 - Hebrew (OEM) +/ 874 - Thai (OEM, Windows) +/ 1 - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.) +*/ + + +#define _USE_LFN 0 /* 0 to 3 */ +#define _MAX_LFN 255 /* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */ +/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support. +/ +/ 0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect. +/ 1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant. +/ 2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK. +/ 3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP. +/ +/ The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN, +/ Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added +/ to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions +/ ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */ + + +#define _LFN_UNICODE 0 /* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */ +/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode, +/ enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */ + + +#define _FS_RPATH 0 /* 0 to 2 */ +/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature. +/ +/ 0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions. +/ 1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available. +/ 2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1. +/ +/ Note that output of the f_readdir function is affected by this option. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ Physical Drive Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _VOLUMES 1 +/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */ + + +#define _MAX_SS 512 /* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */ +/* Maximum sector size to be handled. +/ Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be +/ required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk. +/ When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size +/ and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implemented to the disk_ioctl function. */ + + +#define _MULTI_PARTITION 0 /* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */ +/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and +/ it can mount only first primary partition. When it is set to 1, each volume +/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */ + + +#define _USE_ERASE 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command +/ should be added to the disk_ioctl function. */ + + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/ +/ System Configurations +/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#define _WORD_ACCESS 1 /* 0 or 1 */ +/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS +/ option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume. +/ +/ 0: Byte-by-byte access. +/ 1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met. +/ +/ When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word +/ access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0. +/ If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the +/ performance and code size. */ + + +/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as +/ windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */ + +#define _FS_REENTRANT 0 /* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */ +#define _FS_TIMEOUT 1000 /* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */ +#define _SYNC_t HANDLE /* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */ + +/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module. +/ +/ 0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect. +/ 1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers, +/ ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj +/ function must be added to the project. */ + + +#define _FS_LOCK 0 /* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */ +/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater. + The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */ + + +#endif /* _FFCONFIG */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5408fe6b3e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +/*-------------------------------------------*/ +/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */ +/*-------------------------------------------*/ + +#ifndef _INTEGER +#define _INTEGER + +#ifdef _WIN32 /* FatFs development platform */ + +#include <windows.h> +#include <tchar.h> + +#else /* Embedded platform */ + +/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */ +typedef int INT; +typedef unsigned int UINT; + +/* These types must be 8-bit integer */ +typedef char CHAR; +typedef unsigned char UCHAR; +typedef unsigned char BYTE; + +/* These types must be 16-bit integer */ +typedef short SHORT; +typedef unsigned short USHORT; +typedef unsigned short WORD; +typedef unsigned short WCHAR; + +/* These types must be 32-bit integer */ +typedef long LONG; +typedef unsigned long ULONG; +typedef unsigned long DWORD; + +#endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ba5ce8b995 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,284 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack, + * this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C +#include "HTTPServerApp.h" + +/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the + * given location, and gives extra connection information. + */ +const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n" + "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n" + "Connection: close\r\n" + "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n" + "Content-Type: "; + +/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given + * URL is invalid, and gives extra error information. + */ +const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n" + "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n" + "Connection: close\r\n" + "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n" + "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n" + "Error 404: File Not Found: /"; + +/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */ +const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm"; + +/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */ +const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain"; + +/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */ +const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] = + { + {.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"}, + {.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"}, + {.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"}, + {.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"}, + {.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"}, + {.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"}, + {.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"}, + {.Extension = "gz", .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"}, + {.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"}, + {.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"}, + }; + +/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */ +FATFS DiskFATState; + + +/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */ +void HTTPServerApp_Init(void) +{ + /* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */ + uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT)); + + /* Mount the Dataflash disk via FatFS */ + f_mount(0, &DiskFATState); +} + +/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the + * TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed. + */ +void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void) +{ + uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate; + + if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed()) + { + /* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */ + AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing; + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing; + } + + if (uip_connected()) + { + /* New connection - initialize connection state values */ + AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile; + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile; + AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false; + AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos = 0; + AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0; + } + + if (uip_acked()) + { + /* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */ + AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize; + + /* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */ + AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState; + } + + if (uip_rexmit()) + { + /* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */ + f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos); + } + + if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll()) + { + switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState) + { + case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile: + HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(); + break; + case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader: + HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(); + break; + case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData: + HTTPServerApp_SendData(); + break; + case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing: + /* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */ + f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle); + AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false; + + /* If connection is not already closed, close it */ + uip_close(); + + AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed; + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed; + break; + } + } +} + +/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP + * GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client. + */ +static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void) +{ + uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate; + char* const AppData = (char*)uip_appdata; + + /* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */ + if (!(uip_newdata())) + return; + + char* RequestToken = strtok(AppData, " "); + char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " "); + + /* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */ + if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0) + { + uip_abort(); + return; + } + + /* Copy over the requested filename */ + strlcpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName)); + + /* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */ + uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName); + + /* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */ + if ((AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/') || !(FileNameLen)) + { + strlcpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName, + (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen)); + } + + /* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */ + AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, + (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK); + + /* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */ + AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader; + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader; +} + +/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of + * the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client. + */ +static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void) +{ + uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate; + char* const AppData = (char*)uip_appdata; + + char* Extension = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, "."); + bool FoundMIMEType = false; + + /* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */ + if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen)) + { + /* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */ + strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header); + strcat(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName); + uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData)); + + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing; + return; + } + + /* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */ + strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header); + + /* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */ + if (Extension != NULL) + { + /* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++) + { + if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0) + { + strcat(AppData, MIMETypes[i].MIMEType); + FoundMIMEType = true; + break; + } + } + } + + /* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */ + if (!(FoundMIMEType)) + { + /* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */ + strcat_P(AppData, DefaultMIMEType); + } + + /* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */ + strcat_P(AppData, PSTR("\r\n\r\n")); + + /* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */ + uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData)); + + /* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */ + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData; +} + +/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks + * to the receiving HTTP client. + */ +static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void) +{ + uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate; + char* const AppData = (char*)uip_appdata; + + /* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */ + uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss(); + + /* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */ + f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize); + + /* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */ + uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize); + + /* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */ + if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize) + AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..11c39d87ed --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for HTTPServerApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_ +#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <string.h> + + #include <LUFA/Version.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <uip.h> + #include <ff.h> + + /* Enums: */ + /** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */ + enum Webserver_States_t + { + WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */ + WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */ + WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */ + WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */ + WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */ + }; + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for a MIME type handler. */ + typedef struct + { + char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */ + char* MIMEType; /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */ + } MIME_Type_t; + + /* Macros: */ + /** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic. */ + #define HTTP_SERVER_PORT 80 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void HTTPServerApp_Init(void); + void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C) + static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void); + static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void); + static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4fbbfd60e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage + * devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information, + * which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C +#include "SCSI.h" + +/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's + * features and capabilities. + */ +static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData = + { + .DeviceType = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK, + .PeripheralQualifier = 0, + + .Removable = true, + + .Version = 0, + + .ResponseDataFormat = 2, + .NormACA = false, + .TrmTsk = false, + .AERC = false, + + .AdditionalLength = 0x1F, + + .SoftReset = false, + .CmdQue = false, + .Linked = false, + .Sync = false, + .WideBus16Bit = false, + .WideBus32Bit = false, + .RelAddr = false, + + .VendorID = "LUFA", + .ProductID = "Dataflash Disk", + .RevisionID = {'0','.','0','0'}, + }; + +/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE + * command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete. + */ +static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData = + { + .ResponseCode = 0x70, + .AdditionalLength = 0x0A, + }; + + +/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches + * to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns + * a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise + */ +bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess = false; + + /* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */ + switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0]) + { + case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_READ_10: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6: + CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo); + break; + case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT: + case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY: + case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL: + case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10: + /* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */ + CommandSuccess = true; + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + break; + default: + /* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + break; + } + + /* Check if command was successfully processed */ + if (CommandSuccess) + { + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return true; + } + + return false; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features + * and capabilities to the host. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint16_t AllocationLength = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]); + uint16_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData)); + + /* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */ + if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) || + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]) + { + /* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + + /* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */ + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + + /* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */ + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command, + * including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint8_t AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4]; + uint8_t BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData)); + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL); + Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity + * on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1); + uint32_t MediaBlockSize = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE; + + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL); + Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the + * board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is + * supported. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */ + if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2))) + { + /* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */ + if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation())) + { + /* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR, + SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0; + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address + * and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual + * reading and writing of the data. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * \param[in] IsDataRead Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE) + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead) +{ + uint32_t BlockAddress; + uint16_t TotalBlocks; + + /* Check if the disk is write protected or not */ + if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT, + SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]); + + /* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */ + TotalBlocks = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]); + + /* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */ + if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS) + { + /* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */ + SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST, + SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE, + SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER); + + return false; + } + + /* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */ + if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ) + DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + else + DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE); + + return true; +} + +/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about + * the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with + * + * \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise. + */ +static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */ + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00); + Endpoint_Write_8(0x00); + Endpoint_ClearIN(); + + /* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */ + MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4; + + return true; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f41f63b43 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SCSI.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SCSI_H_ +#define _SCSI_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "../Descriptors.h" + #include "DataflashManager.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This + * is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about + * the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner. + * + * \param[in] Key New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to + * \param[in] Acode New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to + * \param[in] Aqual New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to + */ + #define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual) do { SenseData.SenseKey = (Key); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode = (Acode); \ + SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0) + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_READ true + + /** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */ + #define DATA_WRITE false + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK 0x00 + + /** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */ + #define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM 0x05 + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C) + static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo, + const bool IsDataRead); + static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4500a4b781 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack, + * this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C +#include "TELNETServerApp.h" + +#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__) + +/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */ +const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n" + "* LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET) *\r\n" + "********************************************\r\n"; + +/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */ +const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n" + " == Available Commands: ==\r\n" + " c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n" + " =========================\r\n" + "\r\n>"; + +/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */ +const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n"; + +/** Initialization function for the simple TELNET webserver. */ +void TELNETServerApp_Init(void) +{ + /* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */ + uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT)); +} + +/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the + * TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed. + */ +void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void) +{ + uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate; + char* const AppData = (char*)uip_appdata; + + if (uip_connected()) + { + /* New connection - initialize connection state values */ + AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader; + } + + if (uip_acked()) + { + /* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */ + AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState; + } + + if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll()) + { + switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState) + { + case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader: + /* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */ + strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader); + uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData)); + + AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu; + break; + case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu: + /* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */ + strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu); + uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData)); + + AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand; + break; + case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand: + if (!(uip_datalen())) + break; + + /* Save the issued command for later processing */ + AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0]; + + AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse; + break; + case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse: + /* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */ + switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand) + { + case 'c': + TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(); + break; + default: + strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n")); + uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData)); + break; + } + + AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu; + break; + } + } +} + +/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */ +static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void) +{ + char* const AppData = (char*)uip_appdata; + + strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader); + + uint16_t ResponseLen = strlen(AppData); + uint8_t ActiveConnCount = 0; + + /* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++) + { + struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i]; + + /* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */ + if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) + { + /* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */ + ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %d.%d.%d.%d (Local Port %u <=> Remote Port %u)\r\n"), + ++ActiveConnCount, + CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0], + CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1], + CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2], + CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3], + HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport)); + } + } + + uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen); +} + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67301ba09c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for TELNETServerApp.c. + */ + +#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_ +#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <string.h> + #include <stdio.h> + + #include <uip.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic. */ + #define TELNET_SERVER_PORT 23 + + /* Enums: */ + /** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */ + enum TELNET_States_t + { + TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */ + TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */ + TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */ + TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void TELNETServerApp_Init(void); + void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C) + static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..12f6c8f9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c @@ -0,0 +1,298 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP + * stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system. + */ + +#define INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C +#include "uIPManagement.h" + +/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */ +static struct timer ConnectionTimer; + +/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */ +static struct timer ARPTimer; + +/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated. */ +struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress; + + +/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic processing. */ +void uIPManagement_Init(void) +{ + /* uIP Timing Initialization */ + clock_init(); + timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2); + timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10); + + /* uIP Stack Initialization */ + uip_init(); + uip_arp_init(); + + /* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */ + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + { + MACAddress.addr[0] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[0]; + MACAddress.addr[1] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[1]; + MACAddress.addr[2] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[2]; + MACAddress.addr[3] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[3]; + MACAddress.addr[4] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[4]; + MACAddress.addr[5] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[5]; + + #if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) + DHCPServerApp_Init(); + #endif + + uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress; + uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress, DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]); + uip_ipaddr(&Netmask, DEVICE_NETMASK[0], DEVICE_NETMASK[1], DEVICE_NETMASK[2], DEVICE_NETMASK[3]); + uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0], DEVICE_GATEWAY[1], DEVICE_GATEWAY[2], DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]); + uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress); + uip_setnetmask(&Netmask); + uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress); + } + else + { + #if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) + DHCPClientApp_Init(); + #else + uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress; + uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress, DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]); + uip_ipaddr(&Netmask, DEVICE_NETMASK[0], DEVICE_NETMASK[1], DEVICE_NETMASK[2], DEVICE_NETMASK[3]); + uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0], DEVICE_GATEWAY[1], DEVICE_GATEWAY[2], DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]); + uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress); + uip_setnetmask(&Netmask); + uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress); + #endif + } + + /* Virtual Webserver Ethernet Address Configuration */ + uip_setethaddr(MACAddress); + + /* HTTP Webserver Initialization */ + HTTPServerApp_Init(); + + /* TELNET Server Initialization */ + #if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) + TELNETServerApp_Init(); + #endif +} + +/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been + * attached to the system. + */ +void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void) +{ + if (((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host) && (USB_HostState == HOST_STATE_Configured)) || + ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) && (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured))) + { + uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(); + uIPManagement_ManageConnections(); + } +} + +/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches + * to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number. + */ +void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void) +{ + /* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */ + switch (uip_conn->lport) + { + case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT): + HTTPServerApp_Callback(); + break; + #if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) + case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT): + TELNETServerApp_Callback(); + break; + #endif + } +} + +/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches + * to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number. + */ +void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void) +{ + /* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */ + switch (uip_udp_conn->lport) + { + #if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) + case HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT): + DHCPClientApp_Callback(); + break; + #endif + #if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) + case HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT): + DHCPServerApp_Callback(); + break; + #endif + } +} + +/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */ +static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void) +{ + /* Determine which USB mode the system is currently initialized in */ + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + { + /* If no packet received, exit processing routine */ + if (!(RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device))) + return; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + /* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */ + RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, &uip_len); + } + else + { + /* If no packet received, exit processing routine */ + if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host))) + return; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + /* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */ + RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, &uip_len); + } + + /* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + { + switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type) + { + case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP): + /* Filter packet by MAC destination */ + uip_arp_ipin(); + + /* Process Incoming packet */ + uip_input(); + + /* If a response was generated, send it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + { + /* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */ + uip_arp_out(); + + uip_split_output(); + } + + break; + case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP): + /* Process ARP packet */ + uip_arp_arpin(); + + /* If a response was generated, send it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + uip_split_output(); + + break; + } + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */ +static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void) +{ + /* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */ + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++) + { + uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]); + + /* If a response was generated, send it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + { + /* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */ + uip_arp_out(); + + /* Split and send the outgoing packet */ + uip_split_output(); + } + } + + /* Manage open connections for timeouts */ + if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer)) + { + timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++) + { + /* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */ + uip_periodic(i); + + /* If a response was generated, send it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + { + /* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */ + uip_arp_out(); + + /* Split and send the outgoing packet */ + uip_split_output(); + } + } + + #if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) + for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) + { + /* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */ + uip_udp_periodic(i); + + /* If a response was generated, send it */ + if (uip_len > 0) + { + /* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */ + uip_arp_out(); + + /* Split and send the outgoing packet */ + uip_split_output(); + } + } + #endif + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + } + + /* Manage ARP cache refreshing */ + if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer)) + { + timer_reset(&ARPTimer); + uip_arp_timer(); + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..3bdc5c96b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for uIPManagement.c. + */ + +#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_ +#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include <uip.h> + #include <uip_arp.h> + #include <uip-split.h> + #include <timer.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include "DHCPClientApp.h" + #include "DHCPServerApp.h" + #include "HTTPServerApp.h" + #include "TELNETServerApp.h" + + /* External Variables: */ + extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void uIPManagement_Init(void); + void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void); + void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void); + void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void); + + #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C) + static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void); + static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void); + #endif + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e71f7209d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +#include <stdint.h> +#include <stdlib.h> +#include <stdio.h> + +#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h> + +#include "clock.h" + +//Counted time +volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0; + +//Overflow interrupt +ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + clock_datetime += 1; +} + +//Initialise the clock +void clock_init() +{ + OCR1A = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1); + TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10)); + TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A); +} + +//Return time +clock_time_t clock_time() +{ + clock_time_t time; + + GlobalInterruptDisable(); + time = clock_datetime; + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + return time; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bbfa4ac0e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h @@ -0,0 +1,13 @@ +#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ +#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ + +#include <stdint.h> +#include <util/atomic.h> + +typedef uint16_t clock_time_t; +#define CLOCK_SECOND 100 +void clock_init(void); +clock_time_t clock_time(void); + +#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..eae06f43bd --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ +/** + * \addtogroup timer + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \file + * Timer library implementation. + * \author + * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors + * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software + * without specific prior written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND + * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + * SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack + * + * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + * + * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $ + */ + +#include "clock.h" +#include "timer.h" + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Set a timer. + * + * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the + * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after + * the timer has expired. + * + * \param t A pointer to the timer + * \param interval The interval before the timer expires. + * + */ +void +timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval) +{ + t->interval = interval; + t->start = clock_time(); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Reset the timer with the same interval. + * + * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was + * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval + * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this + * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the + * timer_restart() function. + * + * \param t A pointer to the timer. + * + * \sa timer_restart() + */ +void +timer_reset(struct timer *t) +{ + t->start += t->interval; +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Restart the timer from the current point in time + * + * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was + * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the + * current time. + * + * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset + * it. For periodic timers, use the timer_reset() function instead. + * + * \param t A pointer to the timer. + * + * \sa timer_reset() + */ +void +timer_restart(struct timer *t) +{ + t->start = clock_time(); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Check if a timer has expired. + * + * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or + * false depending on its status. + * + * \param t A pointer to the timer + * + * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise. + * + */ +int +timer_expired(struct timer *t) +{ + return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval; +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..04917e4c52 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +/** + * \defgroup timer Timer library + * + * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and + * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An + * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this + * is not done automatically. + * + * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the + * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer. + * + * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to + * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by + * the clock library. + * + * @{ + */ + + +/** + * \file + * Timer library header file. + * \author + * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors + * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software + * without specific prior written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND + * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + * SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack + * + * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + * + * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $ + */ +#ifndef __TIMER_H__ +#define __TIMER_H__ + +#include "clock.h" + +/** + * A timer. + * + * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set + * with timer_set() before it can be used. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +struct timer { + clock_time_t start; + clock_time_t interval; +}; + +void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval); +void timer_reset(struct timer *t); +void timer_restart(struct timer *t); +int timer_expired(struct timer *t); + +#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */ + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5222a05b63 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +/* + * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors + * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software + * without specific prior written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND + * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + * SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the Contiki operating system. + * + * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + * + * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $ + */ + +#include "uip-split.h" + + +#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN]) + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_split_output(void) +{ +#if UIP_TCP + u16_t tcplen, len1, len2; + + /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */ + if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) { + + tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN; + /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was + odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */ + len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2; + if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) { + ++len2; + } + + /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length + field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */ + uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN; +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header + length. */ + BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff); +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8; + BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */ + BUF->tcpchksum = 0; + BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum()); + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */ + BUF->ipchksum = 0; + BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum()); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* Transmit the first packet. */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + tcpip_ipv6_output(); +#else + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len); + else + RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to + just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP + sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in + memory. This place is determined by the length of the first + packet (len1). */ + uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN; +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header + length. */ + BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff); +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8; + BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2); + + uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1); + BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0]; + BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1]; + BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2]; + BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3]; + + /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */ + BUF->tcpchksum = 0; + BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum()); + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */ + BUF->ipchksum = 0; + BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum()); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* Transmit the second packet. */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + tcpip_ipv6_output(); +#else + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len); + else + RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + return; + } +#endif /* UIP_TCP */ + + /* uip_fw_output();*/ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + tcpip_ipv6_output(); +#else + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) + RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len); + else + RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +} + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0c768ce40a --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ +/* + * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors + * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software + * without specific prior written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND + * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE + * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE + * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS + * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) + * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT + * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY + * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF + * SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the Contiki operating system. + * + * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + * + * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $ + */ +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack + * @{ + * + * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to + * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of + * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's + * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the + * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP. + * + * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this + * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into + * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP + * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP + * by orders of magnitude. + * + * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet + * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must + * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module + * to work. + */ + + +/** + * \file + * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the + * delayed ACK throughput degradation. + * \author + * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se> + * + */ + +#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__ +#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__ + +#include <string.h> +#include <uip.h> + +#include "../../USBHostMode.h" + +#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + +/** + * Handle outgoing packets. + * + * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and + * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a + * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and + * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of + * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output() + * function. + * + * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf + * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata + * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the + * uip_len variable. + * + */ +void uip_split_output(void); +void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16); +#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */ + +/** @} */ +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fead75775c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c @@ -0,0 +1,1941 @@ +#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/ + +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \file + * The uIP TCP/IP stack code. + * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com> + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote + * products derived from this software without specific prior + * written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS + * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED + * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE + * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS + * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, + * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING + * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS + * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * + * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $ + * + */ + +/* + * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as + * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP, + * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size + * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto + * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process() + * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code + * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that + * the optimizer would not be as efficient. + * + * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf, + * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP + * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the + * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application, + * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the + * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into + * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data + * that is out of sequence. + * + * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put + * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the + * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the + * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send + * the packet back to the peer. +*/ + +#include "uip.h" +#include "uipopt.h" +#include "uip_arp.h" + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the + uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore + this #ifndef removes the entire compilation + output of the uip.c file */ + + +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +#include "net/uip-neighbor.h" +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + +#include <string.h> + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Variable definitions. */ + + +/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by + setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set + here. Otherwise, the address */ +#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0 +const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr = + { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 }; +const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr = + { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 }; +const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask = + { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 }; +#else +uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask; +#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */ + +const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr = +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, + 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } }; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } }; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } }; + +#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR +const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0, + UIP_ETHADDR1, + UIP_ETHADDR2, + UIP_ETHADDR3, + UIP_ETHADDR4, + UIP_ETHADDR5}}; +#else +struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}}; +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER +u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2]; /* The packet buffer that contains + incoming packets. */ +#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */ + +void *uip_appdata; /* The uip_appdata pointer points to + application data. */ +void *uip_sappdata; /* The uip_appdata pointer points to + the application data which is to + be sent. */ +#if UIP_URGDATA > 0 +void *uip_urgdata; /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to + urgent data (out-of-band data), if + present. */ +u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen; +#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */ + +u16_t uip_len, uip_slen; + /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits, + depending on the maximum packet + size. */ + +u8_t uip_flags; /* The uip_flags variable is used for + communication between the TCP/IP stack + and the application program. */ +struct uip_conn *uip_conn; /* uip_conn always points to the current + connection. */ + +struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS]; + /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP + connections. */ +u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS]; + /* The uip_listenports list all currently + listening ports. */ +#if UIP_UDP +struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn; +struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS]; +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + +static u16_t ipid; /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing + number that is used for the IP ID + field. */ + +void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; } + +static u8_t iss[4]; /* The iss variable is used for the TCP + initial sequence number. */ + +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN +static u16_t lastport; /* Keeps track of the last port used for + a new connection. */ +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + +/* Temporary variables. */ +u8_t uip_acc32[4]; +static u8_t c, opt; +static u16_t tmp16; + +/* Structures and definitions. */ +#define TCP_FIN 0x01 +#define TCP_SYN 0x02 +#define TCP_RST 0x04 +#define TCP_PSH 0x08 +#define TCP_ACK 0x10 +#define TCP_URG 0x20 +#define TCP_CTL 0x3f + +#define TCP_OPT_END 0 /* End of TCP options list */ +#define TCP_OPT_NOOP 1 /* "No-operation" TCP option */ +#define TCP_OPT_MSS 2 /* Maximum segment size TCP option */ + +#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4 /* Length of TCP MSS option. */ + +#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0 +#define ICMP_ECHO 8 + +#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE 3 +#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE 3 + +#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY 129 +#define ICMP6_ECHO 128 +#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION 135 +#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136 + +#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6) + +#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1 +#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2 + + +/* Macros. */ +#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN]) +#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0]) +#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN]) +#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN]) + + +#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1 +struct uip_stats uip_stat; +#define UIP_STAT(s) s +#else +#define UIP_STAT(s) +#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */ + +#if UIP_LOGGING == 1 +#include <stdio.h> +void uip_log(char *msg); +#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m) +#else +#define UIP_LOG(m) +#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */ + +#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32 +void +uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16) +{ + uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff); + uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8); + uip_acc32[1] = op32[1]; + uip_acc32[0] = op32[0]; + + if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) { + ++uip_acc32[1]; + if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) { + ++uip_acc32[0]; + } + } + + + if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) { + ++uip_acc32[2]; + if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) { + ++uip_acc32[1]; + if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) { + ++uip_acc32[0]; + } + } + } +} + +#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */ + +#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +static u16_t +chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len) +{ + u16_t t; + const u8_t *dataptr; + const u8_t *last_byte; + + dataptr = data; + last_byte = data + len - 1; + + while(dataptr < last_byte) { /* At least two more bytes */ + t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1]; + sum += t; + if(sum < t) { + sum++; /* carry */ + } + dataptr += 2; + } + + if(dataptr == last_byte) { + t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0; + sum += t; + if(sum < t) { + sum++; /* carry */ + } + } + + /* Return sum in host byte order. */ + return sum; +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +u16_t +uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len) +{ + return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len)); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM +u16_t +uip_ipchksum(void) +{ + u16_t sum; + + sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN); + DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum); + return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum); +} +#endif +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +static u16_t +upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto) +{ + u16_t upper_layer_len; + u16_t sum; + +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]); +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* First sum pseudo-header. */ + + /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */ + sum = upper_layer_len + proto; + /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */ + sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + + /* Sum TCP header and data. */ + sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN], + upper_layer_len); + + return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +u16_t +uip_icmp6chksum(void) +{ + return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6); + +} +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +u16_t +uip_tcpchksum(void) +{ + return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS +u16_t +uip_udpchksum(void) +{ + return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP); +} +#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */ +#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_init(void) +{ + for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) { + uip_listenports[c] = 0; + } + for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) { + uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + } +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN + lastport = 1024; +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + +#if UIP_UDP + for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) { + uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0; + } +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + + + /* IPv4 initialization. */ +#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0 + /* uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/ +#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */ + +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN +struct uip_conn * +uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport) +{ + register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn; + + /* Find an unused local port. */ + again: + ++lastport; + + if(lastport >= 32000) { + lastport = 4096; + } + + /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find + another one. */ + for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) { + conn = &uip_conns[c]; + if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED && + conn->lport == htons(lastport)) { + goto again; + } + } + + conn = 0; + for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) { + cconn = &uip_conns[c]; + if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) { + conn = cconn; + break; + } + if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) { + if(conn == 0 || + cconn->timer > conn->timer) { + conn = cconn; + } + } + } + + if(conn == 0) { + return 0; + } + + conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT; + + conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0]; + conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1]; + conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2]; + conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3]; + + conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS; + + conn->len = 1; /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */ + conn->nrtx = 0; + conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */ + conn->rto = UIP_RTO; + conn->sa = 0; + conn->sv = 16; /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */ + conn->lport = htons(lastport); + conn->rport = rport; + uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr); + + return conn; +} +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if UIP_UDP +struct uip_udp_conn * +uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport) +{ + register struct uip_udp_conn *conn; + + /* Find an unused local port. */ + again: + ++lastport; + + if(lastport >= 32000) { + lastport = 4096; + } + + for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) { + if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) { + goto again; + } + } + + + conn = 0; + for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) { + if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) { + conn = &uip_udp_conns[c]; + break; + } + } + + if(conn == 0) { + return 0; + } + + conn->lport = HTONS(lastport); + conn->rport = rport; + if(ripaddr == NULL) { + memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t)); + } else { + uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr); + } + conn->ttl = UIP_TTL; + + return conn; +} +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_unlisten(u16_t port) +{ + for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) { + if(uip_listenports[c] == port) { + uip_listenports[c] = 0; + return; + } + } +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_listen(u16_t port) +{ + for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) { + if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) { + uip_listenports[c] = port; + return; + } + } +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */ + +#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6 +#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN) +static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE]; +static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)]; +static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f, + 0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01}; +static u16_t uip_reasslen; +static u8_t uip_reassflags; +#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01 +static u8_t uip_reasstmr; + +#define IP_MF 0x20 + +static u8_t +uip_reass(void) +{ + u16_t offset, len; + u16_t i; + + /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we + write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly + buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */ + if(uip_reasstmr == 0) { + memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN); + uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE; + uip_reassflags = 0; + /* Clear the bitmap. */ + memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap)); + } + + /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present + in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the + fragment into the buffer. */ + if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] && + BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] && + BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] && + BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] && + BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] && + BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) { + + len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4; + offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8; + + /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the + reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */ + if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE || + offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) { + uip_reasstmr = 0; + goto nullreturn; + } + + /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right + offset. */ + memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset], + (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4), + len); + + /* Update the bitmap. */ + if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) { + /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update + that byte. */ + + uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |= + bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] & + ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7]; + } else { + /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the + bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff in-between with + 0xff. */ + uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |= + bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7]; + for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) { + uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff; + } + uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |= + ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7]; + } + + /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we + know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the + size of the entire packet. We also set the + IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received + the final fragment. */ + + if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) { + uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG; + uip_reasslen = offset + len; + } + + /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do + this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits + in the bitmap are set. */ + if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) { + /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in + the bitmap. */ + for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) { + if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) { + goto nullreturn; + } + } + /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the + right amount of bits. */ + if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] != + (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) { + goto nullreturn; + } + + /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the + buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We + also reset the timer. */ + uip_reasstmr = 0; + memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen); + + /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet + from now on. */ + BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0; + BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8; + BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff; + BUF->ipchksum = 0; + BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum()); + + return uip_reasslen; + } + } + + nullreturn: + return 0; +} +#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +static void +uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n) +{ + uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n); + uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0]; + uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1]; + uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2]; + uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3]; +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_process(u8_t flag) +{ + register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn; + +#if UIP_UDP + if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) { + goto udp_send; + } +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + + uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN]; + + /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a + particular connection. */ + if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) { + if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED && + !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) { + uip_len = uip_slen = 0; + uip_flags = UIP_POLL; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto appsend; + } + goto drop; + + /* Check if we were invoked because of the periodic timer firing. */ + } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) { +#if UIP_REASSEMBLY + if(uip_reasstmr != 0) { + --uip_reasstmr; + } +#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */ + /* Increase the initial sequence number. */ + if(++iss[3] == 0) { + if(++iss[2] == 0) { + if(++iss[1] == 0) { + ++iss[0]; + } + } + } + + /* Reset the length variables. */ + uip_len = 0; + uip_slen = 0; + + /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait + for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the + connection's timer and remove the connection if it times + out. */ + if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT || + uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) { + ++(uip_connr->timer); + if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + } + } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) { + /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the + connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value + in which case we retransmit. */ + if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) { + if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) { + if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX || + ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT || + uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) && + uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + + /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to + UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the + connection has timed out. */ + uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT; + UIP_APPCALL(); + + /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */ + BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK; + goto tcp_send_nodata; + } + + /* Exponential back-off. */ + uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4? + 4: + uip_connr->nrtx); + ++(uip_connr->nrtx); + + /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently + depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we + call upon the application so that it may prepare the + data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the + SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to + retransmit our FINACK. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit); + switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) { + case UIP_SYN_RCVD: + /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our + SYNACK. */ + goto tcp_send_synack; + +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN + case UIP_SYN_SENT: + /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */ + BUF->flags = 0; + goto tcp_send_syn; +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + + case UIP_ESTABLISHED: + /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application + to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into + the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit + label). */ + uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto apprexmit; + + case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1: + case UIP_CLOSING: + case UIP_LAST_ACK: + /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */ + goto tcp_send_finack; + + } + } + } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) { + /* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the + application for new data. */ + uip_len = uip_slen = 0; + uip_flags = UIP_POLL; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto appsend; + } + } + goto drop; + } +#if UIP_UDP + if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) { + if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) { + uip_conn = NULL; + uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN]; + uip_len = uip_slen = 0; + uip_flags = UIP_POLL; + UIP_UDP_APPCALL(); + goto udp_send; + } else { + goto drop; + } + } +#endif + + /* This is where the input processing starts. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv); + + /* Start of IP input header processing code. */ + +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* Check validity of the IP header. */ + if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60) { /* IP version and header length. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr); + UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version."); + goto drop; + } +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* Check validity of the IP header. */ + if(BUF->vhl != 0x45) { /* IP version and header length. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr); + UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length."); + goto drop; + } +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in + uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume + that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of + uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header, + the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct + value.. */ + + if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) { + uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1]; +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the + length of the payload that follows the + header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable + for holding the size of the entire packet, + including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a + problem as the length field in the IPv4 header + contains the length of the entire packet. But + for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6 + header (40 bytes). */ +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + } else { + UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header."); + goto drop; + } + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* Check the fragment flag. */ + if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 || + BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) { +#if UIP_REASSEMBLY + uip_len = uip_reass(); + if(uip_len == 0) { + goto drop; + } +#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr); + UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped."); + goto drop; +#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */ + } +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) { + /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and + hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP + packets. */ +#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { + UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received."); + goto icmp_input; + } else { + UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned."); + goto drop; + } +#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */ + + } else { + /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast + UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */ +#if UIP_BROADCAST + DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum()); + if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP && + uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) + { + if (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr); + + goto udp_input; + } +#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */ + + /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */ +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) { + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + goto drop; + } +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to + make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all + hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast + address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all + multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */ + if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) && + BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) { + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + goto drop; + } +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + } + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header + checksum. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr); + UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum."); + goto drop; + } +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so, + proceed with TCP input + processing. */ + goto tcp_input; + } + +#if UIP_UDP + if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) { + goto udp_input; + } +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */ + if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from + here. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr); + UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp."); + goto drop; + } + +#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF + icmp_input: +#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv); + + /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change + the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP + checksum before we return the packet. */ + if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) { + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr); + UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo."); + goto drop; + } + + /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use + the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to + yourself. */ +#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) { + uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr; + } +#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */ + + ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY; + + if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) { + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1; + } else { + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8); + } + + /* Swap IP addresses. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent); + BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL; + goto ip_send_nolen; + + /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */ +#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */ + DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len); + + if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from + here. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr); + UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6."); + goto drop; + } + + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv); + + /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send + a neighbor advertisement message back. */ + if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) { + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) { + + if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) { + /* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */ + uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2])); + } + + /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the + neighbor solicitation came from. */ + ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT; + ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */ + + ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0; + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS; + ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1; /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */ + memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr)); + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0; + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum(); + + goto send; + + } + goto drop; + } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) { + /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only + change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the + ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */ + + ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY; + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0; + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum(); + + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent); + goto send; + } else { + DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr); + UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message."); + goto drop; + } + + /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */ + +#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + +#if UIP_UDP + /* UDP input processing. */ + udp_input: + /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the + UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard + work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to + send. */ +#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS + uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN; + uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN]; + if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) { + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr); + UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum."); + goto drop; + } +#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */ + uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN; +#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */ + + /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */ + for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0]; + uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS]; + ++uip_udp_conn) { + /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered + to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the + destination port number in the received packet. If the two port + numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the + connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the + connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP + address of the packet is checked. */ + if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 && + UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport && + (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 || + UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) && + (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) || + uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) || + uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) { + goto udp_found; + } + } + UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found"); +#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */ + memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8); + + /* Set the ICMP type and code. */ + ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE; + ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE; + + /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */ + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0; + ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36); + + /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the + original packet. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr); + + /* Set our IP address as the source address. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + + /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the + size of the IP header (20) = 56. */ + uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN; + ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0; + ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len; + ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL; + ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP; + + goto ip_send_nolen; +#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */ + goto drop; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */ + + udp_found: + uip_conn = NULL; + uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA; + uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN]; + uip_slen = 0; + UIP_UDP_APPCALL(); + + udp_send: + if(uip_slen == 0) { + goto drop; + } + uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN; + +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header + length. */ + BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff); +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl; + BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP; + + UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN); + UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0; + + BUF->srcport = uip_udp_conn->lport; + BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport; + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr); + + uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN]; + +#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS + /* Calculate UDP checksum. */ + UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum()); + if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) { + UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff; + } +#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */ + + goto ip_send_nolen; +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + + /* TCP input processing. */ + tcp_input: + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv); + + /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */ + + if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the TCP + checksum. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop); + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr); + UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum."); + goto drop; + } + + /* Demultiplex this segment. */ + /* First check any active connections. */ + for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1]; + ++uip_connr) { + if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED && + BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport && + BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport && + uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) { + goto found; + } + } + + /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet, + either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet + destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set, + it is an old packet and we send a RST. */ + if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) { + goto reset; + } + + tmp16 = BUF->destport; + /* Next, check listening connections. */ + for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) { + if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) { + goto found_listen; + } + } + + /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst); + + reset: + /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */ + if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) { + goto drop; + } + + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst); + + BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK; + uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN; + BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4; + + /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */ + c = BUF->seqno[3]; + BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3]; + BUF->ackno[3] = c; + + c = BUF->seqno[2]; + BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2]; + BUF->ackno[2] = c; + + c = BUF->seqno[1]; + BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1]; + BUF->ackno[1] = c; + + c = BUF->seqno[0]; + BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0]; + BUF->ackno[0] = c; + + /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are + acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need + to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */ + if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) { + if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) { + if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) { + ++BUF->ackno[0]; + } + } + } + + /* Swap port numbers. */ + tmp16 = BUF->srcport; + BUF->srcport = BUF->destport; + BUF->destport = tmp16; + + /* Swap IP addresses. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + + /* And send out the RST packet! */ + goto tcp_send_noconn; + + /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet + with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new + connection and send a SYNACK in return. */ + found_listen: + /* First we check if there are any connections available. Unused + connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but + unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in + TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no + CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very + nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */ + uip_connr = 0; + for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) { + if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) { + uip_connr = &uip_conns[c]; + break; + } + if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) { + if(uip_connr == 0 || + uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) { + uip_connr = &uip_conns[c]; + } + } + } + + if(uip_connr == 0) { + /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that + the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we + have more spare connections. */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop); + UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections."); + goto drop; + } + uip_conn = uip_connr; + + /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */ + uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO; + uip_connr->sa = 0; + uip_connr->sv = 4; + uip_connr->nrtx = 0; + uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport; + uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport; + uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr); + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD; + + uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3]; + uip_connr->len = 1; + + /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */ + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0]; + uip_add_rcv_nxt(1); + + /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */ + if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) { + for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) { + opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c]; + if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) { + /* End of options. */ + break; + } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) { + ++c; + /* NOP option. */ + } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS && + uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) { + /* An MSS option with the right option length. */ + tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) | + (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c]; + uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss = + tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16; + + /* And we are done processing options. */ + break; + } else { + /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily + can skip past them. */ + if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) { + /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed + and we don't process them further. */ + break; + } + c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c]; + } + } + } + + /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */ +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN + tcp_send_synack: + BUF->flags = TCP_ACK; + + tcp_send_syn: + BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN; +#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + tcp_send_synack: + BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK; +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + + /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our + SYNACK. */ + BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS; + BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN; + BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256; + BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255; + uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN; + BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4; + goto tcp_send; + + /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */ + found: + uip_conn = uip_connr; + uip_flags = 0; + /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept + any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the + sequence number of this reset is within our advertised window + before we accept the reset. */ + if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection."); + uip_flags = UIP_ABORT; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto drop; + } + /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent + any data to us. */ + c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2; + /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is + calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in + c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */ + uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN; + + /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is + what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the + correct numbers in. */ + if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) && + ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) { + if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) && + (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] || + BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] || + BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] || + BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) { + goto tcp_send_ack; + } + } + + /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding + data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of + the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the + retransmission timer. */ + if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) { + uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len); + + if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] && + BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] && + BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] && + BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) { + /* Update sequence number. */ + uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2]; + uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3]; + + /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */ + if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) { + signed char m; + m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer; + /* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */ + m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3); + uip_connr->sa += m; + if(m < 0) { + m = -m; + } + m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2); + uip_connr->sv += m; + uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv; + + } + /* Set the acknowledged flag. */ + uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA; + /* Reset the retransmission timer. */ + uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto; + + /* Reset length of outstanding data. */ + uip_connr->len = 0; + } + + } + + /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */ + switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) { + /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not + implemented, since we force the application to close when the + peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from + ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */ + case UIP_SYN_RCVD: + /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and + we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent + out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA + flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */ + if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED; + uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED; + uip_connr->len = 0; + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA; + uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len); + } + uip_slen = 0; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto appsend; + } + goto drop; +#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN + case UIP_SYN_SENT: + /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to + our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK + plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED + state. */ + if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) && + (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) { + + /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */ + if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) { + for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) { + opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c]; + if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) { + /* End of options. */ + break; + } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) { + ++c; + /* NOP option. */ + } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS && + uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) { + /* An MSS option with the right option length. */ + tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) | + uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c]; + uip_connr->initialmss = + uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16; + + /* And we are done processing options. */ + break; + } else { + /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily + can skip past them. */ + if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) { + /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed + and we don't process them further. */ + break; + } + c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c]; + } + } + } + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2]; + uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3]; + uip_add_rcv_nxt(1); + uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA; + uip_connr->len = 0; + uip_len = 0; + uip_slen = 0; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto appsend; + } + /* Inform the application that the connection failed */ + uip_flags = UIP_ABORT; + UIP_APPCALL(); + /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */ + uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + goto reset; +#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + + case UIP_ESTABLISHED: + /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed + data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the + application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are + retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that + data into the buffer. + + If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on + this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK + state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the + sequence numbers will be screwed up. */ + + if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) { + if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) { + goto drop; + } + uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len); + uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE; + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA; + } + UIP_APPCALL(); + uip_connr->len = 1; + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK; + uip_connr->nrtx = 0; + tcp_send_finack: + BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK; + goto tcp_send_nodata; + } + + /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent + data that we must pass to the application. */ + if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) { +#if UIP_URGDATA > 0 + uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]; + if(uip_urglen > uip_len) { + /* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */ + uip_urglen = uip_len; + } + uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen); + uip_len -= uip_urglen; + uip_urgdata = uip_appdata; + uip_appdata += uip_urglen; + } else { + uip_urglen = 0; +#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */ + uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]); + uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]; +#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */ + } + + /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this + by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number + we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow + using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the + remote host. */ + if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) { + uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA; + uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len); + } + + /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end + is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we + set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the + application does not send more data than the other end can + handle. + + If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to + the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS + of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver, + and the application will retransmit it. This is called the + "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanism. + */ + tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1]; + if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss || + tmp16 == 0) { + tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss; + } + uip_connr->mss = tmp16; + + /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged + by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it + might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data + from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the + application must also be notified. + + When the application is called, the global variable uip_len + contains the length of the incoming data. The application can + access the incoming data through the global pointer + uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + bytes into the uip_buf array. + + If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be + put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be + put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to + send, uip_len must be set to 0. */ + if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) { + uip_slen = 0; + UIP_APPCALL(); + + appsend: + + if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) { + uip_slen = 0; + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK; + goto tcp_send_nodata; + } + + if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) { + uip_slen = 0; + uip_connr->len = 1; + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1; + uip_connr->nrtx = 0; + BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK; + goto tcp_send_nodata; + } + + /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */ + if(uip_slen > 0) { + + /* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of + the ->len variable should be discarded. */ + if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) { + uip_connr->len = 0; + } + + /* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has + already data in transit and cannot send anymore right + now. */ + if(uip_connr->len == 0) { + + /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by + the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available + window). */ + if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) { + uip_slen = uip_connr->mss; + } + + /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know + when everything has been acknowledged. */ + uip_connr->len = uip_slen; + } else { + + /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we + make sure that the application does not send (i.e., + retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */ + uip_slen = uip_connr->len; + } + } + uip_connr->nrtx = 0; + apprexmit: + uip_appdata = uip_sappdata; + + /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming + packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */ + if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) { + /* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */ + uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN; + /* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */ + BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH; + /* Send the packet. */ + goto tcp_send_noopts; + } + /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if + there is newdata. */ + if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) { + uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN; + BUF->flags = TCP_ACK; + goto tcp_send_noopts; + } + } + goto drop; + case UIP_LAST_ACK: + /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our + FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */ + if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED; + uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE; + UIP_APPCALL(); + } + break; + + case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1: + /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host + hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a + FIN from the other side. */ + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len); + } + if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) { + if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT; + uip_connr->timer = 0; + uip_connr->len = 0; + } else { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING; + } + uip_add_rcv_nxt(1); + uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto tcp_send_ack; + } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2; + uip_connr->len = 0; + goto drop; + } + if(uip_len > 0) { + goto tcp_send_ack; + } + goto drop; + + case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2: + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len); + } + if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT; + uip_connr->timer = 0; + uip_add_rcv_nxt(1); + uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE; + UIP_APPCALL(); + goto tcp_send_ack; + } + if(uip_len > 0) { + goto tcp_send_ack; + } + goto drop; + + case UIP_TIME_WAIT: + goto tcp_send_ack; + + case UIP_CLOSING: + if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) { + uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT; + uip_connr->timer = 0; + } + } + goto drop; + + /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want + to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */ + tcp_send_ack: + BUF->flags = TCP_ACK; + + tcp_send_nodata: + uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN; + + tcp_send_noopts: + BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4; + + /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a + reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP + headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the + packet. */ + tcp_send: + BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0]; + BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1]; + BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2]; + BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3]; + + BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0]; + BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1]; + BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2]; + BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3]; + + BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP; + + BUF->srcport = uip_connr->lport; + BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport; + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr); + + if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) { + /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero + window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */ + BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0; + } else { + BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8); + BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff); + } + + tcp_send_noconn: + BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL; +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header + length. */ + BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff); +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8); + BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0; + + /* Calculate TCP checksum. */ + BUF->tcpchksum = 0; + BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum()); + + ip_send_nolen: +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + BUF->vtc = 0x60; + BUF->tcflow = 0x00; + BUF->flow = 0x00; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + BUF->vhl = 0x45; + BUF->tos = 0; + BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0; + ++ipid; + BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8; + BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff; + /* Calculate IP checksum. */ + BUF->ipchksum = 0; + BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum()); + DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum()); +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent); +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + send: +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len, + (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]); + + UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent); + /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */ + uip_flags = 0; + return; + + drop: + uip_len = 0; + uip_flags = 0; + return; +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +u16_t +htons(u16_t val) +{ + return HTONS(val); +} + +u32_t +htonl(u32_t val) +{ + return HTONL(val); +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_send(const void *data, int len) +{ + int copylen; +#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b)) + copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - + (int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN])); + if(copylen > 0) { + uip_slen = copylen; + if(data != uip_sappdata) { + memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen); + } + } +} +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** @} */ +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..7b87a2c77c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h @@ -0,0 +1,2130 @@ + +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \file + * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com> + * \author Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code) + * \author Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code) + * + * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number + * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP + * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations. + * + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote + * products derived from this software without specific prior + * written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS + * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED + * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE + * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS + * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, + * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING + * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS + * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * + * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $ + * + */ + +#ifndef __UIP_H__ +#define __UIP_H__ + +#include "uipopt.h" + +/** + * Representation of an IP address. + * + */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +typedef union uip_ip6addr_t { + u8_t u8[16]; /* Initialiser, must come first!!! */ + u16_t u16[8]; +} uip_ip6addr_t; + +typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +typedef union uip_ip4addr_t { + u8_t u8[4]; /* Initialiser, must come first!!! */ + u16_t u16[2]; +#if 0 + u32_t u32; +#endif +} uip_ip4addr_t; +typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */ +struct uip_802154_shortaddr { + u8_t addr[2]; +}; +/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */ +struct uip_802154_longaddr { + u8_t addr[8]; +}; + +/** \brief 802.11 address */ +struct uip_80211_addr { + u8_t addr[6]; +}; + +/** \brief 802.3 address */ +struct uip_eth_addr { + u8_t addr[6]; +}; + +#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154 +/** \brief 802.15.4 address */ +typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t; +#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2 +#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN 8 +#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN +#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/ +#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211 +/** \brief 802.11 address */ +typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t; +#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6 +#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/ +/** \brief Ethernet address */ +typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t; +#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6 +#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/ +#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/ + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* First, the functions that should be called from the + * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are + * handled by the following three functions. + */ +/** + * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions + * @{ + * + * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time + * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses. + */ + +/** + * Set the IP address of this host. + * + * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first + * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte + * array. + * + * Example: + \code + + uip_ipaddr_t addr; + + uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2); + uip_sethostaddr(&addr); + + \endcode + * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t; + * + * \sa uip_ipaddr() + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr)) + +/** + * Get the IP address of this host. + * + * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first + * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte + * array. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr; + + uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr); + \endcode + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be + * filled in with the currently configured IP address. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr) + +/** + * Set the default router's IP address. + * + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP + * address of the default router. + * + * \sa uip_ipaddr() + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr)) + +/** + * Set the netmask. + * + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP + * address of the netmask. + * + * \sa uip_ipaddr() + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr)) + + +/** + * Get the default router's IP address. + * + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be + * filled in with the IP address of the default router. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr) + +/** + * Get the netmask. + * + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be + * filled in with the value of the netmask. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask) + +/** @} */ + +/** + * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions + * @{ + * + * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP. + */ + +/** + * uIP initialization function. + * + * This function should be called at boot up to initialize the uIP + * TCP/IP stack. + */ +void uip_init(void); + +/** + * uIP initialization function. + * + * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id. + */ +void uip_setipid(u16_t id); + +/** @} */ + +/** + * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions + * @{ + * + * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting + * with uIP. + */ + +/** + * Process an incoming packet. + * + * This function should be called when the device driver has received + * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must + * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet + * should be placed in the uip_len variable. + * + * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed + * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to + * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the + * uip_len variable is set to 0. + * + * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source + * code below. + \code + uip_len = devicedriver_poll(); + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_input(); + if(uip_len > 0) { + devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP + * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over + * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling + * this function: + \code + #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0]) + uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll(); + if(uip_len > 0) { + if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) { + uip_arp_ipin(); + uip_input(); + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_arp_out(); + ethernet_devicedriver_send(); + } + } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) { + uip_arp_arpin(); + if(uip_len > 0) { + ethernet_devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_input() uip_process(UIP_DATA) + + +/** + * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number. + * + * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers, + * polling) for a uIP TCP connection, and should be called when the + * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every + * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed. + * + * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting + * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len + * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver + * should be called to send out the packet. + * + * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like + * this: + \code + for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) { + uip_periodic(i); + if(uip_len > 0) { + devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP + * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over + * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before + * calling the device driver: + \code + for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) { + uip_periodic(i); + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_arp_out(); + ethernet_devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#if UIP_TCP +#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn]; \ + uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0) + +/** + * + * + */ +#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) + +/** + * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer + * to its structure. + * + * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn + * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be + * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to + * be processed. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn; \ + uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0) + +/** + * Request that a particular connection should be polled. + * + * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer + * processing. The application is polled for new data. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to + * be processed. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn; \ + uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0) + +#endif /* UIP_TCP */ + +#if UIP_UDP +/** + * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number. + * + * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for + * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the + * uip_periodic() function: + \code + for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) { + uip_udp_periodic(i); + if(uip_len > 0) { + devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be + * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet: + \code + for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) { + uip_udp_periodic(i); + if(uip_len > 0) { + uip_arp_out(); + ethernet_devicedriver_send(); + } + } + \endcode + * + * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \ + uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0) + +/** + * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to + * its structure. + * + * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual + * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This + * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific + * connection. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection + * to be processed. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn; \ + uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0) +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + +/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */ +void uip_reass_over(void); + +/** + * The uIP packet buffer. + * + * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing + * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this + * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link + * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of + * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define. + * + * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so + * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the + * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example: + \code + void + devicedriver_send(void) + { + hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN); + if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) { + hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN); + } else { + hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN); + hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN); + } + } + \endcode +*/ +extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2]; + + + +/** @} */ + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and + * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all + * handled by the functions below. + */ +/** + * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions + * @{ + * + * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP. + */ + +/** + * Start listening to the specified port. + * + * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte + * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary. + * + \code + uip_listen(HTONS(80)); + \endcode + * + * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order. + */ +void uip_listen(u16_t port); + +/** + * Stop listening to the specified port. + * + * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte + * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary. + * + \code + uip_unlisten(HTONS(80)); + \endcode + * + * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order. + */ +void uip_unlisten(u16_t port); + +/** + * Connect to a remote host using TCP. + * + * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified + * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier, + * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the + * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be + * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed, + * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to + * uip_connect(). + * + * \note This function is available only if support for active open + * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h. + * + * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network + * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary. + * + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2); + uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80)); + \endcode + * + * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host. + * + * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order. + * + * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection, + * or NULL if no connection could be allocated. + * + */ +struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port); + + + +/** + * \internal + * + * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len) + +/** + * Send data on the current connection. + * + * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP + * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event + * processing can send data. + * + * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this + * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP + * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate + * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query + * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent. + * + * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will + * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the + * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being + * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this + * function. + * + * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent. + * + * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +void uip_send(const void *data, int len); + +/** + * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available) + * in the uip_appdata buffer. + * + * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there + * is any data available at all. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +/*void uip_datalen(void);*/ +#define uip_datalen() uip_len + +/** + * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived + * on the connection. + * + * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this + * function to be enabled. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_urgdatalen() uip_urglen + +/** + * Close the current connection. + * + * This function will close the current connection in a nice way. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_close() (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE) + +/** + * Abort the current connection. + * + * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is + * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the + * uip_close() function. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_abort() (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT) + +/** + * Tell the sending host to stop sending data. + * + * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop + * receiving data for the current connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_stop() (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED) + +/** + * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with + * uip_stop(). + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_stopped(conn) ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) + +/** + * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped + * with uip_stop(). + * + * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we + * start receiving data for the current connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_restart() do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA; \ + uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED; \ + } while(0) + + +/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current + connection is, and what the application function should do. */ + +/** + * Is the current connection a UDP connection? + * + * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + * + */ +#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL) + +/** + * Is new incoming data available? + * + * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application + * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is + * available through the uip_len variable. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_newdata() (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) + +/** + * Has previously sent data been acknowledged? + * + * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been + * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application + * can send new data. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_acked() (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) + +/** + * Has the connection just been connected? + * + * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to + * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been + * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with + * uip_listen()). + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED) + +/** + * Has the connection been closed by the other end? + * + * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote + * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_closed() (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) + +/** + * Has the connection been aborted by the other end? + * + * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the + * remote host. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_aborted() (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) + +/** + * Has the connection timed out? + * + * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many + * retransmissions. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_timedout() (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT) + +/** + * Do we need to retransmit previously data? + * + * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in + * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The + * application should send the exact same data as it did the last + * time, using the uip_send() function. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_rexmit() (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT) + +/** + * Is the connection being polled by uIP? + * + * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the + * current connection has been idle for a while and should be + * polled. + * + * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to + * wait for the remote host to send data. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_poll() (uip_flags & UIP_POLL) + +/** + * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current + * connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_initialmss() (uip_conn->initialmss) + +/** + * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current + * connection. + * + * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the + * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of + * the connection (which also is available by calling + * uip_initialmss()). + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_mss() (uip_conn->mss) + +/** + * Set up a new UDP connection. + * + * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will + * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new + * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the + * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been + * called. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t addr; + struct uip_udp_conn *c; + + uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1); + c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345)); + if(c != NULL) { + uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344)); + } + \endcode + * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host. + * + * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order. + * + * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL + * if no connection could be allocated. + */ +struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport); + +/** + * Removed a UDP connection. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0 + +/** + * Bind a UDP connection to a local port. + * + * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the + * connection. + * + * \param port The local port number, in network byte order. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port + +/** + * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection. + * + * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll + * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the + * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer. + * + * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len) + +/** @} */ + +/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */ + +/** + * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions + * @{ + * + * These functions can be used for converting between different data + * formats used by uIP. + */ + +/** + * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr)); + \endcode + * + * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t. + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3] + +/** + * Construct an IP address from four bytes. + * + * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles + * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP + * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + struct uip_conn *c; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2); + c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80)); + \endcode + * + * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be + * filled in with the IP address. + * + * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address. + * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address. + * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address. + * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do { \ + (addr)->u8[0] = addr0; \ + (addr)->u8[1] = addr1; \ + (addr)->u8[2] = addr2; \ + (addr)->u8[3] = addr3; \ + } while(0) + +/** + * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words. + * + * This function constructs an IPv6 address. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \ + (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0); \ + (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1); \ + (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2); \ + (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3); \ + (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4); \ + (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5); \ + (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6); \ + (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7); \ + } while(0) + +/** + * Construct an IPv6 address from sixteen 8-bit words. + * + * This function constructs an IPv6 address. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \ + (addr)->u8[0] = addr0; \ + (addr)->u8[1] = addr1; \ + (addr)->u8[2] = addr2; \ + (addr)->u8[3] = addr3; \ + (addr)->u8[4] = addr4; \ + (addr)->u8[5] = addr5; \ + (addr)->u8[6] = addr6; \ + (addr)->u8[7] = addr7; \ + (addr)->u8[8] = addr8; \ + (addr)->u8[9] = addr9; \ + (addr)->u8[10] = addr10; \ + (addr)->u8[11] = addr11; \ + (addr)->u8[12] = addr12; \ + (addr)->u8[13] = addr13; \ + (addr)->u8[14] = addr14; \ + (addr)->u8[15] = addr15; \ + } while(0) + + +/** + * Copy an IP address to another IP address. + * + * Copies an IP address from one place to another. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1); + \endcode + * + * \param dest The destination for the copy. + * \param src The source from where to copy. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy +#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src)) +#endif + +/** + * Compare two IP addresses + * + * Compares two IP addresses. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2); + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) { + printf("They are the same"); + } + \endcode + * + * \param addr1 The first IP address. + * \param addr2 The second IP address. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 +#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \ + (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1]) +#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0) +#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + +/** + * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks + * + * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask + * out the bits that are to be compared. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask; + + uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0); + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2); + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3); + if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) { + printf("They are the same"); + } + \endcode + * + * \param addr1 The first IP address. + * \param addr2 The second IP address. + * \param mask The netmask. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 +#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask) \ + (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) == \ + (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) && \ + ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) == \ + (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]))) +#else +#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0) +#endif + + +/** + * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network. + * + * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The + * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the + * network's netmask. + * + * \param addr The IP address. + * \param netaddr The network's IP address. + * \param netmask The network's netmask. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask) + ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/ + + + +/** + * Mask out the network part of an IP address. + * + * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and + * the netmask. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2); + uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0); + uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask); + \endcode + * + * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP + * address 192.168.1.0. + * + * \param dest Where the result is to be placed. + * \param src The IP address. + * \param mask The netmask. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do { \ + ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]; \ + ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]; \ + } while(0) + +/** + * Pick the first octet of an IP address. + * + * Picks out the first octet of an IP address. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + u8_t octet; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4); + octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr); + \endcode + * + * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0]) + +/** + * Pick the second octet of an IP address. + * + * Picks out the second octet of an IP address. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + u8_t octet; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4); + octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr); + \endcode + * + * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1]) + +/** + * Pick the third octet of an IP address. + * + * Picks out the third octet of an IP address. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + u8_t octet; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4); + octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr); + \endcode + * + * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2]) + +/** + * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address. + * + * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address. + * + * Example: + \code + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + u8_t octet; + + uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4); + octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr); + \endcode + * + * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3]) + +/** + * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order. + * + * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host + * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to + * network byte order, use the htons() function instead. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef HTONS +# if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN +# define HTONS(n) (n) +# define HTONL(n) (n) +# else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */ +# define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8)) +# define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16)) +# endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */ +#else +#error "HTONS already defined!" +#endif /* HTONS */ + +/** + * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order. + * + * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host + * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to + * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead. + */ +#ifndef htons +u16_t htons(u16_t val); +#endif /* htons */ +#ifndef ntohs +#define ntohs htons +#endif + +#ifndef htonl +u32_t htonl(u32_t val); +#endif /* htonl */ +#ifndef ntohl +#define ntohl htonl +#endif + +/** @} */ + +/** + * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer. + * + * This pointer points to the application data when the application is + * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may + * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send(). + */ +extern void *uip_appdata; + +#if UIP_URGDATA > 0 +/* u8_t *uip_urgdata: + * + * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only + * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA). + */ +extern void *uip_urgdata; +#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */ + + +/** + * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers + * @{ + * + * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for + * uIP. + */ + +/** + * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer. + * + * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the + * uip_buf buffer. + * + * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function, + * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf + * buffer. + * + * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of + * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing + * packet. + * + */ +extern u16_t uip_len; + +/** + * The length of the extension headers + */ +extern u8_t uip_ext_len; +/** @} */ + +#if UIP_URGDATA > 0 +extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen; +#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */ + + +/** + * Representation of a uIP TCP connection. + * + * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All + * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an + * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose + * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g., + * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is + * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file. + */ +struct uip_conn { + uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr; /**< The IP address of the remote host. */ + + u16_t lport; /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */ + u16_t rport; /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte + order. */ + + u8_t rcv_nxt[4]; /**< The sequence number that we expect to + receive next. */ + u8_t snd_nxt[4]; /**< The sequence number that was last sent by + us. */ + u16_t len; /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */ + u16_t mss; /**< Current maximum segment size for the + connection. */ + u16_t initialmss; /**< Initial maximum segment size for the + connection. */ + u8_t sa; /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state + variable. */ + u8_t sv; /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state + variable. */ + u8_t rto; /**< Retransmission time-out. */ + u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */ + u8_t timer; /**< The retransmission timer. */ + u8_t nrtx; /**< The number of retransmissions for the last + segment sent. */ + + /** The application state. */ + uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate; +}; + + +/** + * Pointer to the current TCP connection. + * + * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP + * connection. + */ + +extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn; +#if UIP_TCP +/* The array containing all uIP connections. */ +extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS]; +#endif + +/** + * \addtogroup uiparch + * @{ + */ + +/** + * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations. + */ +extern u8_t uip_acc32[4]; +/** @} */ + +/** + * Representation of a uIP UDP connection. + */ +struct uip_udp_conn { + uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr; /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */ + u16_t lport; /**< The local port number in network byte order. */ + u16_t rport; /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */ + u8_t ttl; /**< Default time-to-live. */ + + /** The application state. */ + uip_udp_appstate_t appstate; +}; + +/** + * The current UDP connection. + */ +extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn; +extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS]; + +struct uip_router { + int (*activate)(void); + int (*deactivate)(void); + uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop); +}; + +#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER +extern const struct uip_router *uip_router; + +/** + * uIP routing driver registration function. + */ +void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router); +#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/ + +#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6 +struct uip_icmp6_conn { + uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate; +}; +extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns; +#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/ + +/** + * The uIP TCP/IP statistics. + * + * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered. + */ +#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1 +extern struct uip_stats uip_stat; +#define UIP_STAT(s) s +#else +#define UIP_STAT(s) +#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */ + +/** + * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if + * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1. + * + */ +struct uip_stats { + struct { + uip_stats_t recv; /**< Number of received packets at the IP + layer. */ + uip_stats_t sent; /**< Number of sent packets at the IP + layer. */ + uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP + layer. */ + uip_stats_t drop; /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP + layer. */ + uip_stats_t vhlerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong + IP version or header length. */ + uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong + IP length, high byte. */ + uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong + IP length, low byte. */ + uip_stats_t fragerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they + were IP fragments. */ + uip_stats_t chkerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP + checksum errors. */ + uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they + were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */ + } ip; /**< IP statistics. */ + struct { + uip_stats_t recv; /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */ + uip_stats_t sent; /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */ + uip_stats_t drop; /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */ + uip_stats_t typeerr; /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong + type. */ + uip_stats_t chkerr; /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad + checksum. */ + } icmp; /**< ICMP statistics. */ +#if UIP_TCP + struct { + uip_stats_t recv; /**< Number of received TCP segments. */ + uip_stats_t sent; /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */ + uip_stats_t drop; /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */ + uip_stats_t chkerr; /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad + checksum. */ + uip_stats_t ackerr; /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK + number. */ + uip_stats_t rst; /**< Number of received TCP RST (reset) segments. */ + uip_stats_t rexmit; /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */ + uip_stats_t syndrop; /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few + connections was available. */ + uip_stats_t synrst; /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports, + triggering a RST. */ + } tcp; /**< TCP statistics. */ +#endif +#if UIP_UDP + struct { + uip_stats_t drop; /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */ + uip_stats_t recv; /**< Number of received UDP segments. */ + uip_stats_t sent; /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */ + uip_stats_t chkerr; /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad + checksum. */ + } udp; /**< UDP statistics. */ +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + struct { + uip_stats_t drop; /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */ + uip_stats_t recv; /**< Number of received ND6 packets */ + uip_stats_t sent; /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */ + } nd6; +#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/ +}; + + +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be + * used directly by an application or by a device driver. + */ +/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + + + +/* u8_t uip_flags: + * + * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags + * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more + * information. + */ +extern u8_t uip_flags; + +/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags + before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA, + UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time, + whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags + should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP + functions/macros. */ + +#define UIP_ACKDATA 1 /* Signifies that the outstanding data was + acked and the application should send + out new data instead of retransmitting + the last data. */ +#define UIP_NEWDATA 2 /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent + us new data. */ +#define UIP_REXMIT 4 /* Tells the application to retransmit the + data that was last sent. */ +#define UIP_POLL 8 /* Used for polling the application, to + check if the application has data that + it wants to send. */ +#define UIP_CLOSE 16 /* The remote host has closed the + connection, thus the connection has + gone away. Or the application signals + that it wants to close the + connection. */ +#define UIP_ABORT 32 /* The remote host has aborted the + connection, thus the connection has + gone away. Or the application signals + that it wants to abort the + connection. */ +#define UIP_CONNECTED 64 /* We have got a connection from a remote + host and have set up a new connection + for it, or an active connection has + been successfully established. */ + +#define UIP_TIMEDOUT 128 /* The connection has been aborted due to + too many retransmissions. */ + + +/** + * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header + * \retval 0: nothing to send, + * \retval 1: drop pkt + * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send +*/ +/*static u8_t +uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */ + +/* uip_process(flag): + * + * The actual uIP function which does all the work. + */ +void uip_process(u8_t flag); + + /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process() + function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where + uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have + incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic + timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in + the macros defined in this file. */ + +#define UIP_DATA 1 /* Tells uIP that there is incoming + data in the uip_buf buffer. The + length of the data is stored in the + global variable uip_len. */ +#define UIP_TIMER 2 /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer + has fired. */ +#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST 3 /* Tells uIP that a connection should + be polled. */ +#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4 /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram + should be constructed in the + uip_buf buffer. */ +#if UIP_UDP +#define UIP_UDP_TIMER 5 +#endif /* UIP_UDP */ + +/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */ +#define UIP_CLOSED 0 +#define UIP_SYN_RCVD 1 +#define UIP_SYN_SENT 2 +#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3 +#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1 4 +#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2 5 +#define UIP_CLOSING 6 +#define UIP_TIME_WAIT 7 +#define UIP_LAST_ACK 8 +#define UIP_TS_MASK 15 + +#define UIP_STOPPED 16 + +/* The TCP and IP headers. */ +struct uip_tcpip_hdr { +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* IPv6 header. */ + u8_t vtc, + tcflow; + u16_t flow; + u8_t len[2]; + u8_t proto, ttl; + uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* IPv4 header. */ + u8_t vhl, + tos, + len[2], + ipid[2], + ipoffset[2], + ttl, + proto; + u16_t ipchksum; + uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* TCP header. */ + u16_t srcport, + destport; + u8_t seqno[4], + ackno[4], + tcpoffset, + flags, + wnd[2]; + u16_t tcpchksum; + u8_t urgp[2]; + u8_t optdata[4]; +}; + +/* The ICMP and IP headers. */ +struct uip_icmpip_hdr { +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* IPv6 header. */ + u8_t vtc, + tcf; + u16_t flow; + u8_t len[2]; + u8_t proto, ttl; + uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* IPv4 header. */ + u8_t vhl, + tos, + len[2], + ipid[2], + ipoffset[2], + ttl, + proto; + u16_t ipchksum; + uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* ICMP header. */ + u8_t type, icode; + u16_t icmpchksum; +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + u16_t id, seqno; + u8_t payload[1]; +#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +}; + + +/* The UDP and IP headers. */ +struct uip_udpip_hdr { +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* IPv6 header. */ + u8_t vtc, + tcf; + u16_t flow; + u8_t len[2]; + u8_t proto, ttl; + uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* IP header. */ + u8_t vhl, + tos, + len[2], + ipid[2], + ipoffset[2], + ttl, + proto; + u16_t ipchksum; + uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + /* UDP header. */ + u16_t srcport, + destport; + u16_t udplen; + u16_t udpchksum; +}; + +/* + * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is + * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers + * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers + */ +/* The IP header */ +struct uip_ip_hdr { +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 + /* IPV6 header */ + u8_t vtc; + u8_t tcflow; + u16_t flow; + u8_t len[2]; + u8_t proto, ttl; + uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + /* IPV4 header */ + u8_t vhl, + tos, + len[2], + ipid[2], + ipoffset[2], + ttl, + proto; + u16_t ipchksum; + uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +}; + + +/* + * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process + * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6): + * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header: + * These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence + * we just read them and go to the next. They convey options, + * the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do + * some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length + * field in the header is enough) + * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6, + * which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go + * to the next + * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to + * reassemble packets + * + * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers + * + * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are + * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385 + */ +/* common header part */ +struct uip_ext_hdr { + u8_t next; + u8_t len; +}; + +/* Hop by Hop option header */ +struct uip_hbho_hdr { + u8_t next; + u8_t len; +}; + +/* destination option header */ +struct uip_desto_hdr { + u8_t next; + u8_t len; +}; + +/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */ + +/* + * routing header + * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type + * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was + * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in + * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to + * parse the 4 first bytes + */ +struct uip_routing_hdr { + u8_t next; + u8_t len; + u8_t routing_type; + u8_t seg_left; +}; + +/* fragmentation header */ +struct uip_frag_hdr { + u8_t next; + u8_t res; + u16_t offsetresmore; + u32_t id; +}; + +/* + * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers + * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1 + */ +struct uip_ext_hdr_opt { + u8_t type; + u8_t len; +}; + +/* PADN option */ +struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn { + u8_t opt_type; + u8_t opt_len; +}; + +/* TCP header */ +struct uip_tcp_hdr { + u16_t srcport; + u16_t destport; + u8_t seqno[4]; + u8_t ackno[4]; + u8_t tcpoffset; + u8_t flags; + u8_t wnd[2]; + u16_t tcpchksum; + u8_t urgp[2]; + u8_t optdata[4]; +}; + +/* The ICMP headers. */ +struct uip_icmp_hdr { + u8_t type, icode; + u16_t icmpchksum; +#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 + u16_t id, seqno; +#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +}; + + +/* The UDP headers. */ +struct uip_udp_hdr { + u16_t srcport; + u16_t destport; + u16_t udplen; + u16_t udpchksum; +}; + + +/** + * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer. + * + * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref + * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking + * bounds of available user data. + * + * Example: + \code + snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i); + \endcode + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) +#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN] + +#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP 1 +#define UIP_PROTO_TCP 6 +#define UIP_PROTO_UDP 17 +#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58 + + +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +/** @{ */ +/** \brief extension headers types */ +#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO 0 +#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO 60 +#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING 43 +#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG 44 +#define UIP_PROTO_NONE 59 +/** @} */ + +/** @{ */ +/** \brief Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */ +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1 0 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN 1 +/** @} */ + +/** @{ */ +/** + * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing + * + * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we + * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination + * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The + * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460 + */ +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20 +#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40 +/** @} */ + + +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + + +/* Header sizes. */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +#define UIP_IPH_LEN 40 +#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN 8 +#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ +#define UIP_IPH_LEN 20 /* Size of IP header */ +#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */ + +#define UIP_UDPH_LEN 8 /* Size of UDP header */ +#define UIP_TCPH_LEN 20 /* Size of TCP header */ +#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN +#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN 4 /* Size of ICMP header */ +#endif +#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN) /* Size of IP + + * UDP + * header */ +#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN) /* Size of IP + + * TCP + * header */ +#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN +#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP + + IP header */ +#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN) /* size of L2 + + IP header */ +#if UIP_CONF_IPV6 +/** + * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we + * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence + * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital + * letters as these values are variable + */ +#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len) +#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) +#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len) +#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) +#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/ + + +#if UIP_FIXEDADDR +extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr; +#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */ +extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr; +#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */ +extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr; +extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr; + +#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR +extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr; +#else +extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr; +#endif + + + + +#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6 +/** + * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address + * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t + */ +#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a) \ + ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[7]) == 0)) + +/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */ +#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) \ + ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) && \ + (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) && \ + (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01)) + +/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */ +#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) + +/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */ +#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001) + +/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */ +#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002) + +/** + * \brief is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513 + * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t* + */ +#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a) \ + ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) && \ + (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) && \ + (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) && \ + (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF)) + +/** + * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a + * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t* + * */ +#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b) \ + (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF); \ + (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02); \ + (((b)->u16[1]) = 0); \ + (((b)->u16[2]) = 0); \ + (((b)->u16[3]) = 0); \ + (((b)->u16[4]) = 0); \ + (((b)->u8[10]) = 0); \ + (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01); \ + (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF); \ + (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13])); \ + (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7])) + +/** + * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513 + * i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10 + * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t* + */ +#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \ + ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \ + (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80)) + +/** + * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m + * a type is uip_ipaddr_t + * m type is uiplladdr_t + */ +#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154 +#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \ + ((((a)->u8[8]) == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) && \ + (((a)->u8[9]) == (m)->addr[1]) && \ + (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) && \ + (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) && \ + (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) && \ + (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) && \ + (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) && \ + (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7])) +#else + +#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \ + ((((a)->u8[8]) == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) && \ + (((a)->u8[9]) == (m)->addr[1]) && \ + (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) && \ + (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) && \ + (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) && \ + (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) && \ + (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) && \ + (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5])) + +#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/ + +/** + * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513 + * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t* + * */ +#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a) \ + (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) + +/** + * \brief is group-id of multicast address a + * the all nodes group-id + */ +#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \ + ((((a)->u16[1]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[15]) == 1)) + +/** + * \brief is group-id of multicast address a + * the all routers group-id + */ +#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \ + ((((a)->u16[1]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) && \ + (((a)->u8[15]) == 2)) + + +#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/ + +/** + * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer. + * + * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's + * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer. + * + * See RFC1071. + * + * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be + * computed. + * + * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to + * be computed. + * + * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer. + */ +u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len); + +/** + * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf. + * + * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of + * the IP header. + * + * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf + * buffer. + */ +u16_t uip_ipchksum(void); + +/** + * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata. + * + * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the + * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793. + * + * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed + * to by uip_appdata. + */ +u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void); + +/** + * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata. + * + * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the + * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768. + * + * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed + * to by uip_appdata. + */ +u16_t uip_udpchksum(void); + +/** + * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf. + * + * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf + */ +u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void); + + +#endif /* __UIP_H__ */ + + +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fcb783b140 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c @@ -0,0 +1,432 @@ +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol + * @{ + * + * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP + * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC + * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level + * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with + * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its + * link level address. + * + * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet. + */ + +/** + * \file + * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol. + * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com> + * + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote + * products derived from this software without specific prior + * written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS + * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED + * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE + * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS + * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, + * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING + * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS + * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * + * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $ + * + */ + + +#include "uip_arp.h" + +#include <string.h> + +struct arp_hdr { + struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr; + u16_t hwtype; + u16_t protocol; + u8_t hwlen; + u8_t protolen; + u16_t opcode; + struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr; + uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr; + struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr; + uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr; +}; + +struct ethip_hdr { + struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr; + /* IP header. */ + u8_t vhl, + tos, + len[2], + ipid[2], + ipoffset[2], + ttl, + proto; + u16_t ipchksum; + uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr; +}; + +#define ARP_REQUEST 1 +#define ARP_REPLY 2 + +#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1 + +struct arp_entry { + uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; + struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr; + u8_t time; +}; + +static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr = + {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}}; +static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff}; + +static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE]; +static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr; +static u8_t i, c; + +static u8_t arptime; +static u8_t tmpage; + +#define BUF ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0]) +#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0]) + +#define DEBUG 0 +#if DEBUG +#include <stdio.h> +#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__) +#else +#define PRINTF(...) +#endif + +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Initialize the ARP module. + * + */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_arp_init(void) +{ + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4); + } +} +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Periodic ARP processing function. + * + * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module + * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval + * is 10 seconds between the calls. + * + */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_arp_timer(void) +{ + struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL; + + ++arptime; + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) && + arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) { + memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4); + } + } + +} +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +static void +uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr) +{ + register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL; + /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to + update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is + inserted in the ARP table. */ + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */ + if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) { + + /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches + the IP address in this ARP table entry. */ + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) { + + /* An old entry found, update this and return. */ + memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6); + tabptr->time = arptime; + + return; + } + } + } + + /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we + create one. */ + + /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */ + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) { + break; + } + } + + /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and + throw it away. */ + if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) { + tmpage = 0; + c = 0; + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) { + tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time; + c = i; + } + } + i = c; + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + } + + /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new + information. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr); + memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6); + tabptr->time = arptime; +} +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * ARP processing for incoming IP packets + * + * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP + * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is + * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be + * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created. + * + * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header + * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global + * variable uip_len. + */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +#if 0 +void +uip_arp_ipin(void) +{ + uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr); + + /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the + incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */ + if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) != + (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) { + return; + } + if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) != + (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) { + return; + } + uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src)); + + return; +} +#endif /* 0 */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets. + * + * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP + * packet has been received. The function will act differently + * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request + * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with + * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP + * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put + * into the uip_buf[] buffer. + * + * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len + * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or + * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is + * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is + * present in the uip_buf[] buffer. + * + * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet + * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the + * global variable uip_len. + */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_arp_arpin(void) +{ + if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) { + uip_len = 0; + return; + } + uip_len = 0; + + switch(BUF->opcode) { + case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST): + /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a + reply. */ + /* if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] && + BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/ + PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n", + BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1], + BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3], + uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1], + uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]); + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) { + /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP + table, since it is likely that we will do more communication + with this host in the future. */ + uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr); + + BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY); + + memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6); + memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6); + memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6); + memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6); + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + + BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP); + uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr); + } + break; + case HTONS(ARP_REPLY): + /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant + for us. */ + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) { + uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr); + } + break; + } + + return; +} +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need + * to send out an ARP request. + * + * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The + * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see + * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC + * address on the Ethernet. + * + * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined + * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function + * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP + * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the + * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the + * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by + * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped + * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP) + * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet. + * + * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP + * address of the default router is used instead. + * + * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[] + * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable + * uip_len. + */ +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +void +uip_arp_out(void) +{ + struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL; + + /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct + the Ethernet header. If the destination IP address isn't on the + local network, we use the default router's IP address instead. + + If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP + packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */ + + /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */ + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) { + memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6); + } else { + /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */ + if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) { + /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to + use the default router's IP address instead of the destination + address when determining the MAC address. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr); + } else { + /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */ + uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr); + } + + for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) { + tabptr = &arp_table[i]; + if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) { + break; + } + } + + if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) { + /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we + overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */ + + memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6); + memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6); + memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6); + memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6); + + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr); + uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr); + BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */ + BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH); + BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP); + BUF->hwlen = 6; + BUF->protolen = 4; + BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP); + + uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN]; + + uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr); + return; + } + + /* Build an ethernet header. */ + memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6); + } + memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6); + + IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP); + + uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr); +} +/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** @} */ +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4e78ce7b77 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \addtogroup uiparp + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \file + * Macros and definitions for the ARP module. + * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com> + */ + + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote + * products derived from this software without specific prior + * written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS + * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED + * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE + * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS + * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, + * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING + * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS + * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * + * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $ + * + */ + +#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__ +#define __UIP_ARP_H__ + +#include "uip.h" + + +extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr; + +/** + * The Ethernet header. + */ +struct uip_eth_hdr { + struct uip_eth_addr dest; + struct uip_eth_addr src; + u16_t type; +}; + +#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP 0x0806 +#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP 0x0800 +#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd + + +/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other + ARP functions. */ +void uip_arp_init(void); + +/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet + arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or + inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an + IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer + and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */ +/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/ +#define uip_arp_ipin() + +/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received + by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the + Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the + uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf + buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable + is > 0. */ +void uip_arp_arpin(void); + +/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet + should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an + Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The + Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination + address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP + address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no + such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP + request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was + overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of + the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */ +void uip_arp_out(void); + +/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It + is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */ +void uip_arp_timer(void); + +/** @} */ + +/** + * \addtogroup uipconffunc + * @{ + */ + + +/** + * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address. + * + * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in + * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working + * Ethernet headers. + * + * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP + * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet + * card. + * + * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the + * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \ + uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\ + uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\ + uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\ + uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\ + uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0) + +/** @} */ + + +#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */ +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..520c03f25e --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h @@ -0,0 +1,740 @@ +/** + * \addtogroup uip + * @{ + */ + +/** + * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP + * @{ + * + * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file + * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and + * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP + * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be + * copied and modified for each project. + */ + +/** + * \file + * Configuration options for uIP. + * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com> + * + * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for + * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's + * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that + * comes with the uIP distribution. + */ + +/* + * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels. + * All rights reserved. + * + * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without + * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions + * are met: + * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. + * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright + * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the + * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. + * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote + * products derived from this software without specific prior + * written permission. + * + * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS + * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED + * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE + * ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY + * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL + * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE + * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS + * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, + * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING + * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS + * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. + * + * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack. + * + * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $ + * + */ + +#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__ +#define __UIPOPT_H__ + +#include "Config/AppConfig.h" + +#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN +#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN 3412 +#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */ +#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN +#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN 1234 +#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** + * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options + * @{ + * + * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address + * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The + * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address, + * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The + * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only + * if uIP should be run over Ethernet. + * + * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code. + * + * All of these should be changed to suit your project. + */ + +/** + * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not. + * + * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the + * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(), + * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define UIP_FIXEDADDR 0 + +/** + * Ping IP address assignment. + * + * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this + * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and + * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo) + * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address. + * + * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF +#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF +#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */ +#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */ + + +/** + * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed + * Ethernet MAC address or not. + * + * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can + * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0 + +/** @} */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options + * @{ + * + */ +/** + * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP. + * + * This should normally not be changed. + */ +#define UIP_TTL 64 + +/** + * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly + * buffer before it is dropped. + * + */ +#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/ + +/** + * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly. + * + * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features + * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer + * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes. The + * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer + * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE). + * + * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY +#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY +#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */ +#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */ +/** @} */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options + * @{ + * + */ + +/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/ +#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280 + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6 +/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */ +#define UIP_CONF_IPV6 0 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT +/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */ +#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT 0 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS +/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */ +#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS 1 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY +/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */ +#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY 0 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES +/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */ +#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES 3 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES +/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */ +#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES 3 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS +/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */ +#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS 4 +#endif + +#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS +/** Minimum number of default routers */ +#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS 2 +#endif +/** @} */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options + * @{ + * + * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there + * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast + * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital + * applications such as DNS queries, though + */ + +/** + * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP +#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP +#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */ +#define UIP_UDP 1 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */ + +/** + * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not. + * + * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP, + * so this option has no function. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS +#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS +#else +#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0 +#endif + +/** + * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS +#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS +#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */ +#define UIP_UDP_CONNS 10 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */ + +/** + * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ + + +/** @} */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options + * @{ + */ + +/** + * Toggles whether TCP support should be compiled in or not. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP +#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP +#else /* UIP_CONF_TCP */ +#define UIP_TCP 1 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_TCP */ + +/** + * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be + * compiled in. + * + * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project + * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration + * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN +#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1 +#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */ +#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN +#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */ + +/** + * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections. + * + * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this + * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP + * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS +#define UIP_CONNS 10 +#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */ +#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS +#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */ + + +/** + * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports. + * + * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS +#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20 +#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */ +#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS +#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */ + +/** + * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be + * compiled in. + * + * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that + * very seldom would be required. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA) +#define UIP_URGDATA 0 +#endif + +/** + * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses. + * + * This should not be changed. + */ +#if !defined(UIP_RTO) +#define UIP_RTO 3 +#endif + +/** + * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted + * before the connection should be aborted. + * + * This should not be changed. + */ +#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX) +#define UIP_MAXRTX 8 +#endif + +/** + * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted + * before a connection request should be deemed to have been + * unsuccessful. + * + * This should not need to be changed. + */ +#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX) +#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX 5 +#endif + +/** + * The TCP maximum segment size. + * + * This is should not be to set to more than + * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN. + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS +#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS +#else +#define UIP_TCP_MSS (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) +#endif + +/** + * The size of the advertised receiver's window. + * + * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the + * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes) + * if the application processes data quickly. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW +#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS +#else +#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW +#endif + +/** + * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state. + * + * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be + * left untouched. + */ +#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120 + + +/** @} */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options + * @{ + */ + +/** + * The size of the ARP table. + * + * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will + * have many connections from the local network. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE +#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE +#else +#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8 +#endif + +/** + * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds. + * + * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD + * default). + */ +#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120 + + +/** @} */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** + * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6) + * @{ + */ + +#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64 + +/** @} */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** + * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6) + * @{ + */ +/** + * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer + * (should be < 60s) + */ +#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE +#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE +#else +#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20 +#endif + +/** + * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no) + */ +#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION +#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0 +#endif + +/** + * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support + */ +#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS +#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1 +#endif + +/** + * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation + */ +#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG +#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG 0 +#endif + +/** @} */ + +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +/** + * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options + * @{ + */ + +/** + * The size of the uIP packet buffer. + * + * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does + * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower + * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE +#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN +#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */ +#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE +#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */ + + +/** + * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in. + * + * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS +#define UIP_STATISTICS 0 +#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */ +#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS +#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */ + +/** + * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in. + * + * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log() + * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if + * logging is turned on. + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING +#define UIP_LOGGING 0 +#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */ +#define UIP_LOGGING UIP_CONF_LOGGING +#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */ + +/** + * Broadcast support. + * + * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only + * together with UDP. + * + * \hideinitializer + * + */ +#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST +#define UIP_BROADCAST 0 +#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */ +#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST +#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */ + +/** + * Print out a uIP log message. + * + * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and + * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated. + */ +void uip_log(char *msg); + +/** + * The link level header length. + * + * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be + * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this + * should be set to 0. + * + * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than + * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable + * number and type of address fields and to optional security features) + * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14 + * 802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2 + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN +#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN +#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */ +#define UIP_LLH_LEN 14 +#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */ + +/** @} */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ +/** + * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration + * @{ + * + * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the + * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are + * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas + * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to + * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run. + */ + +/** + * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run. + * + * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or + * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order). + * + * \hideinitializer + */ +#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER +#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER +#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */ +#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN +#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */ + +/** @} */ +/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/ + +#include <ff.h> +#include <stdbool.h> +#include <stdint.h> + +#include "timer.h" + +typedef uint8_t u8_t; +typedef uint16_t u16_t; +typedef uint32_t u32_t; +typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t; + +/** + * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations + * @{ + * + * An uIP application is implemented using a single application + * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The + * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time + * using the UIP_APPCALL definition. + * + * uIP applications can store the application state within the + * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application + * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t. + * + * The file containing the definitions must be included in the + * uipopt.h file. + * + * The following example illustrates how this can look. + \code + + void httpd_appcall(void); + #define UIP_APPCALL httpd_appcall + + struct httpd_state { + u8_t state; + u16_t count; + char *dataptr; + char *script; + }; + typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t + \endcode +*/ +#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback +void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void); + +/** + * \var #define UIP_APPCALL + * + * The name of the application function that uIP should call in + * response to TCP/IP events. + * + */ +#define UIP_APPCALL uIPManagement_TCPCallback +void UIP_APPCALL(void); + +/** + * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t + * + * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the + * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding + * application state information. + */ +typedef union +{ + struct + { + uint8_t CurrentState; + uint8_t NextState; + + char FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH]; + FIL FileHandle; + bool FileOpen; + uint32_t ACKedFilePos; + uint16_t SentChunkSize; + } HTTPServer; + + struct + { + uint8_t CurrentState; + uint8_t NextState; + + uint8_t IssuedCommand; + } TELNETServer; +} uip_tcp_appstate_t; + +/** + * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t + * + * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the + * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding + * application state information. + */ +typedef union +{ + struct + { + uint8_t CurrentState; + struct timer Timeout; + + struct + { + uint8_t AllocatedIP[4]; + uint8_t Netmask[4]; + uint8_t GatewayIP[4]; + uint8_t ServerIP[4]; + } DHCPOffer_Data; + } DHCPClient; +} uip_udp_appstate_t; +/** @} */ + +#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */ +/** @} */ +/** @} */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c883f1441d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to + * manage the USB Mass Storage device mode. + */ + +#include "USBDeviceMode.h" + +/** Message buffer for RNDIS messages processed by the RNDIS device class driver. */ +static uint8_t RNDIS_Message_Buffer[192]; + +/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .AdapterVendorDescription = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter", + .AdapterMACAddress = {{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}}, + .MessageBuffer = RNDIS_Message_Buffer, + .MessageBufferLength = sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Buffer), + }, + }; + +/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR, + .Size = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .TotalLUNs = 1, + }, + }; + + +/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is + * initialized in USB device mode. + */ +void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void) +{ + if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Device) + return; + + uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(); + + RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device); + MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + uIPManagement_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + ConfigSuccess &= RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device); + ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device); + MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface); +} + +/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed. + * + * \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo) +{ + bool CommandSuccess; + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY); + CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo); + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + + return CommandSuccess; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f714903332 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBDeviceMode.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_ +#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Webserver.h" + #include "Descriptors.h" + #include "Lib/uIPManagement.h" + #include "Lib/SCSI.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* External Variables: */ + extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + + bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..04190bfe20 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to + * manage the USB RNDIS host mode. + */ + +#include "USBHostMode.h" + +/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host = + { + .Config = + { + .DataINPipe = + { + .Address = (PIPE_DIR_IN | 1), + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTPipe = + { + .Address = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2), + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationPipe = + { + .Address = (PIPE_DIR_IN | 3), + .Banks = 1, + }, + .HostMaxPacketSize = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE, + }, + }; + + +/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is + * initialized in USB host mode. + */ +void USBHostMode_USBTask(void) +{ + if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host) + return; + + uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(); + + RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and + * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and + * stops the library USB task management process. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully + * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); + + uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize; + uint8_t ConfigDescriptorData[512]; + + if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData, + sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, + ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + return; + } + + if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); + return; + } + + uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST); + if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER, + &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); + return; + } + + if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS, + &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0); + return; + } + + /* Initialize uIP stack */ + uIPManagement_Init(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode) +{ + USB_Disable(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); + for(;;); +} + +/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while + * enumerating an attached USB device. + */ +void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b2c8d66ec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USBHostMode.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_ +#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Webserver.h" + #include "Lib/uIPManagement.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* External Variables: */ + extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void USBHostMode_USBTask(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, + const uint8_t SubErrorCode); + void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bd8fa24ce6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "Webserver.h" + +/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then + * enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host) + USBHostMode_USBTask(); + else + USBDeviceMode_USBTask(); + + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + Dataflash_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0438fe0b90 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for Webserver.c. + */ + +#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_ +#define _WEBSERVER_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + #include "USBDeviceMode.h" + #include "USBHostMode.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY LEDS_LED2 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3) + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4) + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..10aa716528 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7) + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n + * Mass Storage Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n + * Bulk-Only Transport</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n + * USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n + * USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n + * SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n + * SCSI Block Commands Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS + * library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP web pages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project + * demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS + * network device. + * + * To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage and RNDIS composite + * device. Load HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called + * <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total + * requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref Sec_Options). Supply the included INF + * file when requested on Windows machines to enable the RNDIS interface, and allow the files to be viewed on a standard web-browser + * using the IP address 10.0.0.2. + * + * When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the + * appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET + * connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS + * device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref Sec_Options) - otherwise, the device + * will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically. + * + * When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP web browser by typing in the device's statically or + * dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device + * on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incoming connections + * and processes user commands.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP server for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings to a DHCP client.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT + * is not defined).</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and separators.</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>MAC address of the server used when sending Ethernet packets onto the bus.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ea6b4c66f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="RNDIS Webserver" id="lufa.projects.webserver.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.webserver"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.webserver" caption="RNDIS Webserver">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ RNDIS Webserver project, using the open source uIP network stack.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Dual Role"/>
+ <keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>
+ <keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Webserver.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Webserver.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="USBDeviceMode.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="USBHostMode.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Webserver.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="USBDeviceMode.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="USBHostMode.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uIPManagement.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uIPManagement.h"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>
+
+ <build type="include-path" value="Lib/uip/"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/clock.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/clock.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/timer.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/timer.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.h"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uipopt.h"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0f01c93b3d --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2396 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */uip/* \ + */FATFs/* + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..852d011bcf --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/Webserver/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = USBKEY +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = Webserver +SRC = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c USBDeviceMode.c USBHostMode.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/DataflashManager.c \ + Lib/uIPManagement.c Lib/DHCPCommon.c Lib/DHCPClientApp.c Lib/DHCPServerApp.c Lib/HTTPServerApp.c \ + Lib/TELNETServerApp.c Lib/uip/uip.c Lib/uip/uip_arp.c Lib/uip/timer.c Lib/uip/clock.c \ + Lib/uip/uip-split.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -ILib/uip/ -ILib/FATFs/ +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ce9caaf616 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief Application Configuration Header File + * + * This is a header file which is be used to configure some of + * the application's compile time options, as an alternative to + * specifying the compile time constants supplied through a + * makefile or build system. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the + * \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation. + */ + +#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_ +#define _APP_CONFIG_H_ + + #define AUX_LINE_PORT PORTB + #define AUX_LINE_PIN PINB + #define AUX_LINE_DDR DDRB + #define AUX_LINE_MASK (1 << 4) + +// #define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL + #define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL + + #define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL 2 + #define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS 3.3 + #define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR 2 +// #define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF +// #define NO_VTARGET_DETECT +// #define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE +// #define INVERTED_ISP_MISO + +// #define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR 0x11 + +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..2767f33e32 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File + * + * This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options, + * as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through + * a makefile. + * + * For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA + * manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens". + */ + +#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ +#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_ + + #if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + + /* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */ +// #define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES + + /* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY +// #define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH + + /* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */ + #define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG + #define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL) + #define USB_DEVICE_ONLY +// #define USB_HOST_ONLY +// #define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT + #define NO_SOF_EVENTS + + /* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS + #define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS +// #define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS +// #define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL + #define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE 16 + #define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR 0 + #define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS 1 +// #define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE +// #define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT + #define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP + #define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER + + /* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */ +// #define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR {Insert Value Here} +// #define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS {Insert Value Here} +// #define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT +// #define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE + + #else + + #error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file. + + #endif +#endif diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..45840e8bf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +;************************************************************ +; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File +; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation +;************************************************************ + +[DefaultInstall] +CopyINF="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf" + +[Version] +Signature="$Windows NT$" +Class=Ports +ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318} +Provider=%MFGNAME% +DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0 + +[Manufacturer] +%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64 + +[SourceDisksNames] + +[SourceDisksFiles] + +[DestinationDirs] +DefaultDestDir=12 + +[DriverInstall] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection +AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg + +[DriverInstall.Services] +Include=mdmcpq.inf +AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst + +[DriverInstall.AddReg] +HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider" + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; Vendor and Product ID Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side +; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match. +; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID. Use the format as shown below. +; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs. +; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line. +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[DeviceList] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTx86] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTamd64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +[DeviceList.NTia64] +%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B + +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +; String Definitions +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +;Modify these strings to customize your device +;------------------------------------------------------------------------------ +[Strings] +MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org" +DESCRIPTION="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c0e3c8cd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk) + Copyright 2010 Peter Danneger + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Software UART for both data transmission and reception. This + * code continuously monitors the ring buffers set up by the main + * project source file and reads/writes data as it becomes available. + */ + +#include "SoftUART.h" + +/** Total number of bits remaining to be sent in the current frame */ +static uint8_t TX_BitsRemaining; + +/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being transmitted as it is shifted out */ +static uint8_t TX_Data; + +/** Total number of bits remaining to be received in the current frame */ +static uint8_t RX_BitsRemaining; + +/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being received as it is shifted in */ +static uint8_t RX_Data; + + +/** Initializes the software UART, ready for data transmission and reception into the global ring buffers. */ +void SoftUART_Init(void) +{ + /* Set TX pin to output high, enable RX pull-up */ + STXPORT |= (1 << STX); + STXDDR |= (1 << STX); + SRXPORT |= (1 << SRX); + + /* Enable INT0 for the detection of incoming start bits that signal the start of a byte */ + EICRA = (1 << ISC01); + EIMSK = (1 << INT0); + + /* Set the transmission and reception timer compare values for the default baud rate */ + SoftUART_SetBaud(9600); + + /* Setup reception timer compare ISR */ + TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A); + + /* Setup transmission timer compare ISR and start the timer */ + TIMSK3 = (1 << OCIE3A); + TCCR3B = ((1 << CS30) | (1 << WGM32)); +} + +/** ISR to detect the start of a bit being sent to the software UART. */ +ISR(INT0_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Reset the number of reception bits remaining counter */ + RX_BitsRemaining = 8; + + /* Reset the bit reception timer to -(1/2) of the total bit time, so that the first data bit is + * sampled mid way through the total bit time, making reception more robust. + */ + TCNT1 = -(OCR1A >> 1); + + /* Check to see that the pin is still low (prevents glitches from starting a frame reception) */ + if (!(SRXPIN & (1 << SRX))) + { + /* Disable start bit detection ISR while the next byte is received */ + EIMSK = 0; + + /* Start the reception timer */ + TCCR1B = ((1 << CS10) | (1 << WGM12)); + } +} + +/** ISR to manage the reception of bits to the software UART. */ +ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Cache the current RX pin value for later checking */ + uint8_t SRX_Cached = (SRXPIN & (1 << SRX)); + + /* Check if reception has finished */ + if (RX_BitsRemaining) + { + /* Shift the current received bit mask to the next bit position */ + RX_Data >>= 1; + RX_BitsRemaining--; + + /* Store next bit into the received data variable */ + if (SRX_Cached) + RX_Data |= (1 << 7); + } + else + { + /* Disable the reception timer as all data has now been received, re-enable start bit detection ISR */ + TCCR1B = 0; + EIFR = (1 << INTF0); + EIMSK = (1 << INT0); + + /* Reception complete, store the received byte if stop bit valid */ + if (SRX_Cached) + RingBuffer_Insert(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, RX_Data); + } +} + +/** ISR to manage the transmission of bits via the software UART. */ +ISR(TIMER3_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK) +{ + /* Check if transmission has finished */ + if (TX_BitsRemaining) + { + /* Set the TX line to the value of the next bit in the byte to send */ + if (TX_Data & (1 << 0)) + STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX); + else + STXPORT |= (1 << STX); + + /* Shift the transmission byte to move the next bit into position and decrement the bits remaining counter */ + TX_Data >>= 1; + TX_BitsRemaining--; + } + else if (!(RX_BitsRemaining) && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUART_Buffer))) + { + /* Start bit - TX line low */ + STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX); + + /* Transmission complete, get the next byte to send (if available) */ + TX_Data = ~RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUART_Buffer); + TX_BitsRemaining = 9; + } +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b273967814 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2010 David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk) + Copyright 2010 Peter Danneger + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for SoftUART.c. + */ + +#ifndef _SOFT_UART_ +#define _SOFT_UART_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <stdbool.h> + + #include "../XPLAINBridge.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + #define SRX PD0 + #define SRXPIN PIND + #define SRXPORT PORTD + + #define STX PD1 + #define STXPORT PORTD + #define STXDDR DDRD + + /* Inline Functions: */ + static inline void SoftUART_SetBaud(const uint32_t Baud) + { + uint16_t BitTime = ((F_CPU / Baud) - 1); + + OCR1A = BitTime; + OCR3A = BitTime; + } + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SoftUART_Init(void); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..54f0d96fe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c @@ -0,0 +1,242 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special + * computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine + * the device's capabilities and functions. + */ + +#include "USARTDescriptors.h" + + +/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall + * device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the + * number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration + * process begins. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM USART_DeviceDescriptor = +{ + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device}, + + .USBSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol, + + .Endpoint0Size = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE, + + .VendorID = 0x03EB, + .ProductID = 0x204B, + .ReleaseNumber = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1), + + .ManufacturerStrIndex = USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer, + .ProductStrIndex = USART_STRING_ID_Product, + .SerialNumStrIndex = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL, + + .NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS +}; + +/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage + * of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces + * and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting + * a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device. + */ +const USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM USART_ConfigurationDescriptor = +{ + .Config = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration}, + + .TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t), + .TotalInterfaces = 2, + + .ConfigurationNumber = 1, + .ConfigurationStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR, + + .ConfigAttributes = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED, + + .MaxPowerConsumption = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100) + }, + + .CDC_CCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 1, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Header = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header, + + .CDCSpecification = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0), + }, + + .CDC_Functional_ACM = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM, + + .Capabilities = 0x06, + }, + + .CDC_Functional_Union = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface}, + .Subtype = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union, + + .MasterInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .SlaveInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + }, + + .CDC_NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0xFF + }, + + .CDC_DCI_Interface = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface}, + + .InterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI, + .AlternateSetting = 0, + + .TotalEndpoints = 2, + + .Class = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass, + .SubClass = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass, + .Protocol = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol, + + .InterfaceStrIndex = NO_DESCRIPTOR + }, + + .CDC_DataOutEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + }, + + .CDC_DataInEndpoint = + { + .Header = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint}, + + .EndpointAddress = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Attributes = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA), + .EndpointSize = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .PollingIntervalMS = 0x05 + } +}; + +/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests + * the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate + * via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG); + +/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable + * form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera"); + +/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form, + * and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device + * Descriptor. + */ +const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"); + +/** Descriptor retrieval function for the USART Bridge descriptors. This function is in turn called by the GetDescriptor + * callback function in the main source file, to retrieve the device's descriptors when in USART bridge mode. + */ +uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + const uint8_t DescriptorType = (wValue >> 8); + const uint8_t DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF); + + const void* Address = NULL; + uint16_t Size = NO_DESCRIPTOR; + + switch (DescriptorType) + { + case DTYPE_Device: + Address = &USART_DeviceDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t); + break; + case DTYPE_Configuration: + Address = &USART_ConfigurationDescriptor; + Size = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t); + break; + case DTYPE_String: + switch (DescriptorNumber) + { + case USART_STRING_ID_Language: + Address = &USART_LanguageString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&USART_LanguageString.Header.Size); + break; + case USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer: + Address = &USART_ManufacturerString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ManufacturerString.Header.Size); + break; + case USART_STRING_ID_Product: + Address = &USART_ProductString; + Size = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ProductString.Header.Size); + break; + } + + break; + } + + *DescriptorAddress = Address; + return Size; +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4f165a1e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for USARTDescriptors.c. + */ + +#ifndef _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_ +#define _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/pgmspace.h> + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + /* Macros: */ + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 2) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_TX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 3) + + /** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */ + #define CDC_RX_EPADDR (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4) + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */ + #define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE 8 + + /** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */ + #define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE 16 + + /* Type Defines: */ + /** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the + * application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which + * vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host. + */ + typedef struct + { + USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; + + // CDC Control Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_CCI_Interface; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t CDC_Functional_Header; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t CDC_Functional_ACM; + USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t CDC_Functional_Union; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_NotificationEndpoint; + + // CDC Data Interface + USB_Descriptor_Interface_t CDC_DCI_Interface; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataOutEndpoint; + USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t CDC_DataInEndpoint; + } USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t; + + /** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor + * should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the + * interface from other descriptors. + */ + enum USART_InterfaceDescriptors_t + { + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */ + INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */ + }; + + /** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should + * have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from + * other descriptors. + */ + enum USART_StringDescriptors_t + { + USART_STRING_ID_Language = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */ + USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */ + USART_STRING_ID_Product = 2, /**< Product string ID */ + }; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d901af819c --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Main source file for the XPLAINBridge project. This file contains the main tasks of + * the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration. + */ + +#include "XPLAINBridge.h" + +/** Current firmware mode, making the device behave as either a programmer or a USART bridge */ +bool CurrentFirmwareMode = MODE_USART_BRIDGE; + +/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is + * passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class + * within a device can be differentiated from one another. + */ +USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface = + { + .Config = + { + .ControlInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI, + .DataINEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_TX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .DataOUTEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_RX_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + .NotificationEndpoint = + { + .Address = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR, + .Size = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE, + .Banks = 1, + }, + }, + }; + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */ +RingBuffer_t USBtoUART_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t USBtoUART_Buffer_Data[128]; + +/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */ +RingBuffer_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer; + +/** Underlying data buffer for \ref UARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */ +static uint8_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128]; + + +/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial + * setup of all components and the main program loop. + */ +int main(void) +{ + SetupHardware(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); + GlobalInterruptEnable(); + + for (;;) + { + if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE) + UARTBridge_Task(); + else + AVRISP_Task(); + + USB_USBTask(); + } +} + +void AVRISP_Task(void) +{ + /* Must be in the configured state for the AVRISP code to process data */ + if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) + return; + + V2Params_UpdateParamValues(); + + Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR); + + /* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */ + if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived()) + { + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY); + + /* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */ + V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(); + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY); + } +} + +void UARTBridge_Task(void) +{ + /* Must be in the configured state for the USART Bridge code to process data */ + if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured) + return; + + /* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */ + if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUART_Buffer))) + { + int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + /* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the UART transmit buffer */ + if (!(ReceivedByte < 0)) + RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUART_Buffer, ReceivedByte); + } + + /* Check if the UART receive buffer flush timer has expired or buffer is nearly full */ + uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer); + if ((TIFR0 & (1 << TOV0)) || (BufferCount > 200)) + { + /* Clear flush timer expiry flag */ + TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0); + + /* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */ + while (BufferCount--) + { + /* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */ + if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, + RingBuffer_Peek(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError) + { + break; + } + + /* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */ + RingBuffer_Remove(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer); + } + } + + CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */ +void SetupHardware(void) +{ +#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8) + /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */ + MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF); + wdt_disable(); + + /* Disable clock division */ + clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1); +#endif + + /* Disable JTAG debugging */ + MCUCR |= (1 << JTD); + MCUCR |= (1 << JTD); + + /* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TDI pin so we can use it to select the mode */ + PORTF |= (1 << 7); + Delay_MS(10); + + /* Select the firmware mode based on the JTD pin's value */ + CurrentFirmwareMode = (PINF & (1 << 7)) ? MODE_USART_BRIDGE : MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER; + + /* Re-enable JTAG debugging */ + MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD); + MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD); + + /* Hardware Initialization */ + SoftUART_Init(); + LEDs_Init(); + #if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) + UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(); + #endif + + /* USB Stack Initialization */ + USB_Init(); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void) +{ + bool ConfigSuccess = true; + + /* Configure the device endpoints according to the selected mode */ + if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE) + { + ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); + + /* Configure the UART flush timer - run at Fcpu/1024 for maximum interval before overflow */ + TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00)); + + /* Initialize ring buffers used to hold serial data between USB and software UART interfaces */ + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUART_Buffer, USBtoUART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUART_Buffer_Data)); + RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data)); + + /* Start the software USART */ + SoftUART_Init(); + } + else + { + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1); + + if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK)) + ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1); + + /* Configure the V2 protocol packet handler */ + V2Protocol_Init(); + } + + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void) +{ + if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE) + CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING); +} + +/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */ +void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void) +{ + LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY); +} + +/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event. + * + * \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced + */ +void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo) +{ + /* Change the software UART's baud rate to match the new baud rate */ + SoftUART_SetBaud(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS); +} + +/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors" + * documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given + * to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function + * is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the + * USB host. + * + * \param[in] wValue Descriptor type and index to retrieve + * \param[in] wIndex Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language) + * \param[out] DescriptorAddress Address of the retrieved descriptor + * + * \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found + */ +uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) +{ + /* Return the correct descriptors based on the selected mode */ + if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE) + return USART_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress); + else + return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress); +} + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cc7d5b4997 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ +/* + LUFA Library + Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. + + dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com + www.lufa-lib.org +*/ + +/* + Copyright 2017 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com) + + Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this + software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted + without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in + all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this + permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting + documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in + advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the + software without specific, written prior permission. + + The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this + software, including all implied warranties of merchantability + and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any + special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages + whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether + in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action, + arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of + this software. +*/ + +/** \file + * + * Header file for XPLAINBridge.c. + */ + +#ifndef _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_ +#define _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_ + + /* Includes: */ + #include <avr/io.h> + #include <avr/wdt.h> + #include <avr/power.h> + #include <avr/interrupt.h> + #include <util/delay.h> + + #include "USARTDescriptors.h" + + #include "AVRISPDescriptors.h" + #include "Lib/V2Protocol.h" + #include "Lib/SoftUART.h" + #include "Config/AppConfig.h" + + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h> + #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> + #include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h> + + /* Macros: */ + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_READY LEDS_NO_LEDS + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */ + #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR LEDS_LED1 + + /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */ + #define LEDMASK_BUSY LEDS_LED1 + + /** Firmware mode define for the USART Bridge mode. */ + #define MODE_USART_BRIDGE false + + /** Firmware mode define for the AVRISP Programmer mode. */ + #define MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER true + + /* External Variables: */ + extern bool CurrentFirmwareMode; + extern RingBuffer_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer; + extern RingBuffer_t USBtoUART_Buffer; + + /* Function Prototypes: */ + void SetupHardware(void); + void AVRISP_Task(void); + void UARTBridge_Task(void); + + void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void); + void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void); + + void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo); + + uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue, + const uint16_t wIndex, + const void** const DescriptorAddress) + ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3); + +#endif + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..0cf59a67d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ +/** \file + * + * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special + * documentation pages. It is not a project source file. + */ + +/** \mainpage XPLAIN UART Bridge/PDI Programmer Project + * + * \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility: + * + * The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project. + * + * \li AT90USB1287 + * + * \section Sec_Info USB Information: + * + * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td> + * <td>1) Device</td> + * <td>2) Device</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td> + * <td>1) Communications Device Class (CDC)</td> + * <td>2) Vendor Specific Class</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td> + * <td>1) Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td> + * <td>2) N/A</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td> + * <td>1) USBIF CDC Class Standard</td> + * <td>2) Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td> + * <td>1) Full Speed Mode</td> + * <td>2) Full Speed Mode</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + * + * \section Sec_Description Project Description: + * + * This project serves a dual purpose. When loaded into the USB AVR on the XPLAIN board, it will act as either a USB to Serial + * converter for the XPLAIN's hardware USART (at a speed of 9600 baud), or an AVRStudio compatible PDI programmer for the XMEGA. + * This project replaces the firmware preloaded onto the XPLAIN's onboard AT90USB1287 microcontroller. + * + * When power to the board is applied, the TDI pin (pin 9) of the USB AVR's JTAG port is read. If the pin is left high, the device + * will enumerate as a regular COM port on the host, which can then be opened and data exchanged between the XMEGA and Host as if + * the XMEGA was connected directly to the host's serial port. If the pin is pulled low by shorting it to GND (pin 10), the device + * will enumerate as an AVRISP-MKII to the host, so that the XMEGA can be reprogrammed by AVRStudio or other compatible software + * such as avrdude by connecting to the board as if it was an Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer. + * + * After running this project in serial bridge mode for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file + * located in this project project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use + * its inbuilt CDC virtual serial drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should + * automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers. + * + * In serial bridge mode, the UART baud rate can be altered through the host terminal software to select a new baud rate - the default + * baud is 9600. Note that parity, data bits and stop bits are fixed at none, eight and one respectively can cannot be altered. Changes + * to the connection's parity, data bits or stop bits are ignored by the firmware. As the serial link between the controllers on the + * XPLAIN is software emulated by the USB AVR, not all baud rates will work correctly. + * + * This project relies on files from the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project for compilation. + * + * \section Sec_Options Project Options + * + * The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value. + * + * <table> + * <tr> + * <th><b>Define Name:</b></th> + * <th><b>Location:</b></th> + * <th><b>Description:</b></th> + * </tr> + * <tr> + * <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td> + * <td>AppConfig.h</td> + * <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible + * with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td> + * </tr> + * </table> + */ + diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dfdf46b905 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +<asf xmlversion="1.0">
+ <project caption="XPLAIN Bridge" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge.avr8">
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>
+ <generator value="as5_8"/>
+
+ <device-support value="at90usb1287"/>
+ <config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="xplain"/>
+
+ <build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>
+ <build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>
+ </project>
+
+ <module type="application" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge" caption="XPLAIN Bridge">
+ <info type="description" value="summary">
+ Bridge firmware for the original (green) XPLAIN board, for programming and USB virtual serial communications.
+ </info>
+
+ <info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>
+
+ <info type="keyword" value="Technology">
+ <keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>
+ <keyword value="USB Device"/>
+ <keyword value="CDC Class"/>
+ </info>
+
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>
+ <device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>
+
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="XPLAINBridge.txt"/>
+ <build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="XPLAINBridge.c"/>
+ <build type="c-source" value="USARTDescriptors.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="XPLAINBridge.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="USARTDescriptors.h"/>
+
+ <build type="c-source" value="Lib/SoftUART.c"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Lib/SoftUART.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>
+
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>
+ <build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>
+ <build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>
+
+ <require idref="lufa.common"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.platform"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>
+ <require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>
+ </module>
+</asf>
diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..15ae5a0d70 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile @@ -0,0 +1,2395 @@ +# Doxyfile 1.8.9 + +# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system +# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project. +# +# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in +# front of the TAG it is preceding. +# +# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored. +# The format is: +# TAG = value [value, ...] +# For lists, items can also be appended using: +# TAG += value [value, ...] +# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \"). + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Project related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file +# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text +# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv +# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv +# for the list of possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by +# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the +# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the +# title of most generated pages and in a few other places. +# The default value is: My Project. + +PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - XPLAIN Serial Bridge/PDI Programmer Project" + +# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This +# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version +# control system is used. + +PROJECT_NUMBER = + +# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description +# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a +# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short. + +PROJECT_BRIEF = + +# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify a logo or an icon that is included +# in the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 +# pixels and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy +# the logo to the output directory. + +PROJECT_LOGO = + +# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path +# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is +# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If +# left blank the current directory will be used. + +OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/ + +# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES then doxygen will create 4096 sub- +# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and +# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this +# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where +# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes +# performance problems for the file system. +# The default value is: NO. + +CREATE_SUBDIRS = NO + +# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII +# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII +# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode +# U+3044. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES = NO + +# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all +# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this +# information to generate all constant output in the proper language. +# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, +# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States), +# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, +# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages), +# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian, +# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, +# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, +# Ukrainian and Vietnamese. +# The default value is: English. + +OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English + +# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES, doxygen will include brief member +# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class +# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this. +# The default value is: YES. + +BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES + +# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the brief +# description of a member or function before the detailed description +# +# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the +# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed. +# The default value is: YES. + +REPEAT_BRIEF = YES + +# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is +# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found +# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text +# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated +# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the +# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of +# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides, +# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the. + +ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \ + "The $name widget" \ + "The $name file" \ + is \ + provides \ + specifies \ + contains \ + represents \ + a \ + an \ + the + +# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then +# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief +# description. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO + +# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all +# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those +# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment +# operators of the base classes will not be shown. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO + +# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will prepend the full path +# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the +# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used +# The default value is: YES. + +FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES + +# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. +# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand +# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list. +# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to +# strip. +# +# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which +# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started. +# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES. + +STRIP_FROM_PATH = + +# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the +# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which +# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of +# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should +# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler +# using the -I flag. + +STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH = + +# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but +# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't +# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHORT_NAMES = YES + +# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the +# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief +# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt- +# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief +# description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first +# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If +# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus +# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.) +# The default value is: NO. + +QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO + +# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a +# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as +# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is +# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this +# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead. +# +# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are +# not recognized any more. +# The default value is: NO. + +MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO + +# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the +# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements. +# The default value is: YES. + +INHERIT_DOCS = YES + +# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES then doxygen will produce a new +# page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be part +# of the file/class/namespace that contains it. +# The default value is: NO. + +SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO + +# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen +# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4. + +TAB_SIZE = 4 + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in +# the documentation. An alias has the form: +# name=value +# For example adding +# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n" +# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the +# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading +# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert +# newlines. + +ALIASES = + +# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only). +# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class" +# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning. + +TCL_SUBST = + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources +# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For +# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all +# members will be omitted, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or +# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored +# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, +# qualified scopes will look different, etc. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO + +# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL +# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL. +# The default value is: NO. + +OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO + +# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it +# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given +# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it +# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and +# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript, +# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran: +# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran: +# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed +# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For +# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP), +# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C. +# +# Note: For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder. +# +# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise +# the files are not read by doxygen. + +EXTENSION_MAPPING = + +# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments +# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable +# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details. +# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can +# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in +# case of backward compatibilities issues. +# The default value is: YES. + +MARKDOWN_SUPPORT = NO + +# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented +# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can +# be prevented in individual cases by putting a % sign in front of the word or +# globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +AUTOLINK_SUPPORT = YES + +# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want +# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this +# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and +# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); +# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration +# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate. +# The default value is: NO. + +BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO + +# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to +# enable parsing support. +# The default value is: NO. + +CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO + +# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see: +# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen +# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead +# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present. +# The default value is: NO. + +SIP_SUPPORT = NO + +# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate +# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make +# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation. +# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple +# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you +# should set this option to NO. +# The default value is: YES. + +IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES + +# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC +# tag is set to YES then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first +# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default +# all members of a group must be documented explicitly. +# The default value is: NO. + +DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO + +# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type +# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that +# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent +# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the +# \nosubgrouping command. +# The default value is: YES. + +SUBGROUPING = YES + +# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions +# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup) +# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX +# and RTF). +# +# Note that this feature does not work in combination with +# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO + +# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions +# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in +# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file, +# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set +# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and +# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF). +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS = NO + +# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or +# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So +# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct +# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file, +# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be +# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound +# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name. +# The default value is: NO. + +TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO + +# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This +# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be +# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the +# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small +# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The +# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range +# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536 +# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest +# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0. + +LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE = 0 + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Build related configuration options +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES, doxygen will assume all entities in +# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private +# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the +# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES. +# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are +# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ALL = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES, all private members of a class will +# be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES, all members with package or internal +# scope will be included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_PACKAGE = NO + +# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES, all static members of a file will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_STATIC = YES + +# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes (and structs) defined +# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO, +# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect +# for Java sources. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES + +# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. If set to YES, local methods, +# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are +# included in the documentation. If set to NO, only methods in the interface are +# included. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO + +# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be +# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called +# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of +# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace +# are hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these +# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation +# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO + +# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all +# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set +# to NO, these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option +# has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO + +# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend +# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO, these declarations will be +# included in the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO + +# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any +# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO, these +# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO + +# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a +# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation +# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INTERNAL_DOCS = NO + +# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file +# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES, upper-case letters are also +# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ +# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows +# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO. +# The default value is: system dependent. + +CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with +# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES, the +# scope will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO + +# If the HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE tag is set to NO (default) then doxygen will +# append additional text to a page's title, such as Class Reference. If set to +# YES the compound reference will be hidden. +# The default value is: NO. + +HIDE_COMPOUND_REFERENCE= NO + +# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of +# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES + +# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each +# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader +# which file to include in order to use the member. +# The default value is: NO. + +SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC = NO + +# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include +# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets. +# The default value is: NO. + +FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES = NO + +# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the +# documentation for inline members. +# The default value is: YES. + +INLINE_INFO = YES + +# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. +# The default value is: YES. + +SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES + +# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief +# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member +# name. If set to NO, the members will appear in declaration order. Note that +# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO + +# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the +# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and +# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the +# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS. +# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief +# member documentation. +# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting +# detailed member documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO + +# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy +# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will +# appear in their defined order. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO + +# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by +# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will +# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part. +# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES. +# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical +# list. +# The default value is: NO. + +SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO + +# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper +# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between +# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is +# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a +# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still +# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases. +# The default value is: NO. + +STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING = NO + +# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the todo +# list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the test +# list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) the bug +# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO + +# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or disable (NO) +# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in +# the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES + +# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation +# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label> +# ... \endcond blocks. + +ENABLED_SECTIONS = + +# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the +# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the +# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here +# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The +# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be +# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the +# documentation regardless of this setting. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30. + +MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30 + +# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at +# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES, the +# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_USED_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This +# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View +# (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_FILES = YES + +# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces +# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the +# Folder Tree View (if specified). +# The default value is: YES. + +SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES + +# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that +# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from +# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via +# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided +# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file +# version. For an example see the documentation. + +FILE_VERSION_FILTER = + +# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed +# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated +# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file +# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can +# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml +# will be used as the name of the layout file. +# +# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called +# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE +# tag is left empty. + +LAYOUT_FILE = + +# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing +# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib +# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool +# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info. +# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using +# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the +# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references. + +CITE_BIB_FILES = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to +# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the +# messages are off. +# The default value is: NO. + +QUIET = YES + +# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are +# generated to standard error (stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES +# this implies that the warnings are on. +# +# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARNINGS = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate +# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag +# will automatically be disabled. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES + +# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for +# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters +# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using +# markup commands wrongly. +# The default value is: YES. + +WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES + +# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that +# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return +# value. If set to NO, doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete +# parameter documentation, but not about the absence of documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES + +# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen +# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which +# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated +# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will +# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via +# FILE_VERSION_FILTER) +# The default value is: $file:$line: $text. + +WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text" + +# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error +# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard +# error (stderr). + +WARN_LOGFILE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the input files +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain +# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or +# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with +# spaces. +# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched. + +INPUT = ./ + +# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files +# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses +# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv +# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of +# possible encodings. +# The default value is: UTF-8. + +INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8 + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the +# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii, +# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp, +# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown, +# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf, +# *.qsf, *.as and *.js. + +FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \ + *.c \ + *.txt + +# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should +# be searched for input files as well. +# The default value is: NO. + +RECURSIVE = YES + +# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be +# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a +# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag. +# +# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is +# run. + +EXCLUDE = Documentation/ + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or +# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded +# from the input. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO + +# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude +# certain files from those directories. +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = + +# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names +# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the +# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the +# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass, +# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test +# +# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to +# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/* + +EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __* \ + INCLUDE_FROM_* + +# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include +# command). + +EXAMPLE_PATH = + +# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the +# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and +# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all +# files are included. + +EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = * + +# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be +# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands +# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag. +# The default value is: NO. + +EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO + +# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories +# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the +# \image command). + +IMAGE_PATH = + +# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should +# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program +# by executing (via popen()) the command: +# +# <filter> <input-file> +# +# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the +# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter +# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag +# will be ignored. +# +# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the +# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added +# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly. + +INPUT_FILTER = + +# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern +# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the +# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter +# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how +# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the +# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied. + +FILTER_PATTERNS = + +# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using +# INPUT_FILTER) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for +# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES). +# The default value is: NO. + +FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO + +# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file +# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and +# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using +# *.ext= (so without naming a filter). +# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES. + +FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS = + +# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that +# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page +# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub +# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output. + +USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to source browsing +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be +# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources. +# +# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that +# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO. +# The default value is: NO. + +SOURCE_BROWSER = NO + +# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions, +# classes and enums directly into the documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +INLINE_SOURCES = NO + +# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any +# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and +# Fortran comments will always remain visible. +# The default value is: YES. + +STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES + +# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented +# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function +# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +REFERENCES_RELATION = NO + +# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set +# to YES then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and +# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will +# link to the documentation. +# The default value is: YES. + +REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO + +# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the +# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype, +# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this +# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you +# can opt to disable this feature. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +SOURCE_TOOLTIPS = YES + +# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will +# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in +# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system +# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version +# 4.8.6 or higher. +# +# To use it do the following: +# - Install the latest version of global +# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file +# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree +# - Run doxygen as normal +# +# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these +# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path). +# +# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to +# source code will now point to the output of htags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES. + +USE_HTAGS = NO + +# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a +# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is +# specified. Set to NO to disable this. +# See also: Section \class. +# The default value is: YES. + +VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO + +# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES then doxygen will use the +# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the +# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template +# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type +# information. +# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was +# compiled with the --with-libclang option. +# The default value is: NO. + +CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO + +# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command +# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that +# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories +# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH. +# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES. + +CLANG_OPTIONS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all +# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of +# classes, structs, unions or interfaces. +# The default value is: YES. + +ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES + +# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in +# which the alphabetical index list will be split. +# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5 + +# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will +# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag +# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored +# while generating the index headers. +# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES. + +IGNORE_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the HTML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate HTML output +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_HTML = YES + +# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_OUTPUT = html + +# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each +# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp). +# The default value is: .html. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html + +# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for +# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a +# standard header. +# +# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets +# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g. +# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a +# default header using +# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css +# YourConfigFile +# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage" +# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally +# uses. +# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the +# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description +# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_HEADER = + +# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each +# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard +# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default +# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer +# that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_FOOTER = + +# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style +# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of +# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet. +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style +# sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as +# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become +# obsolete. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets +# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. +# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the +# standard style sheet and is therefore more robust against future updates. +# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). For an example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note +# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the +# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these +# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the +# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_EXTRA_FILES = + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen +# will adjust the colors in the style sheet and background images according to +# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value +# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300 +# purple, and 360 is red again. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE = 220 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors +# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A +# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT = 100 + +# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the +# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100 +# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output +# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents +# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not +# change the gamma. +# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA = 80 + +# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML +# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this +# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_TIMESTAMP = NO + +# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML +# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the +# page has loaded. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES + +# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries +# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand +# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to +# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless +# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of +# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value +# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded +# tree by default. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100 + +# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development +# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with +# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a +# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in +# that directory and running make install will install the docset in +# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at +# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html +# for more information. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_DOCSET = NO + +# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides +# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider +# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped. +# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs" + +# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation +# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g. +# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify +# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style +# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID = org.doxygen.Publisher + +# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher. +# The default value is: Publisher. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES. + +DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME = Publisher + +# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three +# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The +# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop +# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on +# Windows. +# +# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output +# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML +# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old +# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed +# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for +# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for +# compressed HTML files. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO + +# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm +# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be +# written to the html output directory. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_FILE = + +# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path +# including file name) of the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty, +# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp. +# The file has to be specified with full path. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +HHC_LOCATION = + +# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated +# (YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file (NO). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +GENERATE_CHI = NO + +# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) +# and project file content. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +CHM_INDEX_ENCODING = + +# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated +# (YES) or a normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it +# enables the Previous and Next buttons. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +BINARY_TOC = NO + +# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to +# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES. + +TOC_EXPAND = YES + +# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and +# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that +# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help +# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_QHP = NO + +# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify +# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to +# the HTML output folder. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QCH_FILE = + +# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help +# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace +# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace). +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project + +# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt +# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual +# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual- +# folders). +# The default value is: doc. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc + +# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom +# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME = + +# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the +# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom +# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom- +# filters). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this +# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see: +# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS = + +# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's +# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the +# generated .qhp file. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES. + +QHG_LOCATION = + +# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be +# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To +# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in +# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs +# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory +# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value. +# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP = NO + +# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin +# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this +# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier. +# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES. + +ECLIPSE_DOC_ID = org.doxygen.Project + +# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might +# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The +# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top +# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables +# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation +# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +DISABLE_INDEX = YES + +# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index +# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag +# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like +# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this +# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required +# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the +# HTML help feature. Via custom style sheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can +# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style +# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at +# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has +# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting +# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES + +# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that +# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation. +# +# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing +# in the overview section. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1 + +# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used +# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250 + +# If the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES, doxygen will open links to +# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW = NO + +# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in +# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful +# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML +# output directory to force them to be regenerated. +# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images +# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not +# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers. +# +# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in +# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +FORMULA_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see +# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering +# instead of using pre-rendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX +# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When +# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path +# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +USE_MATHJAX = NO + +# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for +# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see: +# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. +# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best +# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG. +# The default value is: HTML-CSS. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_FORMAT = HTML-CSS + +# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML +# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory +# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory +# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then +# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax +# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing +# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of +# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment. +# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_RELPATH = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest + +# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax +# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example +# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = + +# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces +# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site +# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an +# example see the documentation. +# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES. + +MATHJAX_CODEFILE = + +# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for +# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and +# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help +# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET) +# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled. +# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then +# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to +# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S +# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically +# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down +# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated +# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel +# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the +# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys> +# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter +# option. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE = NO + +# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be +# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There +# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH +# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and +# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing +# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section +# "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SERVER_BASED_SEARCH = NO + +# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP +# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file +# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an +# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the +# search results. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). +# +# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH = NO + +# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server +# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled. +# +# Doxygen ships with an example indexer (doxyindexer) and search engine +# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library +# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and +# Searching" for details. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHENGINE_URL = + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed +# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the +# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified. +# The default file is: searchdata.xml. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +SEARCHDATA_FILE = searchdata.xml + +# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the +# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is +# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple +# projects and redirect the results back to the right project. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID = + +# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen +# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are +# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a +# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of +# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is: +# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ... +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES. + +EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate LaTeX output. +# The default value is: YES. + +GENERATE_LATEX = NO + +# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_OUTPUT = latex + +# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be +# invoked. +# +# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating +# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is +# written to the output directory. +# The default file is: latex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex + +# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate +# index for LaTeX. +# The default file is: makeindex. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex + +# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact LaTeX +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +COMPACT_LATEX = NO + +# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the +# printer. +# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x +# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches). +# The default value is: a4. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PAPER_TYPE = a4wide + +# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names +# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for +# instance you can specify +# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times +# If left blank no extra packages will be included. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +EXTRA_PACKAGES = + +# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the +# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See +# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the +# default header to a separate file. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The +# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title, +# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber, +# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empty +# string, for the replacement values of the other commands the user is referred +# to HTML_HEADER. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HEADER = + +# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the +# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last +# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See +# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what +# special commands can be used inside the footer. +# +# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing! +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_FOOTER = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined +# LaTeX style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets created +# by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects. Doxygen +# will copy the style sheet files to the output directory. +# Note: The order of the extra style sheet files is of importance (e.g. the last +# style sheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the +# list). +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_STYLESHEET = + +# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or +# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output +# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or +# markers available. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_EXTRA_FILES = + +# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is +# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will +# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This +# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES + +# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate +# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES, to get a +# higher quality PDF documentation. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +USE_PDFLATEX = YES + +# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode +# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running +# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used +# when generating formulas in HTML. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO + +# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the +# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO + +# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source +# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the +# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See +# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info. +# The default value is: plain. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES. + +LATEX_BIB_STYLE = plain + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the RTF output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate RTF output. The +# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF +# readers/editors. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_RTF = NO + +# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: rtf. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_OUTPUT = rtf + +# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES, doxygen generates more compact RTF +# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some +# trees in general. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +COMPACT_RTF = NO + +# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will +# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML +# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online +# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those +# fields. +# +# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO + +# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config +# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements, +# missing definitions are set to their default value. +# +# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the +# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE = + +# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is +# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated +# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE = + +# If the RTF_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source code +# with syntax highlighting in the RTF output. +# +# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as +# SOURCE_BROWSER. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES. + +RTF_SOURCE_CODE = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the man page output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate man pages for +# classes and files. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_MAN = NO + +# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by +# MAN_OUTPUT. +# The default directory is: man. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_OUTPUT = man + +# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated +# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number +# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is +# optional. +# The default value is: .3. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_EXTENSION = .3 + +# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within +# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by +# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_SUBDIR = + +# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it +# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real +# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without +# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES. + +MAN_LINKS = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the XML output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an XML file that +# captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_XML = NO + +# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a +# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of +# it. +# The default directory is: xml. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_OUTPUT = xml + +# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will dump the program +# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to +# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size +# of the XML output. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES. + +XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate Docbook files +# that can be used to generate PDF. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_DOCBOOK = NO + +# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put. +# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in +# front of it. +# The default directory is: docbook. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_OUTPUT = docbook + +# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES, doxygen will include the +# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing +# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly +# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES. + +DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate an +# AutoGen Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the +# structure of the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is +# still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the Perl module output +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a Perl module +# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation. +# +# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment. +# The default value is: NO. + +GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate the necessary +# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI +# output from the Perl module output. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_LATEX = NO + +# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES, the Perl module output will be nicely +# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to +# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO, the +# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it +# just the same. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES + +# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are +# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful +# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't +# overwrite each other's variables. +# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES. + +PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX = + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the preprocessor +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES, doxygen will evaluate all +# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files. +# The default value is: YES. + +ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES, doxygen will expand all macro names +# in the source code. If set to NO, only conditional compilation will be +# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting +# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +MACRO_EXPANSION = YES + +# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then +# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and +# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES + +# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES, the include files in the +# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES + +# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the +# preprocessor. +# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_PATH = + +# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard +# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the +# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be +# used. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS = + +# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are +# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g. +# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or +# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1" +# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or +# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__ \ + PROGMEM + +# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this +# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The +# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED +# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the +# definition found in the source code. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = + +# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will +# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have +# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros +# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not +# removed. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES. + +SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to external references +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag +# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of +# a tag file without this location is as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ... +# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows: +# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ... +# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the +# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use +# of tag files. +# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include +# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is +# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here. + +TAGFILES = + +# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a +# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to +# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files. + +GENERATE_TAGFILE = + +# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES, all external class will be listed in +# the class index. If set to NO, only the inherited external classes will be +# listed. +# The default value is: NO. + +ALLEXTERNALS = NO + +# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES, all external groups will be listed +# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be +# listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES + +# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES, all external pages will be listed in +# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will +# be listed. +# The default value is: YES. + +EXTERNAL_PAGES = YES + +# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script +# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl'). +# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl. + +PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl + +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- +# Configuration options related to the dot tool +#--------------------------------------------------------------------------- + +# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate a class diagram +# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to +# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT +# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more +# powerful graphs. +# The default value is: YES. + +CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO + +# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc +# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see: +# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the +# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where +# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the +# default search path. + +MSCGEN_PATH = + +# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will +# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The +# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides. +# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path. + +DIA_PATH = + +# If set to YES the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance +# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class. +# The default value is: YES. + +HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES + +# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is +# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see: +# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent +# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is +# set to NO +# The default value is: NO. + +HAVE_DOT = NO + +# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed +# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of +# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value +# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing +# speed. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_NUM_THREADS = 0 + +# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen +# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make +# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a +# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by +# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font. +# The default value is: Helvetica. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTNAME = + +# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of +# dot graphs. +# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTSIZE = 10 + +# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with +# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set +# the path where dot can find it using this tag. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_FONTPATH = + +# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations. +# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CLASS_GRAPH = NO + +# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a +# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation +# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the +# class with other documented classes. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for +# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GROUP_GRAPHS = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate inheritance and +# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling +# Language. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LOOK = NO + +# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the +# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may +# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the +# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0 +# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit +# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear, +# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to +# 10. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS = 10 + +# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and +# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their +# instances. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO + +# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to +# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the +# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO + +# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are +# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing +# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented +# files. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callgraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALL_GRAPH = NO + +# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller +# dependency graph for every global function or class method. +# +# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run. +# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected +# functions only using the \callergraph command. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +CALLER_GRAPH = NO + +# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical +# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO + +# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the +# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The +# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the +# files in the directories. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO + +# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images +# generated by dot. +# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order +# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this +# requirement). +# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg. +# The default value is: png. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png + +# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to +# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning. +# +# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested +# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera. +# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make +# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +INTERACTIVE_SVG = NO + +# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be +# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_PATH = + +# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile +# command). +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOTFILE_DIRS = + +# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile +# command). + +MSCFILE_DIRS = + +# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that +# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile +# command). + +DIAFILE_DIRS = + +# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the +# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed +# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will +# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and +# will not generate output for the diagram. + +PLANTUML_JAR_PATH = + +# When using plantuml, the specified paths are searched for files specified by +# the !include statement in a plantuml block. + +PLANTUML_INCLUDE_PATH = + +# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes +# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes +# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized +# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct +# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that +# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15 + +# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs +# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the +# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay +# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1 +# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also +# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by +# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction. +# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2 + +# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent +# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem +# to support this out of the box. +# +# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to +# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to +# read). +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES + +# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES to allow dot to generate multiple output +# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This +# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support +# this, this feature is disabled by default. +# The default value is: NO. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO + +# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page +# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated +# graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +GENERATE_LEGEND = YES + +# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES, doxygen will remove the intermediate dot +# files that are used to generate the various graphs. +# The default value is: YES. +# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES. + +DOT_CLEANUP = YES diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6c38917cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# +# -------------------------------------- +# LUFA Project Makefile. +# -------------------------------------- + +# Run "make help" for target help. + +AVRISP_PATH = ../AVRISP-MKII + +MCU = at90usb1287 +ARCH = AVR8 +BOARD = XPLAIN +F_CPU = 8000000 +F_USB = $(F_CPU) +OPTIMIZATION = s +TARGET = XPLAINBridge +SRC = $(TARGET).c Lib/SoftUART.c USARTDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/AVRISPDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2Protocol.c \ + $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c \ + $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c \ + $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) +LUFA_PATH = ../../LUFA +CC_FLAGS = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -I$(AVRISP_PATH) +LD_FLAGS = + +# Default target +all: + +# Since this project borrows files from the AVRISP-MKII project which may also have an +# identical OBJDIR directory, we need to enforce the use of this project's object file +# directory as the one where the build object files are to be stored, by giving it a +# path relative to the current folder. +OBJDIR := ./obj + +# Include LUFA-specific DMBS extension modules +DMBS_LUFA_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/LUFA +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-sources.mk +include $(DMBS_LUFA_PATH)/lufa-gcc.mk + +# Include common DMBS build system modules +DMBS_PATH ?= $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/DMBS/DMBS +include $(DMBS_PATH)/core.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/cppcheck.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/doxygen.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/dfu.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/gcc.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/hid.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/avrdude.mk +include $(DMBS_PATH)/atprogram.mk diff --git a/lib/lufa/Projects/makefile b/lib/lufa/Projects/makefile new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..1681584244 --- /dev/null +++ b/lib/lufa/Projects/makefile @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +# +# LUFA Library +# Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2017. +# +# dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com +# www.lufa-lib.org +# + +# Makefile to build all the LUFA Projects. Call with "make all" to +# rebuild all projects. + +# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any +# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled +# code. + +PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */) + +# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad +# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if +# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails. +ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10) + $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED) +endif + +# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory +ifeq ($(OBJDIR),) + # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build + ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),) + MAKECMDGOALS := clean all + .NOTPARALLEL: + endif + + # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build + ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),) + MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS) + .NOTPARALLEL: + endif +endif + +%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES) + @echo . > /dev/null + +$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES): + @$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS) + +.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES) + |